Easergy MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Current Differential Protection Relay, SW version H4, Manual (global file) P54x_EN_M_Nd5__H4__M
Дата : 11/04/2023
Тип : Руководство пользователя
Языки : Английский
Версия : 1.0
Обозначение документа : P54x_EN_M_Nd5__H4__M
Дата : 11/04/2023
Тип : Руководство пользователя
Языки : Английский
Версия : 1.0
Обозначение документа : P54x_EN_M_Nd5__H4__M
| AUTOMATION
GRID
MiCOM ALSTOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Current Differential Protection Relay
Software Version: 47 & 57
Hardware Version: K
Update Documentation
P54x/EN AD/Lb4
Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Alstom Grid technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Alstom Grid including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual.
This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of Alstom Grid, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The Alstom Grid logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Alstom Grid.
MiCOM is a registered trademark of Alstom Grid. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners.
This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
© 2010, Alstom Grid. All rights reserved.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -1
UPDATE DOCUMENTATION
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -2
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -3
P54x UPDATE DOCUMENTATION
In the firmware version 45 and 55K of P54x, several changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
Release Version Documentation
16.03.2009 P54x/EN M/La4 Technical Manual
Document Ref. Section Page No. Description
P54x/EN IT/La4
3.1
1-7
Functional overview
64 REF protection added
Corrected 67/46 to show 4 stages
3.2
1-10 1-11
Ordering options
Hardware options updated
Redundant Etherner Options added
Software number updated
P54x/EN TD/La4
—
2-7
Protection functions
Phase and ground (earth) Overcurrent modified to Three Phase Overcurrent Protection. Addition of Accuracy claims.
Earth Fault added
REF Added
—
2-12
2-15
Settings, measurements and records list
Configuration updated
EIA(RS)232 Teleprotection added
INTERMiCOM conf. added
Prot comms/IM64 updated
—
2-17
2-19
Protection functions
Phase current differential protection updated
Sensitive earth fault updated
—
2-24
2-26
Measurements list Measurements 1 updated
Fault Record Proforma updated
P54x/EN ST/La4
1.1
4-4
4-6
Relay settings configuration
Sensitive E/F modified to SEF/REF PROT’N
IREF>Stage added
Restricted Earth Fault Protection added
Read Only mode feature added
1.2
4-6 Integral teleprotection settings
New section
1.2.1
4-6 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM
New section
1.3
4-8
Protection communication configuration
GPS Sync updated
Char Mod Time updated
Char Mod Ex feature added
Char Mod Ex Time feature added
1.4.2
4-17
Distance setup (only for models with distance option)
Cells under DELTA DIRECTION updated
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -4
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Document Ref. Section Page No. Description
P54x/EN ST/La4 Continued
1.4.4
4-23
Phase differential
Compensation: Vector group text changed to Transformer
Inrush Restraint updated to add blocking feature
Ih (2) & (5) features added
Id High Set updated
1.4.12
4-38
4-39
Sensitive earth fault
Sensitive E/F modified to SEF/REF
HI Z REF Protection added
IREF> Is setting added
1.5.1
4-68 System data
Software Ref.1 and 2 updated
P54x/EN OP/La4
1.1.1.2
5-18
Time alignment of current vectors with GPS input (all models)
Section updated to reflect changes to GPS SYNC setting.
1.2
5-20
Protection of transformer feeders (P543 and P545)
Previously 1.1.4
Section updated
1.2.1
5-20
Enabling or disabling differential protection for in-zone power transformer
New section
1.2.2
5-20
Transformer magnetizing inrush (P543/P545)
Previously 1.1.4.1
Heading and section updated
1.2.2.1
5-20 Second harmonic restraint (P543/P545)
New section
1.2.2.2
5-20 Second harmonic blocking (P543/P545)
New section
1.2.2.3
5-20 Fifth harmonic blocking (P543/P545)
New section
1.2.2.4
5-20 High set differential (P543/P545)
Section split: previously part of 1.1.4.1
1.6.2
5-27
Tripping mode — selection of single or three phase tripping
Previously 1.5.2
Figure 17 updated
1.29
5-84
Earth fault, Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection
Previously 1.28
Heading and section updated
1.29.2
5-84 Restricted Earth Fault protection (REF)
New section
1.32
5-90 Undervoltage protection
Figure 67 updated
1.33
5-91 Overvoltage protection
Figure 68 updated
1.35.1
5-96
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
Figure 71 updated
Figure 72 updated
2.1.6
5-105 Switched communication networks
Char Mod Ex feature added
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -5
Document Ref. Section Page No. Description
P54x/EN OP/La4
Continued
2.1.12.1
5-111 Pilot isolation
Section deleted
2.1.12.2
5-111 Baseband modem and P590 specification
Section deleted
2.1.12.3
5-112 Baseband modem propagation delay
Section deleted
2.1.12.4
5-112 Baseband modem and relay configuration
Section deleted
2.1.13
5-111
Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2 km
New section
2.2
5-117 InterMiCOM
New section
2.2.1
5-117 Protection signaling
New section
2.2.2
5-117 InterMiCOM variants
New section
2.2.3
5-117 InterMiCOM features
New section
2.2.4
5-117 Definition of teleprotection commands
New section
2.3
5-117
MODEM InterMiCOM, EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM or Copper InterMiCOM
New section
2.3.1
5-117 Communications media
New section
2.3.2
5-117 General features and implementation
New section
2.3.3
5-117 EIA(RS)232 physical connections
New section
2.3.4
5-117 Direct connection
New section
2.3.5
5-117 EIA(RS)232 modem connection
New section
2.3.6
5-117 RS422 connection
New section
2.3.7
5-117 Fiber optic connection
New section
2.3.8
5-117 InterMiCOM functional assignment
New section
2.3.9
5-117 InterMiCOM statistics and diagnostics
New section
3.8
5-132
Read Only mode
New section
3.8.1
5-132 Protocol/port implementation:
New section
3.8.1.1
5-132 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol on rear port 1:
New section
3.8.1.2
5-132 Courier protocol on rear port 1/2 and Ethernet
New section
3.8.1.3
5-132 IEC 61850
New section
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -6
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Document Ref. Section Page No. Description
P54x/EN OP/La4
Continued
3.8.2
5-132 Courier database support
New section
3.8.3
5-132 New DDB signals
New section
P54x/EN AP/La4
2.1.4
6-11
Transformers in-zone applications (P543 and P545 models)
Paragraph two amended
Paragraph after Note deleted
2.1.4.1
6-12
Magnetizing inrush stabilization (P543 and P545)
New section
2.1.4.2
6-12 Second harmonic restraint (P543 and P545)
New section
2.1.4.3
6-12 Second harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
New section
2.1.4.4
6-12 Fifth Harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
New section
2.1.4.7
6-13 High set differential setting (P543 and P545)
Heading and paragraph one amended
2.8.4
6-39 Restricted earth fault protection
New section
2.8.4.1
6-39
Setting guidelines for high impedance Restricted Earth fault (REF)
New section
2.18.4.2 6-19 Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors
New section
2.17
6-47 Integral intertripping
New section
2.17.1
6-47
EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM (“Modem InterMiCOM”)
New section
4.4
6-76 Read Only mode
New section
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -7
Document Ref. Section Page No. Description
P54x/EN PL/La4
1.7
7-16-54
Description of logic node
DDB 80 added
DDBs 87 to 88 added
DDB 95 added
DDBs 365 to 368
DDBs 460 to 461 updated
DDB 682 added
DDBs 737 to 740 updated
DDBs 1016 to 1019 updated
DDBs 1021 to 1023 added
DDBs 1437 to 1440 updated
DDB 1616 added
DDBs 1665 to 1671 added
DDB 1696 to 1697 added
DDB 1710 to 1711 added
DDB 1728 added
DDBs 1759 to 1760 added
DDB 1791 added
P54x/EN MR/La4
1.4.1
8-11
Measured voltages and currents
Paragraph one updated
1.4.8
8-14
Measurement display quantities
CT1 and CT2 Magnitude added
CT1 and CT2 Phase angle added
P54x/EN VH/La4
—
16-1-46
Firmware and service manual version history
Updated with latest relay software details
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -8
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
INTRODUCTION (P54x/EN IT/La4)
3.1 Functional overview The P54x distance relay contains a wide variety of protection functions. The protection features are summarized below:
Models
ANSI FEATURE P543 P544 P545 P546
Optocoupled digital inputs 16 16 24 24
Standard relay output contacts 14 14 32 32
Standard and high break output contacts (11) (11) (24) (24) (20)
Dual rated 1A and 5A CT inputs
Tripping Mode — single or three pole
ABC and ACB phase rotation
Multiple password access control levels
87 Phase segregated current differential
2 and 3 terminal lines/cables
Feeders with in-zone transformers
Control of dual circuit breakers
Suitable for use with SDH/SONET networks (using P594)
InterMiCOM64 teleprotection for direct relay-relay communication
21P/21G Distance zones, full-scheme protection (5) (5) (5) (5)
Phase elements
Characteristic
Ground elements Mho and quadrilateral
CVT transient overreach elimination
Load blinder
Easy setting mode
Mutual compensation (for fault locator and distance zones)
85 Communication-aided schemes, PUTT, POTT, Blocking, Weak Infeed
Accelerated tripping — loss of load and Z1 extension
50/27 Switch on to fault and trip on recluse — elements for fast fault clearance upon breaker closure
68 Power swing blocking
78 Out of step
67N Directional earth fault (DEF) unit protection
50/51/67 Phase overcurrent stages, with optional directionality
4 4 4 4
50N/51N/ 67N Earth/ground overcurrent stages, with optional directionality
4 4 4 4
51N/67N/SEF Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) 4 4 4 4
64 High impedance Restricted Earth Fault
67/46 Negative sequence overcurrent stages, with optional directionality
4 4 4 4
46BC Broken conductor (open jumper), used to detect open circuit faults
49 Thermal overload protection
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -9
Models
ANSI FEATURE P543 P544 P545 P546
27 Undervoltage protection stages 2 2 2 2
59 Overvoltage protection stages 2 2 2 2
59 Remote Remote overvoltage protection stages 2 2 2 2
59N Residual voltage stages (neutral displacement) 2 2 2 2
81U/O/R A 4-stage underfrequency, 2-stage overfrequency and an advanced 4-stage rate of change of frequency element as well.
50BF High speed breaker fail. Two-stage, suitable for re-tripping and backtripping
CTS CT supervision (including differential CTS, patent pending)
VTS Current and voltage transformer supervision
79 Auto-reclose — shots supported 4 4 4 4
25 Check synchronism, 2 stages
Alternative setting groups 4 4 4 4
FL Fault locator
SOE event records 512 512 512 512
Disturbance recorder, samples per cycle. For waveform capture
48 48 48 48
Circuit breaker condition monitoring
Graphical programmable scheme logic (PSL)
IRIG-B time synchronism
Second rear communication port
High speed, high break (HB) contacts
The P54x supports the following relay management functions in addition to the functions illustrated above.
Measurement of all instantaneous & integrated values
Circuit breaker control, status & condition monitoring
Trip circuit and coil supervision
Programmable hotkeys (2)
Control inputs
Programmable allocation of digital inputs and outputs
Fully customizable menu texts
Power-up diagnostics and continuous self-monitoring of relay
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -10
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Application overview
�������
Figure 1: Functional diagram
3.2 Ordering options
Information required with order
P54x Current differential protection P54 K
Current Differential for single breaker (60TE/12”) Current Differential for dual breaker (60TE/12”) Current Differential for single breaker (80TE/12”) Current Differential for dual breaker (80TE/12”)
3456
Auxiliary voltage rating
24 — 48 Vdc 48 — 125 Vdc (40 — 100 Vac) 110 — 250 Vdc ( 100 — 240 Vac )
123
In/Vn rating
Dual rated CT (1 & 5 A: 100 — 120 V) 1
Hardware Options
Protocol Compatibility
Standard — None 1, 3 & 4 1
IRIG-B Only (Modulated) 1, 3 & 4 2
Fiber Optic Converter Only 1, 3 & 4 3
IRIG-B (Modulated) & Fiber Optic Converter 1, 3 & 4 4
Ethernet (100 Mbit/s) 6, 7 & 8 6
Ethernet (100 Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (Modulated) 6, 7 & 8 A
Ethernet (100 Mbit/s) plus IRIG-B (De-modulated)
6, 7 & 8 B
IRIG-B (De-modulated) 1, 3 & 4 C
Second rear comms + Interrupt InterMiCOM 1, 3 & 4 E
IRIG-B (Modulated) + second rear comms + Interrupt InterMiCOM
1, 3 & 4 F
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 G
Redundant Ethernet Self-Healing Ring, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 H
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 J
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) -11
Redundant Ethernet RSTP, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 K
Redundant Ethernet Dual-Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 L
Redundant Ethernet Dual-Homing Star, 2 multi-mode fiber ports + Un-modulated IRIG-B
6, 7 & 8 M
Product specific
850 nm dual channel 1300 nm SM single channel 1300 nm SM dual channel 1300 nm MM single channel 1300 nm MM dual channel 1550 nm SM single channel 1550 nm SM dual channel 850 nm MM + 1300 nm SM 850 nm dual channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 850 nm dual channel + 8 std + 12hb (Note 2) 850 nm MM + 1300 nm MM 850 nm MM + 1550 nm SM 1300 nm SM + 850 nm MM 1300 nm MM + 850 nm MM 1300 nm SM single channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1300 nm SM single channel + 8 std + 12hb (Note 2) 1300 nm SM dual channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1300 nm SM dual channel + 8 std + 12hb (Note 2) 1300 nm MM single channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1300 nm MM single channel + 8 std + 12hb (Note 2) 1300 nm MM dual channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1300 nm MM dual channel + 8 std + 12hb (Note 2) 1550 nm SM + 850 nm MM 850 nm dual channel + High Break 1300 nm SM single channel + High Break 1300 nm SM dual channel + High Break 1300 nm MM single channel + High Break 1300 nm MM dual channel + High Break 1550 nm SM single channel + High Break 1550 nm SM single channel + High Break 850 nm MM + 1300 nm SM + High Break 850 nm MM + 1300 nm MM + High Break 850 nm MM + 1550 nm SM + High Break 1300 nm SM + 850 nm MM + High Break 1300 nm MM + 850 nm MM + High Break 1550 nm SM + 850 nm MM + High Break 1550 nm SM single channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1550 nm SM single channel + 8 std + 12 hb (Note 2) 1550 nm SM single channel + 32 Inputs (Note 1) 1550 nm SM single channel + 8 std + 12 hb (Note 2)
ABCDEFGHI I J KLM NNOOPPQQRSTUVWXZ0123458899
Protocol Options
Hardware Compatibility
K-Bus 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 & C, E & F 1
IEC870 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 & C, E & F 3
DNP3.0 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 & C, E & F 4
IEC 61850 + Courier via rear RS485 port
6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L & M 6
IEC 61850+IEC 60870-5-103 via rear RS485 port
6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L & M 7
DNP3.0 Over Ethernet with Courier rear port K-Bus/RS485 protocol
6, A, B, G, H, J, K, L & M 8
Mounting
Flush Panel Rack (P545, P546 only)
M N
Language options
Multilingual — English, French, German, SpanishMultilingual — English, French, German, RussianMultilingual — Chinese, English or French via HMI,with English or French only via Communications port
0 5 C
Software number
P543/P545 Without Distance P543/P545 With Distance P544/P546 Without Distance P544/P546 With Distance
47 57 47 57
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation
(AD) -12
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Settings file
Default Customer
0A
Hardware suffix
Note 3. K
Note 1: Option applies to P545 only.
Note 2: Option applies to P546 only
Note 3:
A = Original
B = Universal Optos, New Relays, New Co-Processor Board, New PSU
G = CPU2
J = Dual Rated Optos
K = Extended CPU2
For up-to-date information on the cortec, please visit the website.
TECHNICAL DATA (P54x/EN TD/La4)
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 13
Protection functions
Phase current differential protection
Accuracy Pick-up: Formula 10% Drop-off: 0.75 x Formula 10% IDMT characteristic shape: 5% or 40 ms whichever is greater DT operation: 2% or 20 ms whichever is greater Instantaneous Operation: <30 ms Reset time: <60 ms Repeatability: 2.5% Characteristic: UK curves IEC 60255-3 – 1998 US curves IEEE C37.112 – 1996 Vector compensation: No affect on accuracy Current transformer ratio Compensation No affect on accuracy High set characteristic setting: No affect on accuracy Two ended scheme operation: No affect on accuracy Three ended scheme operation: No affect on accuracy
Distance protection
All quoted operating times include the closure of the trip output contact.
The following tripping characteristics, show Operating time Versus reach percentage, for faults close to line angle 50 Hz operation
60 Hz operation
Accuracy Characteristic shape, up to SIR = 30: 5% for on-angle fault (the set line angle) 10% off-angle (Example: For a 70 degree set line angle, injection testing at 40 degrees would be referred to as “off-angle”). Zone time delay deviations: 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater.
Sensitivity Settings < 5/In : (0.05 In*5/(setting*In)) 5% Settings > 5/In : 0.05 In 5%
Out of step Accuracy of zones and timers as per distance Operating range: up to 7 Hz
Three phase overcurrent protection Accuracy Additional tolerance X/R ratios: ±5% over X/R 1…90 Overshoot: <30 ms
Inverse time characteristic
Accuracy Pick-up: Setting 5% Drop-off: 0.95 x setting 5% Minimum trip level for IDMT elements: 1.05 x Setting 5% Inverse time stages: 40 ms or 5%, whichever is greater Definite time stages: 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Repeatability: 5% Directional boundary accuracy: 2° with hysteresis <3° Additional tolerance due to increasing X/R ratios: 5% over the X/R ratio from 1 to 90. Overshoot of overcurrent elements: <30 ms
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -14
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Earth/Sensitive Fault protection Earth Fault DT Pick-up: Setting ±5% Minimum IDMT Trip level: 1.05 x Setting ±5% Drop-off: 0.95 x Setting ±5% IDMT shape: ±5% or 40 ms whichever is greater * IEEE reset: ±10% or 40 ms whichever is greater DT operation: ±2% or 50 ms whichever is greater DT reset: ±2% or 50 ms whichever is greater Repeatability: ±5%
* Reference conditions TMS = 1, TD = 1 and IN > setting of 1A, operating range 2-20 In
SEF Pick-up: Setting 5% Drop-off: 0.95 x Setting 5% Minimum trip level of IDMT elements: 1.05 x Setting 5% IDMT characteristic shape: 5% or 40 ms whichever is greater* IEEE reset: 17.5% or 60 ms whichever is greater DT operation: 2% or 50 ms whichever is greater DT reset: 5% or 50 ms whichever is greater Repeatability: 5% * Reference conditions TMS = 1, TD = 1, and IN> setting of 100 mA, accuracy operating range 2-20 ls REF Pick-up: Setting formula ±5% Drop-off: 0.80 x setting formula ±5% Operating time: <60 ms High pick up: Setting ±5% High operating time: <30 ms Repeatability: <15%
Wattmetric SEF Pick-up P=0W: ISEF> 5% or 5 mA Pick-up P>0W: P> 5% Drop-off P=0W: (0.95 x ISEF >) 5% or 5 mA Drop-off P>0W: 0.9 x P> 5% Boundary accuracy: 5% with 1 hysteresis Repeatability: 1%
Polarizing quantities VN> and V2> Level detectors: Pick-up: 10% Resetting ratio: 0.9 I2> Level detector: Pick-up: 10% Resetting ratio: 0.9
Negative sequence overcurrent
Accuracy Pick-up: Setting 5% Drop-off: 0.95 x setting Definite time operation: 60 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Repeatability: 1% Directional boundary accuracy: 2° with hysteresis <1° Reset: <35 ms
Undervoltage
Accuracy DT Pick-up: Setting 2% IDMT Pick-up: 0.98 x setting 2% Drop-off: 1.02 x setting 2% Definite time operation: 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Repeatability: 1% IDMT characteristic shape: 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Reset: <75 ms
Overvoltage
Accuracy DT Pick-up: Setting 1% IDMT Pick-up: 1.02 x setting 2% Drop-off: 0.98 x setting 2% Definite time operation: 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Repeatability: 1% IDMT characteristic shape: 40 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Reset: <75 ms
Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage
Accuracy DT Pick-up: Setting 5% IDMT Pick-up: 1.05 x setting 5% Drop-off: 0.95 x setting 5% Definite time operation: 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Instantaneous operation: <50 ms Repeatability: 10% IDMT characteristic shape: 60 ms or 5%, whichever is greater Reset: <35 ms
Circuit breaker fail and undercurrent
Accuracy Pick-up: 10% or 0.025 In, whichever is greater Operating time: <12 ms Timers: 2 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Reset: <15 ms
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 15
Broken conductor logic
Accuracy Pick-up: Setting 2.5% Drop-off: 0.95 x setting 2.5% Definite time operation: 50 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Reset: <25 ms
Thermal overload
Accuracy Thermal alarm pick-up: Calculated trip time 10% Thermal overload pick-up: Calculated trip time 10% Cooling time accuracy 15% of theoretical Repeatability: <5% * Operating time measured with applied current of 20% above thermal setting.
Voltage transformer supervision
Accuracy Fast block operation: <1 cycle Fast block reset: <1.5 cycles Time delay: 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Current transformer supervision
Standard CTS
Accuracy IN> Pick-up: Setting 5% VN< Pick-up: Setting 5% IN> Drop-off: 0.9 setting 5% VN< Drop-off: (1.05 x setting) 5% or 1 V, whichever is greater Time delay operation: Setting 2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater CTS block operation: <1 cycle CTS reset: <35 ms
Differential CTS
Accuracy I1 Pick-up: Setting 5% I1 Drop-off: (0.9 x setting) 5% I2/I1> Pick-up: Setting 5% I2/I1> Drop-off: (0.9 x setting) 5% I2/I1>> Pick-up: Setting 5% I2/I1>> Drop-off: (0.9 x setting) 5% Time delay operation: Setting 2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater CTS block operation: <1 cycle CTS block diff operation <1 cycle CTS reset: <35 ms
CB state monitoring and condition monitoring
Accuracy Timers: 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Broken current accuracy: 5%
Programmable scheme logic
Accuracy Output conditioner timer: Setting 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Dwell conditioner timer: Setting 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Pulse conditioner timer: Setting 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Auto-reclose and check synchronism
Accuracy Timers: Setting 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Measurements and recording facilities
Accuracy Typically 1%, but 0.5% between 0.2 — 2In/Vn Current: 0.05 to 3 In Accuracy: 1.0% of reading Voltage: 0.05 to 2 Vn Accuracy: 1.0% of reading Power (W): 0.2 to 2 Vn and 0.05 to 3 In Accuracy: 5.0% of reading at unity power factor Reactive power (Vars): 0.2 to 2 Vn to 3 In Accuracy: 5.0% of reading at zero power factor Apparent power (VA): 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.05 to 3 In Accuracy: 5.0% of reading Energy (Wh): 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 3 In Accuracy: 5.0% of reading at zero power factor Energy (Varh): 0.2 to 2 Vn 0.2 to 3In Accuracy: 5.0% of reading at zero power factor Phase accuracy: 0° to 360° Accuracy: 0.5% Frequency: 45 to 65 Hz Accuracy: 0.025 Hz
IRIG-B and real time clock
Performance accuracy (for modulated and un-modulated versions) Real time clock accuracy: < 2 seconds/day
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -16
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Disturbance records
Maximum record duration : 50 seconds No of records : minimum 5 at 10 second each, maximum 50 at 1 second each (8 records of 3 seconds each via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol)
Accuracy Magnitude and relative phases: 5% of applied quantities Duration: 2% Trigger position: 2% (minimum Trigger 100 ms)
Fault locator
Accuracy Fault location: 2% of line length (under reference conditions)* * Reference conditions solid fault applied on line
Event, fault & maintenance records
The most recent records are stored in battery-backed memory, and can be extracted via the communication port or be viewed on the front panel display. No of Event Records: Up to 512 time tagged event records. No of Fault Records: Up to 15 No of Maintenance Records: Up to 10
Plant supervision
Accuracy Timers: 2% or 20 ms whichever is greater Broken current accuracy: 5%
Timer accuracy Timers: 2% or 40 ms whichever is greater Reset time: <30 ms
Undercurrent accuracy Pick-up: 10% or 25 mA whichever is greater Operating time: <20 ms Reset: <25 ms
InterMiCOM64 fiber optic teleprotection End-end operation. Table below shows minimum and maximum transfer time for InterMiCOM64 (IM64). The times are measured from opto initialization (with no opto filtering) to relay standard output and include a small propagation delay for back-back test (2.7 ms for 64 kbits/s and 3.2 ms for 56 kbits/s).
IDiff IM64 indicates InterMiCOM64 signals working in conjunction with the differential protection fiber optic communications channel. IM64 indicates InterMiCOM64 signals working as a standalone feature.
Configuration Permissive
op times (ms)
Direct op times (ms)
IM64 at 64 k 13 — 18 17 — 20
IM64 at 56 k 15 — 20 19 — 22
IDiff IM64 at 64 k 22 — 24 23 — 25
IDiff IM64 at 56 k 24 — 26 25 — 27
Ethernet data (where applicable)
100 Base FX Interface
Transmitter Optical Characteristics (TA = 0°C to 70°C, VCC = 4.75 V to 5.25 V)
Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Output Optical Power BOL 62.5/125 µm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL
PO -19
-20 -16.8 -14
dBm avg.
Output Optical Power BOL 50/125 µm, NA = 0.20 Fiber EOL
PO -22.5
-23.5-20.3 -14
dBm avg.
Optical Extinction Ratio
10
-10
%
dB
Output Optical Power at Logic “0” State
PO
(“0”) -45
dBm avg.
BOL — Beginning of life EOL — End of life Receiver Optical Characteristics (TA = 0°C to 70°C, VCC = 4.75 V to 5.25 V)
Parameter Sym Min. Typ. Max. Unit
Input Optical Power Minimum at Window Edge
PIN Min. (W)
-33.5 –31 dBm avg.
Input Optical Power Minimum at Eye Center
PIN Min. (C)
-34.5 -31.8 Bm avg.
Input Optical Power Maximum
PIN Max.
-14 -11.8 dBm avg.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 17
Settings, measurements and records list
Settings list
Global settings (system data): Language: English/French/German/Spanish English/French/German/Russian Chinese/English/French Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Circuit breaker control (CB control): CB Control by: Disabled Local Remote Local+remote Opto Opto+local Opto+remote Opto+rem+local
P543 and P545 specific CB control settings: Close pulse time: 0.10…10.00 s Trip pulse time: 0.10…5.00 s Man close t max: 0.01…9999.00 s Man close delay: 0.01…600.00 s CB healthy time: 0.01…9999.00 s Check sync time: 0.01…9999.00 s Reset lockout by: User interface/CB close Man close RstDly: 0.10…600.00 s Single pole A/R: Disabled/Enabled Three pole A/R: Disabled/Enabled CB Status Input: None 52A 3 pole 52B 3 pole 52A & 52B 3 pole 52A 1 pole 52B 1 pole 52A & 52B 1 pole
P544 and P546 specific CB control settings: Man Close Delay: 0.01…600 s CB Healthy Time: 0.01…9999 s Check Sync. Time: 0.01…9999 s Rst CB mon LO By: User Interface,
CB Close CB mon LO RstDly: 0.1…600 s CB1 Status Input: None, 52A 3 pole,
52B 3 pole, 52A & 52B 3 pole, 52A 1 pole, 52B 1 pole, 52A & 52B 1 pole
CB Status Time 0.1 … 5 s CB2 Status Input: None, 52A 3 pole,
52B 3 pole, 52A & 52B 3 pole, 52A 1 pole, 52B 1 pole, 52A & 52B 1 pole
Res AROK by UI: Enabled/Disabled Res AROK by NoAR: Enabled/Disabled Res AROK by Ext: Enabled/Disabled Res AROK by TDly: Enabled/Disabled Res AROK by TDly: 1.0…9999 s Res LO by CB IS: Enabled/Disabled Res LO by UI: Enabled/Disabled Res LO by NoAR: Enabled/Disabled Res LO by ExtDDB: Enabled/Disabled Res LO by TDelay: Enabled/Disabled LO Reset Time: 1…9999 s
Date and time IRIG-B Sync: Disabled/Enabled Battery Alarm: Disabled/Enabled LocalTime Enable: Disabled/Fixed/Flexible LocalTime Offset: -720…720 DST Enable: Disabled or Enabled DST Offset: 30…60 DST Start: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last DST Start Day: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday DST Start Month: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December DST Start Mins: 0…1425 DST End: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last DST End Day: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday DST End Month: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December DST End Mins: 0…1425 RP1 Time Zone: UTC or Local RP2 Time Zone: UTC or Local DNPOE Time Zone: UTC or Local Tunnel Time Zone: UTC or Local
Configuration Setting Group: Select via Menu Select via Opto Active Settings: Group 1/2/3/4 Setting Group 1: Disabled/Enabled Setting Group 2: Disabled/Enabled Setting Group 3: Disabled/Enabled Setting Group 4: Disabled/Enabled Distance: Disabled/Enabled Directional E/F: Disabled/Enabled Phase Diff: Disabled/Enabled Overcurrent: Disabled/Enabled Neg Sequence O/C: Disabled/Enabled
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -18
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Broken Conductor: Disabled/Enabled Earth Fault: Disabled/Enabled SEF/REF Prot’n: Disabled/Enabled Residual O/V NVD: Disabled/Enabled Thermal Overload: Disabled/Enabled Power Swing Block: Disabled/Enabled Volt Protection: Disabled/Enabled Freq Protection: Disabled/Enabled df/dt Protection: Disabled/Enabled CB Fail: Disabled/Enabled Supervision: Disabled/Enabled System Checks: Disabled/Enabled Auto-Reclose: Disabled/Enabled Input Labels: Invisible/Visible Output Labels: Invisible/Visible CT & VT Ratios: Invisible/Visible Record Control: Invisible/Visible Disturb Recorder: Invisible/Visible Measure’t Setup: Invisible/Visible Comms Settings: Invisible/Visible Commission Tests: Invisible/Visible Setting Values: Primary/Secondary Control Inputs: Invisible/Visible Ctrl I/P Config: Invisible/Visible Ctrl I/P Labels: Invisible/Visible Direct Access: Disabled/Enabled InterMiCOM64 Fiber: Disabled/Enabled Function Key: Invisible/Visible LCD Contrast: (Factory pre-set)
CT and VT ratios
P543 and P545 CT and VT ratio settings: Main VT Primary: 100 V…1 MV Main VT Sec’y: 80…140 V C/S VT Primary: 100 V…1 MV C/S VT Secondary: 80…140 V Phase CT Primary: 1 A…30 kA Phase CT Sec’y: 1 A/5 A SEF CT Primary: 1 A…30 kA SEF CT Sec’y: 1 A/5 A MComp CT Primary: 1 A…30 kA MComp CT Sec’y: 1 A/5 A C/S Input: A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A A-N/1.732 B-N/1.732 C-N/1.732 Main VT Location: Line/Bus CT Polarity: Standard /Inverted CT2 Polarity: Standard /Inverted SEF CT Polarity: Standard /Inverted M CT Polarity: Standard /Inverted VTs Connected: Yes/No
P544 and P546 CT and VT ratio settings: Main VT Primary: 100 V…1000 kV Main VT Sec’y: 80…140 V CB1 CS VT Prim’y: 100 V…1000 kV CB1 CS VT Sec’y: 80…140 V CB2 CS VT Prim’y: 100 V…1000 kV CB2 CS VT Sec’y: 80…140 V Phase CT Primary: 1 A…30 kA Phase CT Sec’y: 1…5 A SEF CT Primary: 1 A…30 kA SEF CT Secondary: 1…5 A MComp CT Primary: 1…30 k MComp CT Sec’y: 1…5 A CS Input: A-N, B-N, C-N,
A-B, B-C, C-A CT1 Polarity: Standard/Inverted CT2 Polarity: Standard/Inverted SEF CT Polarity: Standard/Inverted M CT Polarity: Standard/Inverted VTs Connected: Yes/No CB1 CS VT PhShft: -180…+180 deg CB1 CS VT Mag.: 0.2…3 CB2 CS VT PhShft: -180…+180 deg CB2 CS VT Mag.: 0.2…3
Sequence of event recorder (record control) Alarm Event: Disabled/Enabled Relay O/P Event: Disabled/Enabled Opto Input Event: Disabled/Enabled General Event: Disabled/Enabled Fault Rec Event: Disabled/Enabled Maint Rec Event: Disabled/Enabled Protection Event: Disabled/Enabled Flt Rec Extended: Disabled/Enabled DDB 31 — 0: (up to): DDB 1791 — 1760: Binary function link strings, selecting which DDB signals will be stored as events, and which will be filtered out.
Oscillography (disturb recorder) Duration: 0.10…10.50 s Trigger Position: 0.0…100.0% Trigger Mode: Single/Extended Analog Channel 1: (up to): Analog Channel 12: Disturbance channels selected from: IA, IB, IC, IN, IN Sensitive, VA, VB, VC, IM, V CheckSync (only for P543 and P545) and IA2, IB2, IC2 and VCheckSync2 (only for P544 and P546) Digital Input 1: (up to): Digital Input 32: Selected binary channel assignment from any DDB status point within the relay (opto input, output contact, alarms, starts, trips, controls, logic…).
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 19
Input 1 Trigger: No Trigger/Trigger (up to): Input 32 Trigger: No Trigger/Trigger
Measured operating data (measure’t setup) Default Display: 3Ph + N Current 3Ph Voltage Power Date and Time Description Plant Reference Frequency Access Level Local Values: Primary/Secondary Remote Values: Primary/Secondary Measurement Ref: VA/VB/VC/IA/IB/IC Measurement Mode: 0/1/2/3 Fix Dem Period: 1…99 mins Roll Sub Period: 1…99 mins Num Sub Periods: 1…15 Distance Unit: Miles/Kilometers Fault Location: Distance Ohms % of Line Remote 2 Values: Primary/Secondary
Communications RP1 Protocol: Courier IEC870-5-103 DNP3.0 IEC 61850
Courier protocol: RP1 Address: 0…255 RP1 InactivTimer: 1…30 mins RP1 PhysicalLink: Copper Fiber Optic RP1 Port Config: K Bus EIA485 (RS485) RP1 Comms Mode: IEC 60870 FT1.2 Frame IEC 60870 10-Bit Frame RP1 Baud Rate: 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
IEC870-5-103 protocol: RP1 Address: 0…255 RP1 InactivTimer: 1…30 mins RP1 Baud Rate: 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s RP1 Meas Period: 1…60 s RP1 PhysicalLink: Copper
Fiber Optic RP1 CS103 Blocking: Disabled Monitor Blocking Command Blocking DNP3.0 protocol: (EIA485) RP1 Address: 0…65519 RP1 Baud Rate: 1200 bits/s 2400 bits/s 4800 bits/s 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s RP1 Parity: Odd/Even/None RP1 PhysicalLink: Copper Fiber Optic RP1 Time Sync: Disabled/Enabled Meas Scaling: Primary, Secondary or Normalized. Message gap: 0…50 ms DNP Need time: 1…30 mins DNP App Fragment: 100…2048 DNP App Timeout: 1…120 s DNP SBO Timeout: 1…10 s DNP Link Timeout: 0.1…60 s
DNP3.0 protocol: (Ethernet) DNP Time Sync: Disabled/Enabled Meas Scaling: Primary, Secondary or Normalized. NIC Tunl Timeout: 1…30 mins NIC Link Report: Alarm, Event, None NIC Link Timeout: 0.1…60 s DNP Need time: 1…30 mins DNP App Fragment: 100…2048 DNP App Timeout: 1…120 s DNP SBO Timeout: 1…10 s DNP Link Timeout: 0.1…60 s
IEC 61850 protocol: (Ethernet) NIC Tunl Timeout: 1…30 mins NIC Link Report: Alarm, Event, None NIC Link Timeout: 0.1…60 s
Optional additional second rear communication (rear port2 (RP2)) RP2 Protocol: Courier (fixed) RP2 Port Config: Courier over EIA(RS)232 Courier over EIA(RS)485 K-Bus RP2 Comms. Mode: IEC60870 FT1.2 Frame 10-Bit NoParity RP2 Address: 0…255 RP2 InactivTimer: 1…30 mins RP2 Baud Rate: 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -20
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Commission tests
Monitor Bit 1: (up to): Monitor Bit 8: Binary function link strings, selecting which DDB signals have their status visible in the Commissioning menu, for test purposes Test Mode: Disabled Test Mode Blocked Contacts Test Pattern: Configuration of which output contacts are to be energized when the contact test is applied. Contact Test: No Operation, Apply Test, Remove Test Test LEDs: No Operation Apply Test Test Auto-reclose: No Operation Trip 3 Pole Trip Pole A Trip Pole B Trip Pole C Static Test Mode: Disabled/Enabled Static Test: Disabled/Enabled Loopback Mode: Disabled/Internal/External IM64 TestPattern: Configuration of which InterMiCOM64 commands are to be set high or low for a loopback test. IM64 Test Mode: Disabled/Enabled
Circuit breaker condition monitoring (CB Monitor setup) P543and P545 CB monitor setup: Broken I^: 1.0…2.0 I^ Maintenance: Alarm Disabled/Enabled I^ Maintenance: 1…25000 I^ Lockout: Alarm Disabled/Enabled I^ Lockout: 1…25000 No. CB Ops Maint: Alarm Disabled/Enabled No. CB Ops Maint: 1…10000 No. CB Ops Lock: Alarm Disabled/Enabled No. CB Ops Lock: 1…10000 CB Time Maint: Alarm Disabled/Enabled CB Time Maint: 0.005…0.500 s CB Time Lockout: Alarm Disabled/Enabled CB Time Lockout: 0.005…0.500 s Fault Freq. Lock: Alarm Disabled/Enabled Fault Freq. Count: 1…9999 Fault Freq. Time: 0…9999 s
P544 and P546 CB monitor setup: CB1 Broken ^: 1…2 CB1 ^ Maintenance: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled CB1 ^ Maintenance: 1…25000 n^ CB1 ^ Lockout: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled CB1 ^ Lockout: 1…25000 n^ No. CB1 Ops. Maint.: Alarm Disabled/ Alarm Enabled No. CB1 Ops. Maint.: 1…10000 No. CB1 Ops. Lock: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled No. CB1 Ops. Lock: 1…10000 CB1 Time Maint.: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled CB1 Time Maint.: 0.005…0.5 s CB1 Time Lockout: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled CB1 Time Lockout: 0.005…0.5 s CB1 Fault Freq. Lock: Alarm Disabled/
Alarm Enabled CB1 Flt Freq. Count: 1…9999 CB1 Flt Freq. Time: 0…9999 s CB2 Broken ^: (up to) CB2 Flt Freq. Time: All settings selected from the same ranges as per the first controlled circuit breaker, CB1.
Optocoupled binary inputs (opto config.) Global threshold: 24 — 27 V 30 — 34 V 48 — 54 V 110 — 125 V 220 — 250 V Custom Opto Input 1: (up to): Opto Input #. (# = max. opto no. fitted): Custom options allow independent thresholds to be set per opto, from the same range as above. Filter Control: Binary function link string, selecting which optos will have an extra 1/2 cycle noise filter, and which will not. Characteristics: Standard 60% — 80% 50% — 70%
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 21
Control inputs into PSL (ctrl. I/P config.) Hotkey Enabled: Binary function link string, selecting which of the control inputs will be driven from Hotkeys. Control Input 1: Latched/Pulsed (up to): Control Input 32: Latched/Pulsed Ctrl Command 1: (up to): Ctrl Command 32: ON/OFF SET/RESET IN/OUT ENABLED/DISABLED
EIA(RS)232 Teleprotection (INTERMiCOM Comms.) Source Address: 0…10 Received Address: 0…10 Data Rate: 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud Loopback Mode: Disabled/Internal/External Test Pattern: Configuration of which InterMiCOM signals are to be energized when the loopback test is applied.
INTERMiCOM conf. IM Msg Alarm Lvl: 0.1…100.0% IM1 Cmd Type: Disabled/Direct/Blocking, Permissive (up to): IM8 Cmd Type: Disabled/Direct/Blocking, Permissive IM1 FallBackMode: Default/Latched (up to): IM8 FallBackMode: Default/Latched IM1 DefaultValue: 0/1 (up to): IM8 DefaultValue: 0/1 IM1 FrameSyncTim: 1 ms…1.5 s (up to): IM8 FrameSyncTim: 1 ms…1.5 s
Function keys
Fn. Key Status 1: (up to): Fn. Key Status 10 Disable Lock Unlock/Enable Fn. Key 1 Mode: Toggled/Normal (up to): Fn. Key 10 Mode: Toggled/Normal
Fn. Key 1 Label: (up to): Fn. Key 10 Label: User defined text string to describe the function of the particular function key
IED configurator Switch Conf. Bank: No Action/Switch Banks
IEC 61850 GOOSE GoEna: Disabled/Enabled Test Mode: Disabled/Pass Through/Forced VOP Test Pattern: 0x00000000… 0xFFFFFFFF Ignore Test Flag: No/Yes
Prot comms/IM64 Scheme Setup:2 Terminal/Dual Redundant/3
Terminal Address: 0-0, 1-A…20-A, 1-B….20-B Address: 0-0, 1-A…20-A, 1-B….20-B, 1-C…20-C Comm Mode: Standard/IEEE C37.94 Baud Rate Ch 1: 56kbits/s or 64kbits/s Baud Rate Ch 2: 56kbits/s or 64kbits/s Clock Source Ch1: Internal/External Clock Source Ch2: Internal/External Ch1 N*64kbits/s: Auto, 1, 2, 3… 12 Ch2 N*64kbits/s: Auto, 1, 2, 3… 12 Comm Delay Tol: 0.001 s…0.00005 s Comm Fail Timer: 0.1 s…600 s Comm Fail Mode: Ch 1 Failure/Ch 2 Failure/ Ch 1 or Ch 2 Fail/Ch 1 and Ch 2 Fail GPS Sync: GPS Disabled, GPS Standard, GPS Inhibit, GPS Restrain Char Mod Time: 0…30 s Char Mod Ex : Disabled/Enabled Char Mod Ex Time: 0… 30 s Prop Delay Equal: No operation/Restore CDiff Re-Configuration: Three Ended/Two Ended (R1&R2)/Two Ended (L&R2)/Two Ended (L&R1) Channel Timeout: 0.1 s…10 s Alarm Level: 0%…100% Prop Delay Stats: Disabled/Enabled MaxCh 1 PropDelay: 1 m…50 ms MaxCh 2 PropDelay: 1 m…50 ms TxRx Delay Stats: Disabled/Enabled MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime: 1 m…50 ms MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime: 1 m…50 ms GPS Fail Timer: 0…9999 s GPS Trans Fail: Disabled/Enabled GPS Trans Count: 1…100 s GPS Trans Timer: 0…9999 s IM1 Cmd Type: Direct/Permissive IM1 FallBackMode: Default/Latching IMx(x=1 to DefaultValue: 0 or 1 The IM1 – IM8 s setting are common to both Ch1 and Ch2 (i.e. if IM1 DefaultValue is set to 0, it will be 0 on Ch1 and on Ch2)
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -22
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Control input user labels (Ctrl. I/P labels) Control Input 1: (up to): Control Input 32: User defined text string to describe the function of the particular control input
Settings in multiple groups Note: All settings here onwards apply for setting groups # = 1 to 4.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 23
Protection functions
Line parameters GROUP # (for # = 1 to 4) Line Length (km): 0.30…1000.00 km Line Length (miles): 0.20…625.00 mi Line Impedance: 0.05…500.00/In Line Angle: 20…90° Residual Comp: 0.00…10.00 Residual Angle: -180…90° Mutual Comp: Disabled/Enabled KZm Mutual Set: 0.00…10.00 KZm Mutual Angle: -180…90° Mutual cut-off (k): 0.0…2.0 Phase Sequence: Standard ABC Reverse ACB CB Tripping Mode (per CB as appropriate): 3 Pole 1 and 3 Pole Line Charging Y: 0.00…10.00 ms
Distance setup Setting Mode: Simple/Advanced
Phase distance Phase Chars.: Mho/Quadrilateral Quad Resistance: Common/Proportional Fault Resistance: 0.05…500.00/In Zone 1 Ph Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone 1 Ph Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone 2 Ph Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone 2 Ph Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone 3 Ph Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone 3 Ph Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone 3 Ph Offset: Disabled/Enabled Z3Ph Rev Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone P Ph Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone P Ph Dir.: Forward/Reverse Zone P Ph Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone 4 Ph Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone 4 Ph Reach: 10…1000% of line
Ground distance Ground Chars.: Mho/Quadrilateral Quad Resistance: Common/Proportional Fault Resistance: 0.05…500.00/In Zone1 Gnd Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone1 Gnd Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone2 Gnd Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone2 Gnd Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone3 Gnd Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone3 Gnd Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone3 Gnd Offset: Disabled/Enabled Z3Gnd Rev Reach: 10…1000% of line ZoneP Gnd Status: Disabled/Enabled ZoneP Gnd Direction: Forward/Reverse ZoneP Gnd Reach: 10…1000% of line Zone4 Gnd Status: Disabled/Enabled Zone4 Gnd Reach: 10…1000% of line Digital Filter: Standard
Special Applics CVT Filters: Disabled Passive Active SIR Setting: (for CVT): 5…60 Load Blinders: Disabled/Enabled Load/B Impedance: 0.10…500.00/In Load/B Angle: 15…65° Load Blinder V<: 1.0…70.0 V (ph-g) Distance Polarizing: 0.2…5.0 Delta Status: Disabled/Enabled Delta Char Angle: 0°…90° Delta V Fwd: 1.0…30.0 V Delta V Rev: 0.5…30.0 V Delta I Fwd: 0.10…10.00 In Delta I Rev: 0.05…10.00 In
Distance elements — phase distance Z1 Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z1 Ph. Angle: 20…90° R1 Ph. Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z1 Tilt Top Line: -30…30° Z1 Ph. Sensit. Iph>1: 0.050…2.000 In Z2 Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z2 Ph. Angle: 20…90° Z2 Ph Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z2 Tilt Top Line: -30…30° Z2 Ph. Sensit. Iph>2: 0.050…2.000 In Z3 Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z3 Ph. Angle: 20…90° Z3′ Ph Rev Reach: 0.05…500.00/In R3 Ph Res. Fwd.: 0.05…500.00/In R3′ Ph Res. Rev.: 0.05…500.00/In Z3 Tilt Top Line: -30…30° Z3 Ph. Sensit. Iph>3: 0.050…2.000 In ZP Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In ZP Ph. Angle: 20…90° ZP Ph Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In ZP Tilt Top line: -30…30° ZP Ph. Sensit. Iph>P: 0.050…2.000In Z4 Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z4 Ph. Angle: 20…90° Z4 Ph Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z4 Tilt Top line: -30…30° Z4 Ph. Sensit. Iph>4: 0.050…2.000 In
Ground distance parameters Z1 Gnd. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z1 Gnd. Angle: 20…90° Z1 Dynamic Tilt: Disabled or Enabled Z1 Tilt top line: -30°…30° kZN1 Res. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZN1 Res. Angle: -180…90° kZm1 Mut. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZm1 Mut. Angle: -180…90° R1 Gnd. Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z1 Sensit Ignd>1: 0.050…2.000 In Z2 Gnd. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z2 Gnd. Angle: 20…90°
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -24
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Z2 Dynamic Tilt: Disabled or Enabled Z2 Tilt top line: -30°…30° kZN2 Res. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZN2 Res. Angle: -180…90° kZm2 Mut. Comp: 0.00…10.00 kZm2 Mut. Angle: -180…90° R2 Gnd Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z2 Sensit Ignd>2: 0.050…2.000 In Z3 Gnd. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z3 Gnd. Angle: 20…90° Z3 Dynamic Tilt: Disabled or Enabled Z3 Tilt top line: -30°…30° Z3′ Gnd Rev Rch: 0.05…500.00/In kZN3 Res. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZN3 Res. Angle: -180…90° kZm3 Mut. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZm3 Mut. Angle: -180…90° R3 Gnd Res. Fwd: 0.05…500.00/In R3 Gnd Res. Rev: 0.05…500.00/In Z3 Sensit Ignd>3: 0.050…2.000 In ZP Ground Reach: 0.05…500.00/In ZP Ground Angle: 20…90° ZP Dynamic Tilt: Disabled or Enabled ZP Tilt top line: -30°…30° kZNP Res. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZNP Res. Angle: -180…90° kZmP Mut. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZmP Mut. Angle: -180…90° RP Gnd Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In ZP Sensit Ignd>P: 0.050…2.000 In Z4 Gnd. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In Z4 Gnd. Angle: 20…90° Z4 Dynamic Tilt: Disabled or Enabled Z4 Tilt top line: -30°…30° kZN4 Res. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZN4 Res. Angle: -180…90° kZm4 Mut. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 kZm4 Mut. Angle: -180…90° R4 Gnd. Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In Z4 Gnd Sensitivity: 0.050…2.000 In
Phase current differential protection
Phase Diff: Enabled or Disabled Phase Is1:0.2 In…2 In Phase Is2:1 In…30 In Phase k1:30%…150% Phase k2: 30%…150% Phase Char: DT/IEC S Inverse/IEC V Inverse/ IEC E inverse/UK LT Inverse/IEEE M Inverse/IEEE V Inverse/IEEE E Inverse/US Inverse/US ST Inverse Phase Time Delay: 0 s…100 s Phase TMS: 0.025…1.2 Phase Time Dial: 0.01…100 PIT Time: 0 s…0.2 s Ph CT Corr’tion:1…8 Compensation: None/Cap Charging/Transformer Susceptance: 1E-8*In…10*In Inrush Restraint: Restraint/Blocking/Disabled Ih(2) CrossBlock: Disabled/Enabled Ih(2) Multiplier: 1..20 Ih(2) %>: 5% ..50%
Ih(5) CrossBlock: Disabled/Enabled Ih(5) Blocking: Disabled/Enabled Ih(5) %>: 5% ..100% Highset Status: Disabled/Enabled Id High Set: 4*ln…32*ln Vectorial Comp:Yy0 (0 deg)/Yd1 (-30 deg)/ Yy2 (-60 deg)/Yd3 (-90 deg)/Yy4 (-120 deg)/ Yd5 (-150 deg)/Yy6 (180 deg)/Yd7 (+150 deg)/Yy8 (+120 deg)/Yd9 (+90 deg)/Yy10 (+60 deg)/Yd11 (+30 deg)/Ydy0 (0 deg)/ Ydy6 (180 deg) Phase Is1 CTS: 0.2*In…4*In PIT I Selection: Local or Remote
Scheme logic
Basic scheme Zone 1 Tripping: Disabled/ Phase only/Ground only/Phase and Ground tZ1 Ph. Delay: 0 s…10 s tZ1 Gnd. Delay: 0 s…10 s Zone 2 Tripping: Disabled/Phase only/ Ground only/Phase and Ground tZ2 Ph. Delay: 0 s…10 s tZ2 Gnd. Delay: 0 s…10 s Zone 3 Tripping: Disabled/Phase only/ Ground only/Phase and Ground tZ3 Ph. Delay: 0 s…10 s tZ2 Gnd. Delay: 0 s…10 s Zone P Tripping: Disabled/Phase only/ Ground only/Phase and Ground tZP Ph. Delay: 0 s…10 s tZP Gnd. Delay: 0 s…10 s Zone 4 Tripping: Disabled/Phase only/ Ground only/Phase and Ground tZ4 Ph. Delay: 0 s…10 s tZ4 Gnd. Delay: 0 s…10 s
Aided scheme 1 Aid 1 Selection: Disabled/PUR/PUR Unblocking/POR/POR/Unblocking/ Blocking 1/Blocking 2/ Prog Unblocking/Programmable Aid 1 Distance: Disabled/ Phase only/ Ground only/Phase and Ground Aid 1 Dist. Dly: 0 s…1 s Unblocking Delay: 0 s…0.1 s Aid 1 DEF: Disabled/Enabled Aid 1 DEF Dly: 0 s…1 s Aid 1 DEF Trip: 1/3 Pole Aid 1 Delta: 0.000… 1.000 s Aid1 Delta Dly: 0.000…1.000 s Aid1 DeltaTrip: 3 Pole 1 and 3 Pole tREV Guard: 0 s…0.15 s Unblocking Delay: 0 s…0.1 s Send on Trip Aided / Z1, Any Trip or None Weak Infeed: Disabled/ Echo/Echo and Trip WI Sngl Pole Trp: Disabled/Enabled WI V< Thresh: 10 V…70 V
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 25
WI Trip Delay: 0 s…1 s Custom Send Mask: Bit 0 = Z1 Gnd/Bit 1 = Z2 Gnd/Bit 2 = Z4 Gnd/Bit 3 = Z1 Ph/Bit 4 = Z2 Ph/Bit 5 = Z4 Ph/Bit 6 = DEF Fwd/Bit 7 = DEF Rev/Bit Custom Time PU: 0 s…1 s Custom Time DO: 0 s…1 s Aided scheme 2 (As per aided scheme 1) Trip on close SOTF Status: Disabled/Enabled Pole Dead/Enabled ExtPulse/En Pdead + Pulse SOTF Delay: 0.2s…1000s SOTF Tripping: Bit 0 = Zone 1/Bit 1 = Zone 2/Bit 2 = Zone 3/Bit 3 = Zone P/Bit 4 = Zone 4/Bit5=CNV TOR Status: Disabled/Enabled TOR Tripping: Bit 0 = Zone 1/Bit 1 = Zone 2/Bit 2 = Zone 3/Bit 3 = Zone P/Bit 4 = Zone 4/Bit5=CNV TOC Reset Delay: 0.1 s…2 s TOC Delay 0.05 s…0.2 s SOTF Pulse: 0.1 s…10 s Z1 extension Z1 Ext Scheme: Disabled/Enabled/En. on Ch1 Fail/En. On Ch2 Fail/En All Ch Fail/En. anyCh Fail Z1 Ext Ph: 100%…200% Z1 Ext Gnd: 100%…200%
Loss of load LOL Scheme: Disabled/Enabled/En. on Ch1 Fail/En. On Ch2 Fail/En All Ch Fail/En. Any Ch Fail LOL <I: 0.05 x In…1 x In LOL Window: 0.01 s 0.1 s Phase
Phase overcurrent (overcurrent) I>1 Status: Disabled Enabled Enabled VTS Enabled Ch Fail En VTSorCh Fail En VTSandCh Fail I>1 Function: DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse I>1 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev
I>1 Current Set: 0.08…4.00 In I>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s I>1 TMS: 0.025…1.200 I>1 Time Dial: 0.01…100.00 I>1 Reset Char: DT/Inverse I>1 tRESET: 0.00…100.00 s I>2 Status (up to): I>2 tRESET All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first stage overcurrent, I>1. I>3 Status: Disabled Enabled Enabled VTS Enabled Ch Fail En VTSorCh Fail En VTSandCh Fail I>3 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev I>3 Current Set: 0.08…32.00 In I>3 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s I>4 Status (up to): I>4 Time Delay All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the third stage overcurrent, I>3. I> Char Angle: -95…95° I> Blocking: Binary function link string, selecting which overcurrent elements (stages 1 to 4) will be blocked if VTS detection of fuse failure occurs.
Negative sequence overcurrent (neg seq O/C) I2>1 Status: Enabled/Disabled I2>1 Function: Disabled DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse I2>1 Direction: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev I2>1 Current Set: 0.08…4.00 In I2>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s I2>1 TMS: 0.025…1.200 I2>1 Time Dial: 0.01…100.00 I2>1 Reset Char.: DT/Inverse I2>1 tRESET: 0.00…100.00 s
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -26
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
I2>2 Status (up to): I2>2 tRESET All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first stage overcurrent, I2>1. I2>3 Status: Disabled Enabled I2>3 Direction: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev I2>3 Current Set: 0.08…32.00 In I2>3 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s I2>4 Status (up to): I2>4 Time Delay All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the third stage overcurrent, I2>3. I2> VTS Blocking: Binary function link string, selecting which Neg. Seq. O/C elements (stages 1 to 4) will be blocked if VTS detection of fuse failure occurs I2> Char Angle: -95…95o I2> V2pol Set: 0.5…25.0 (100 – 110 V)
Broken conductor Broken Conductor: Disabled/Enabled I2/I1 Setting: 0.20…1.00 I2/I1 Time Delay: 0.0…100.0 s
Ground overcurrent (earth fault) IN>1 Status: Disabled Enabled Enabled VTS Enabled Ch Fail En VTSorCh Fail En VTSandCh Fail IN>1 Function: DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse IDG IN>1 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev IN>1 Current Set: 0.08…4.00 In IN>1 IDG Is: 1…4 IN>1 IDG Time: 1…2
IN>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s IN>1 TMS: 0.025…1.200 IN>1 Time Dial: 0.01…100.00 IN>1 Reset Char: DT/Inverse IN>1 tRESET: 0.00…100.00 s IN>2 Status (up to): IN>2 tRESET All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first stage ground overcurrent, IN>1. IN>3 Status: Disabled Enabled Enabled VTS Enabled Ch Fail En VTSorCh Fail En VTSandCh Fail IN>3 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev IN>3 Current Set: 0.08…32.00 In IN>3 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s IN>4 Status (up to): IN>4 Time Delay All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the third stage ground overcurrent, IN>3. IN> Blocking: Binary function link string, selecting which ground overcurrent elements (stages 1 to 4) will be blocked if VTS detection of fuse failure occurs. IN> DIRECTIONAL IN> Char Angle: -95…95° IN> Polarization: Zero Sequence Neg Sequence IN> VNpol Set: 0.5…40.0 V IN> V2pol Set: 0.5…25.0 V IN> I2pol Set: 0.02…1.00 In
Directional aided schemes — DEF settings DEF Status: Disabled/Enabled DEF Polarizing: Zero Sequence (virtual current pol) Neg Sequence DEF Char Angle: -95…95° DEF VNpol Set: 0.5…40.0 V DEF V2pol Set: 0.5…25.0 V DEF FWD Set: 0.08…1.00 In DEF REV Set: 0.04…1.00 In
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 27
Sensitive Earth Fault protection/ Restricted Earth Fult protection SEF/REF Options: SEF Enabled Wattmetric SEF, HI Z REF ISEF>1 Function: IDMT Curve Type Disabled DT IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse IDG ISEF>1 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev ISEF>1 Current Set: 0.005…0.1 InSEF
ISEF>1 IDG Is: 1…4 ISEF>1 IDG Time: 1…2 s ISEF>1 Time Delay: 0 s…..200 s ISEF>1 TMS: 0.025…1.2 ISEF>1 Time Dial: 0.01…100 ISEF>1 Reset Char: DT/Inverse ISEF>1 tRESET: 0 s-100 s ISEF>2 as ISEF>1 ISEF>3 Status: Disabled Enabled ISEF>3 Directional: Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev ISEF>3 Current Set: 0.005…0.8 InSEF ISEF>3 Time Delay: 0 s…200 s ISEF>3 Intertrip: Enabled/Disabled ISEF>4 as ISEF>3 ISEFN> Blocking Bit 0 VTS Blks ISEF>1 Bit 1 VTS Blks ISEF>2 Bit 2 VTS Blks ISEF>3 Bit 3 VTS Blks ISEF>4 Bit 4 A/R Blks ISEF>3 Bit 5 A/R Blks ISEF>4 Bit 6 Not Used Bit 7 Not Used ISEF> Directional ISEF> Char Angle: -95°…95° deg ISEF> VNpol Set: 0.5…80 V Wattmetric SEF PN> Setting: 0…20 InSEF W REF IREF>Is: 0.05 In .. 1.0 In
Neutral voltage displacement (residual O/V NVD) VN>1 Function: Disabled DT IDMT VN>1 Voltage Set: 1…80 V VN>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s VN>1 TMS: 0.5…100.0 VN>1 tReset: 0.00…100.00 s VN>2 Status: Disabled/Enabled VN>2 Voltage Set: 1…80 V VN>2 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s
Thermal overload Characteristic: Disabled Single Dual Thermal Trip: 0.08…4.00 In Thermal Alarm: 50…100% Time Constant 1: 1…200 mins Time Constant 2: 1…200 mins
Power swing/out of step (power swing) Power Swing: Blocking Indication PSB Reset Delay: 0.05…2.00 s Zone 1 Ph PSB: Blocking/Allow Trip (up to): Zone 4 Ph PSB: Blocking/Allow Trip Zone 1 Gnd PSB: Blocking/Allow Trip (up to): Zone 4 Gnd PSB: Blocking/Allow Trip PSB Unblocking: Disabled/Enabled PSB Unblock Delay: 0.1…10.0 s PSB Reset Delay: 0.5…2.0 s
Out of step OST (Out of Step Tripping) mode: Disabled Predictive and OST Trip OST Trip Predictive OST Z5 Fwd Reach: 0.1…500.00/In Z6 Fwd Reach: 0.1…500.00/In Z5’ Rev Reach: 0.1…500.00/In Z6’ Rev Reach: 0.1…500.00/In R5 Res. Fwd: 0.1…200.00/In R6 Res. Fwd: 0.1…200.00/In R5’ Res. Rev: -0.1…-200.00/In R6’ Res. Rev: -0.1…-200.00/In α Blinder Angle: 20…90° Delta t Time Setting: 0.02 s…1 s Tost Time Delay Setting: 0 s…1 s
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -28
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Undervoltage protection V< Measur’t Mode: V<1 & V<2 Ph-Ph, V<1 & V<2 Ph-N, V<1Ph-Ph V<2Ph-N, V<1Ph-N V<2Ph-Ph V< Operate Mode: V<1 & V<2 Any Ph V<1 & V<2 3Phase V<1AnyPh V<2 3Ph V<1 3Ph V<2AnyPh V<1 Function: Disabled DT IDMT V<1 Voltage Set: 10…120 V V<1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s V<1 TMS: 0.5…100.0 V<1 Poledead Inh: Disabled/Enabled V<2 Status: Disabled/Enabled V<2 Voltage Set: 10…120 V V<2 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s V<2 Poledead Inh: Disabled/Enabled
Overvoltage protection V> Measur’t Mode: V>1 & V>2 Ph-Ph, V>1 & V>2 Ph-N, V>1Ph-Ph V>2Ph-N, V>1Ph-N V>2Ph-Ph V> Operate Mode: V>1 & V>2 Any Ph V>1 & V>2 3Phase V>1AnyPh V>2 3Ph V>1 3Ph V>2AnyPh V>1 Function: Disabled DT IDMT V>1 Voltage Set: 60…185 V V>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s V>1 TMS: 0.5…100.0 V>2 Status: Disabled/Enabled V>2 Voltage Set: 60…185 V V>2 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s V1>1 Cmp Funct: Disabled DT IDMT V1>1 Cmp Vlt Set: 60…110 V V1>1 Cmp Tim Dly: 0.00…100.00 s V1>1 CmpTMS: 0.5…100.0 V1>2 Cmp Status: Disabled/Enabled V1>2 Vlt Set: 60…110 V V1>2 CmpTim Dly: 0.00…100.00 s
Underfrequency protection F<1 Status: Disabled/Enabled F<1 Setting: 45.00…65.00 Hz F<1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s F<2 Status (up to):
F<4 Time Delay All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the 1st stage F< Function Link: Binary function link string, selecting which frequency elements (stages 1 to 4) will be blocked by the pole-dead logic
Overfrequency protection
F>1 Status: Disabled/Enabled F>1 Setting: 45.00…65.00 Hz F>1 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s F>2 Status (up to): F>2 Time Delay All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the 1st stage
Rate-of-change of frequency protection (df/dt protection) df/dt Avg. Cycles: 6…12 df/dt>1 Status: Disabled/Enabled df/dt>1 Setting: 0.1…10.0 Hz df/dt>1 Dir’n.: Negative/Positive/Both df/dt>1 Time: 0.00…100.00 s df/dt>2 Status: (up to): df/dt>4 Time All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the 1st stage.
Circuit breaker fail CB Fail 1 Status: Disabled/Enabled CB Fail 1 Timer: 0.00…10.00 s CB Fail 2 Status: Disabled/Enabled CB Fail 2 Timer: 0.00…10.00 s Volt Prot Reset: I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< Ext Prot Reset: I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< WI Prot Reset: Disabled/Enabled Undercurrent I< Current Set: 0.02…3.20 In ISEF< Current Set: 0.001…0.8 InSEF
Poledead V< : 10 …40 V
Supervision VT Supervision VTS Mode: Measured + MCB, Measured only or MCB only VTS Status: Disabled/Blocking/Indication VTS Reset Mode: Manual/Auto VTS Time Delay: 1 s…10 s VTS I> Inhibit: 0.08….32 x In VTS I2> Inhibit: 0.05…0.5 x In Inrush Detection
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 29
I> 2nd Harmonic: 10%…100% Weak Infeed Blk WI Inhibit: Disabled/Enabled I0/I2 Setting: 2…3 CTS Mode: Disabled, Standard, I Diff, Idiff + Standard CTS Status: Restrain, Indication, CTS Reset Mode: Manual or Auto CTS Time Delay: 0…10 s CTS VN< Inhibit: 0.5 V…22 V CTS i1>: 0.05*In…4.0*In CTS i2/i1>: 0.05…1 CTS i2/i1>>: 0.05…1
Systems check Bus-Line Synchronism and Voltage Checks (System Checks) P543 and P545 system checks: Voltage Monitors Live Voltage: 1.0…132.0 V Dead Voltage: 1.0…132.0 V Synchrocheck (Check Synch) CS1 Status: Disabled/Enabled CS1 Phase Angle: 0…90° CS1 Slip Control: None Timer Frequency Both CS1 Slip Freq: 0.02…1.00 Hz CS1 Slip Timer: 0.0…99.0 s CS2 Status (up to): CS2 Slip Timer All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first stage CS1 element. CS Undervoltage: 10.0…132.0 V CS Overvoltage: 60.0…185.0 V CS Diff Voltage: 1.0…132.0 V CS Voltage Block: None Undervoltage Overvoltage Differential UV & OV UV & DiffV OV & DiffV UV, OV & DiffV System Split SS Status: Disabled/Enabled SS Phase Angle: 90…175° SS Under V Block: Disabled/Enabled SS Undervoltage: 10.0…132.0 V SS Timer: 0.0…99.0 s
P544 and P546 system checks: Voltage Monitors Live Line: 5…132 V Dead Line: 5…132 V Live Bus 1: 5…132 V Dead Bus 1: 5…132 V Live Bus 2: 5…132 V
Dead Bus 2: 5…132 V CS UV: 5…120 V CS OV: 60…200 V Sys Checks CB1: Enabled/Disabled CB1 CS Volt. Blk: V< , V> , Vdiff.> , V< and V>, V< and Vdiff> , V> and Vdiff> , V< V> and Vdiff> , None CB1 CS1: Status Enabled or Disabled CB1 CS1 Angle: 0…90° CB1 CS1 Vdiff: 1…120 V CB1 CS1 SlipCtrl: Enabled/Disabled CB1 CS1 SlipFreq: 5 mHz…2 Hz CB1 CS2: Status Enabled/Disabled CB1 CS2 Angle: 0…90° CB1 CS2 Vdiff: 1…120 V CB1 CS2 SlipCtrl: Enabled/Disabled CB1 CS2 SlipFreq: 5 mHz…2 Hz CB1 CS2 Adaptive: Enabled/Disabled CB1 Cl Time: 10.0 ms…0.5 s Sys Checks CB2: (up to): CB2 Cl Time: All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first controlled circuit breaker, CB1. Manual System Checks Num CBs: CB1 only, CB2 only, CB1 & CB2. CB1M SC required: Enabled/Disabled CB1M SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled CB1M SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled CB1M SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled CB1M SC LLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB1M SC DLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB2M SC required: (up to): CB2M SC DLDB: All settings and options chosen from the same ranges as per the first controlled circuit breaker, CB1.
Auto-reclose P543 and P545 auto-reclose: Single Pole Shot: 1/2/3/4 Three Pole Shot: 1/2/3/4 1 Pole Dead Time: 0.05…5.00 s Dead Time 1: 0.05…100.00 s Dead Time 2: 1…1800 s Dead Time 3: 1…3600 s Dead Time 4: 1…3600 s CB Healthy Time: 1…3600 s Reclaim Time: 1…600 s AR Inhibit Time: 0.01…600.00 s Check Sync Time: 0.01…9999.00 s Z2T AR: (up to): Z4T AR: No Action Initiate AR
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -30
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Block AR All time-delayed distance zones can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. DEF Aided AR: Initiate AR Block AR TOR: Initiate AR Block AR I>1 AR: (up to): I>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. IN>1 AR: (up to): IN>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All ground/earth overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. ISEF>1 AR: (up to): ISEF>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All ground/earth overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. Mult Phase AR: Allow Autoclose BAR 2 and 3Ph BAR 3 Phase Dead Time Start: Protection Op Protection Reset Discrim Time: 0.10…5.00 s System Checks CheckSync1 Close: Disabled/Enabled CheckSync2 Close: Disabled/Enabled LiveLine/DeadBus: Disabled/Enabled DeadLine/LiveBus: Disabled/Enabled DeadLine/DeadBus: Disabled/Enabled CS AR Immediate: Disabled/Enabled SysChk on Shot 1: Disabled/Enabled P544 and P546 Auto-reclose: Num CBs: CB1 only, CB2 only, Both CB1 & CB2 Lead/Foll AR Mode: L1P F1P, L1P F3P, L3P F3P, L1/3P F1/3P, L1/3P F3P, Opto AR Mode: AR 1P, AR 1/3P, AR 3P,AR Opto
Leader Select By: Leader by Menu, Leader by Opto, Leader by Ctrl Select Leader: Sel Leader CB1, Sel Leader CB2 BF if LFail Cls: Enabled/Disabled Dynamic F/L: Enabled/Disabled AR Shots: 1…4 Multi Phase AR: Allow Autoclose, BAR 2 and 3 ph, BAR 3 phase Discrim Time: 20 ms…5 s CB IS Time: 5…200 s CB IS MemoryTime: 10 ms…1 s DT Start by Prot: Protection Reset, Protection Op, Disabled 3PDTStart WhenLD: Enabled/Disabled DTStart by CB Op: Enabled/Disabled Dead Line Time: 1…9999 s SP AR Dead Time: 0…10 s 3P AR DT Shot 1: 10 ms…300 s 3P AR DT Shot 2: 1…9999 s 3P AR DT Shot 3: 1…9999 s 3P AR DT Shot 4: 1…9999 s Follower Time: 100 ms…300 s SPAR ReclaimTime: 1…600 s 3PAR ReclaimTime: 1…600s AR CBHealthy Time: 0.01…9999 s AR CheckSync Time: 0.01…9999 s Z1 AR: Initiate AR Block AR Diff AR: Initiate AR Block AR Dist. Aided AR: Initiate AR Block AR Z2T AR: (up to): Z4T AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All time-delayed distance zones can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. DEF Aided AR: Initiate AR Block AR Dir. Comp AR: Initiate AR Block AR TOR: Initiate AR Block AR I>1 AR: (up to): I>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 31
All overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. IN>1 AR: (up to): IN>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All ground/earth overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. ISEF>1 AR: (up to): ISEF>4 AR: No Action Initiate AR Block AR All ground/earth overcurrent stages can be independently set not to act upon AR logic, to initiate a cycle, or to block. Auto-reclose system checks CB1L SC all: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC Shot 1: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC LLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB1L SC DLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC all: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC Shot 1: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC LLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB2L SC DLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC all: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC Shot 1: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC LLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB1F SC DLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC all: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC Shot 1: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC LLDB: Enabled/Disabled CB2F SC DLDB: Enabled/Disabled
Opto input labels Opto Input 1: (up to): Opto Input 32: User defined text string to describe the function of the particular opto input.
Output labels Relay 1: (up to): Relay 32: User defined text string to describe the function of the particular relay output contact.
Measurements list
Measurements 1 I Magnitude I Phase Angle Per phase ( = A, B, C) current measurements IN derived Mag IN derived Angle ISEF Mag ISEF Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude I RMS Per phase ( = A, B, C) RMS current measurements IN RMS V- Magnitude V- Phase Angle V Magnitude V Phase Angle All phase-phase and phase-neutral voltages ( = A, B, C). V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude V RMS V- RMS All phase-phase and phase-neutral voltages ( = A, B, C). Frequency (CB1) CS Volt Mag (CB1) CS Volt Ang (CB1) Bus-Line Ang (CB1) CS Slip Freq IM Magnitude IM Phase Angle I1 Magnitude I1 Phase Angle I2 Magnitude I2 Phase Angle I0 Magnitude I0 Phase Angle V1 Magnitude V1 Phase Angle V2 Magnitude V2 Phase Angle V0 Magnitude V0 Phase Angle CB2 CS Volt Mag (P544 and P546 only) CB2 CS Volt Ang (P544 and P546 only) CB2 Bus-Line Ang (P544 and P546 only) CB2 CS Slip Freq (P544 and P546 only) V1 Rem Magnitude
P54x/EN AD/Lb4 Update Documentation (AD) -32
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
V1 Rem Phase Ang IA CT1 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IA CT1 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) IB CT1 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IB CT1 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) IC CT1 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IC CT1 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) IA CT2 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IA CT2 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) IB CT2 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IB CT2 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) IC CT2 Magnitude (P544 and P546 only) IC CT2 Phase Ang (P544 and P546 only) Measurements 2 Phase Watts Phase VArs Phase VA All phase segregated power measurements, real, reactive and apparent ( = A, B, C). 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph Power Factor Ph Power Factor Independent power factor measurements for all three phases ( = A, B, C). 3Ph WHours Fwd 3Ph WHours Rev 3Ph VArHours Fwd 3Ph VArHours Rev 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem I Fixed Demand Maximum demand currents measured on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). 3Ph W Roll Dem 3Ph VArs Roll Dem I Roll Demand Maximum demand currents measured on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). 3Ph W Peak Dem 3Ph VAr Peak Dem I Peak Demand Maximum demand currents measured on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). Thermal State
Measurements 3 IA Local IA Angle Local IB Local IB Angle Local IC Local IC Angle Local IA remote 1 IA Ang remote 1 IB remote 1 IB Ang remote 1 IC remote 1
IC Ang remote 1 IA remote 2 IA Ang remote 2 IB remote 2 IB Ang remote 2 IC remote 2 IC Ang remote 2 IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential IA Bias IB Bias IC Bias
Measurements 4 Ch 1 Prop Delay Ch 2 Prop Delay Ch1 Rx Prop Delay Ch1 Tx Prop Delay Ch2 Rx Prop Delay Ch2 Tx Prop Delay Channel 1 Status Channel 2 Status Channel Status: Bit 0= Rx Bit 1= Tx Bit 2= Local GPS Bit 3= Remote GPS Bit 4= Mux Clk F Error Bit 5= Signal Lost Bit 6= Path Yellow Bit 7= Mismatch RxN Bit 8= Timeout Bit 9= Message Level Bit 10= Passthrough Bit 11= Hardware B to J model Bit 12= Max Prop Delay Bit 13= Max Tx-Rx Time Binary function link strings denoting channel errors, and when self-healing has been initiated in 3-terminal applications. IM64 Rx Status Statistics Last Reset on Date/Time Ch1 No. Vald Mess Ch1 No. Err Mess Ch1 No. Errored s Ch1 No. Sev Err s Ch1 No. Dgraded m Ch2 No. Vald Mess Ch2 No. Err Mess Ch2 No. Errored s Ch2 No. Sev Err s Ch2 No. Dgraded m Max Ch 1 Prop Delay Max Ch 2 Prop Delay Max Ch1 TxRx Time Max Ch2 TxRx Time Clear Statistics
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 33
Circuit breaker monitoring statistics CB Operations CB Operations Circuit breaker operation counters on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). Total I Broken Cumulative breaker interruption duty on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). CB Operate Time For a second circuit breaker (P544 and P546 only) CB2 Operations CB2 Operations Circuit breaker operation counters on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). CB2 I Broken Cumulative breaker interruption duty on a per phase basis ( = A, B, C). CB 2Operate Time
Fault record proforma The following data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during a fault, and can be viewed in each fault record. Time & Date Model Number: Address: Event Type: Fault record Event Value Faulted Phase: Binary data strings for fast polling of which phase elements started or tripped for the fault recorded. Start Elements Trip Elements Binary data strings for fast polling of which protection elements started or tripped for the fault recorded. Fault Alarms Binary data strings for fast polling of alarms for the fault recorded. Fault Time Active Group: 1/2/3/4 System Frequency: Hz Fault Duration: s CB Operate Time: s Relay Trip Time: s Fault Location: km/miles//% I Pre Flt I Angle Pre Flt Per phase record of the current magnitudes and phase angles stored before the fault inception. IN Prefault Mag IN Prefault Ang IM Prefault Mag IM Prefault Ang V Prefault Mag V Prefault Ang
Per phase record of the voltage magnitudes and phase angles stored before the fault inception. VN Prefault Mag VN Prefault Ang I Fault Mag I Fault Ang Per phase record of the current magnitudes and phase angles during the fault. IN Fault Mag IN Fault Ang IM Fault Mag IM Fault Ang V Fault Mag V Fault Ang Per phase record of the voltage magnitudes and phase angles during the fault. VN Fault Mag VN Fault Ang IA local IB local IC local IA remote 1 IB remote 1 IC remote 1 IA remote 2 IB remote 2 IC remote 2 IA Differential IB Differential IC Differential IA Bias IB Bias IC Bias Ch1 Prop Delay Ch 2 Prop Delay Ch1 Rx Prop Delay Ch1 Tx Prop Delay Ch2 Rx Prop Delay Ch2 Tx Prop Delay V1 Rem Magnitude V1 Rem Phase Ang Fault IA Local Fault IB Local Fault IC Local Fault IA rem 1 Fault IB rem 1 Fault IC rem 1 Fault IA rem 2 Fault IB rem 2 Fault IC rem 2 Fault IA Diff Fault IB Diff Fault IC Diff Fault IA Bias Fault IB Bias Fault IC Bias
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -34
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
SETTINGS (P54x/EN ST/La4)
1.1 Relay settings configuration The relay is a multi-function device that supports numerous different protection, control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled are made invisible in the menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied, and then set the copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the relay following confirmation.
Menu text Default setting Available settings
Restore Defaults No Operation
No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4
Setting to restore a setting group to factory default settings.
To restore the default values to the settings in any Group settings, set the ‘restore defaults’ cell to the relevant Group number. Alternatively it is possible to set the ‘restore defaults’ cell to ‘all settings’ to restore the default values to all of the IED’s settings, not just the Group settings.
The default settings will initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have been confirmed by the user.
Note: Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
Setting Group Select via Menu Select via Menu Select via Optos
Allows setting group changes to be initiated via Opto Input or via Menu.
Active Settings Group 1 Group 1, Group 2, Group 3, Group 4
Selects the active setting group.
Save Changes No Operation No Operation, Save, Abort
Saves all relay settings.
Copy from Group 1 Group 1, 2, 3 or 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied from a selected setting group.
Copy to No Operation No Operation Group 1, 2, 3 or 4
Allows displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group (ready to paste).
Setting Group 1 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
If the setting group is disabled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting (paste).
Setting Group 2 (as above) Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 3 (as above) Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 4 (as above) Disabled Enabled or Disabled
Distance Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 35
Menu text Default setting Available settings
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Distance Protection: ANSI 21P/21G.
Directional E/F Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Directional Earth Fault (DEF) Protection used in a pilot aided scheme: ANSI 67N. This protection is independent from back up Earth fault protection described below.
Phase Diff Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Differential Protection. To get the differential protection fully active, it is necessary also to enable the differential protection in the group. Phase Diff setting and InterMiCOM64 Fiber setting are mutually exclusive as with Phase Diff enabled, the digital message exchanged has the structure of the differential message (i.e. currents are sent to the remote end, etc) and with InterMiCOM64 Fiber the digital message exchanged has the structure and properties of the InterMiCOM64 Fiber.
Overcurrent Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Phase Overcurrent Protection function. I> stages: ANSI 50/51/67P.
Neg. Sequence O/C Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection function.
I2> stages: ANSI 46/67.
Broken Conductor Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Broken Conductor function.
I2/I1> stage: ANSI 46BC.
Earth Fault Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the back up Earth Fault Protection function.
IN >stages: ANSI 50/51/67N.
SEF/REF PROT’N Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Sensitive Earth Fault/Restricted Earth fault Protection function.
ISEF >stages: ANSI 50/51/67N. IREF>stage: ANSI 64.
Residual O/V NVD Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Residual Overvoltage Protection function.
VN>stages: ANSI 59N.
Thermal Overload Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Thermal Overload Protection function.
ANSI 49.
PowerSwing Block Enabled Enabled or Disabled
Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the power swing blocking/out of step: ANSI 68/78.
Volt Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Voltage Protection (under/overvoltage) function.
V<, V> stages: ANSI 27/59.
Freq. Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Frequency Protection (under/over frequency) function.
F<, F> stages: ANSI 81O/U.
df/dt Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Rate of change of Frequency Protection function.
df/dt> stages: ANSI 81R.
CB Fail Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Circuit Breaker Fail Protection function. ANSI 50BF.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -36
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Available settings
Supervision Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Supervision (VTS & CTS) functions. ANSI VTS/CTS.
System Checks Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the System Checks (Check Sync. and Voltage Monitor) function: ANSI 25.
Auto-reclose Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Auto-reclose function. ANSI 79.
Input Labels Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Input Labels menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Output Labels Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Output Labels menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
CT & VT Ratios Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Current & Voltage Transformer Ratios menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Record Control Invisible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Record Control menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Disturb. Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Disturbance Recorder menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Measure’t. Set-up Invisible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Measurement Setup menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Comms. Settings Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Communications Settings menu visible further on in the relay settings menu. These are the settings associated with the second rear communications ports.
Commission Tests Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Commissioning Tests menu visible further on in the relay settings menu.
Setting Values Primary Primary or Secondary
This affects all protection settings that are dependent upon CT and VT ratios. All subsequent settings input must be based in terms of this reference.
Control Inputs Visible Invisible or Visible
Activates the Control Input status and operation menu further on in the relay setting menu.
Ctrl I/P Config. Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Control Input Configuration menu visible further on in the relay setting menu.
Ctrl I/P Labels Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Control Input Labels menu visible further on in the relay setting menu.
Direct Access Enabled Enabled/Disabled/Hotkey only/CB Cntrl. only
Defines what CB control direct access is allowed. Enabled implies control via menu, hotkeys etc.
InterMiCOM64 Fiber Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) InterMiCOM64 (integrated 56/64kbit/s teleprotection). Note that Phase Diff setting and InterMiCOM64 Fiber setting are mutually exclusive as with Phase Diff enabled, the digital message exchanged has the structure of the differential message (i.e. currents are sent to the remote end, etc) and with InterMiCOM64 Fiber the digital message exchanged has the structure and properties of the InterMiCOM64 Fiber.
Function Key Visible Invisible or Visible
Sets the Function Key menu visible further on in the relay setting menu.
RP1 Read Only Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Rear Port 1.
RP2 Read Only Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Rear Port 2.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 37
Menu text Default setting Available settings
NIC Read Only Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) Read Only Mode of Network Interface Card.
LCD Contrast 11 0…31
Sets the LCD contrast.
1.2 Integral teleprotection settings
1.2.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM
InterMiCOM operates via an EIA(RS)232 physical output on the back of the 2nd rear communication board. It provides 8 independently settable digital signals that can be conveyed between line ends. The InterMiCOM teleprotection is restricted to 2 ends. InterMiCOM input and output mapping has to be done in the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL).
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
INTERMiCOM COMMS
IM Input Status 00000000
Displays the status of each InterMiCOM input signal, with IM1 signal starting from the right. When loop back mode is set, all bits will display zero.
IM Output Status 00000000
Displays the status of each InterMiCOM output signal.
Source Address 1 1 10 1
Setting for the unique relay address that is encoded in the InterMiCOM sent message.
Receive Address 2 1 10 1
The aim of setting addresses is to establish pairs of relays which will only communicate with each other. Should an inadvertent channel misrouting or spurious loopback occur, an error will be logged, and the erroneous received data will be rejected.
As an example, in a 2 ended scheme the following address setting would be correct:
Local relay: Source Address = 1, Receive Address = 2
Remote relay: Source Address = 2, Receive Address = 1
Baud Rate 9600 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200
Setting of the signaling speed in terms of number of bits per second. The speed will match the capability of the MODEM or other characteristics of the channel provided.
Ch Statistics Visible Invisible or Visible
Settings that makes visible or invisible Channel Statistics on the LCD. The statistic is reset by either relay’s powering down or using the Reset Statistics cell.
Rx Direct Count 0
Displays the number of valid Direct Tripping messages since last counter reset.
Rx Perm Count 0
Displays the number of valid Permissive Tripping messages since last counter reset.
Rx Block Count 0
Displays the number of valid Blocking messages since last counter reset.
Rx NewData Count 0
Displays the number of different messages (change events) since last counter reset.
Rx Errored Count 0
Displays the number of invalid received messages since last counter reset.
Lost Messages 0
Displays the difference between the number of messages that were supposed to be received (based on set Baud Rate) and actual valid received messages since last reset.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -38
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Elapsed Time 0
Displays the time in seconds since last counter reset.
Reset Statistics No Yes or No
Command that allows all Statistics and Channel Diagnostics to be reset.
Ch Diagnostics Visible Invisible or Visible
Setting that makes visible or invisible Channel Diagnostics on the LCD. The diagnostic is reset by either relay’s powering down or using the Reset Statistics cell.
DATA CD Status OK, FAIL, or Absent
Indicates when the DCD line (pin 1 on EIA232 Connector) is energized.
OK = DCD is energized
FAIL = DCD is de-energized
Absent = Second Rear port board is not fitted
FrameSync Status OK, FAIL, Absent or Unavailable
Indicates when the message structure and synchronization is valid.
OK = Valid message structure and synchronization
FAIL = Synchronization has been lost
Absent = Second Rear port board is not fitted
Unavailable = Hardware error present
Message Status OK, FAIL, Absent or Unavailable
Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the IM Msg Alarm Lvl setting within the alarm time period.
OK = Acceptable ratio of lost messages
FAIL = Unacceptable ratio of lost messages
Absent = Second Rear port board is not fitted
Unavailable = Hardware error present
Channel Status OK, FAIL, Absent or Unavailable
Indicates the state of the InterMiCOM communication channel.
OK = Channel healthy
FAIL = Channel failure
Absent = Second Rear port board is not fitted
Unavailable = Hardware error present
IM H/W Status OK, Read Error, Write Error, or Absent
Indicates the state of InterMiCOM hardware
OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy
Read or Write Error = InterMiCOM failure
Absent = Second Rear port is not fitted or failed to initialize.
Loopback Mode Disabled Disabled, Internal or External
Setting to allow testing of the InterMiCOM channel. When ‘Internal’ is selected, only the local InterMiCOM software functionality is tested, whereby the relay will receive its own sent data. ‘External’ setting allows a hardware and software check, with an external link required to jumper the sent data onto the receive channel.
During normal service condition Loopback mode must be disabled.
Test Pattern 11111111 00000000 11111111 —
Allows specific bit statuses to be inserted directly into the InterMiCOM message, to substitute real data. This is used for testing purposes.
Loopback Status OK, FAIL or Unavailable
Indicates the status of the InterMiCOM loopback mode
OK = Loopback software (and hardware) is working correctly
FAIL = Loopback mode failure
Unavailable = Hardware error present.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 39
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
INTERMiCOM CONF
IM Msg Alarm Lvl 25% 0% 100% 0.1%
Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality. If during the fixed 1.6s window the ratio of invalid messages to the total number of messages that should be received (based on the Baud Rate setting) exceeds the above threshold, a Message Fail alarm will be issued.
IM1 Cmd Type Blocking Disabled, Direct, Blocking or Permissive
Setting that defines the operative mode of the InterMiCOM_1 signal.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Blocking allows fastest signaling, whereas setting to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher dependability
IM1 FallBackMode Default Default or Latching
Setting that defines the status of IM1 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost.
If set to Latching the last valid IM1 status will be maintained until the new valid message is received.
If set to Default, the IM1 status, pre-defined by the user in IM1 DefaultValue cell will be set. A new valid message will replace IM1 DefaultValue, once the channel recovers.
IM1 DefaultValue 1 0 1 1
Setting that defines the IM1 fallback status.
IM1 FrameSyncTim 1.5 s 0.01 s 1.5 s 0.01 s
Time delay after which IM1 DefaultValue is applied, providing that no valid message is received in the meantime.
IM2 to IM4 Cells as for IM1 above
IM5 Cmd Type Direct Disabled, Direct, Blocking or Permissive
Setting that defines the operative mode of the InterMiCOM_5 signal.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Blocking allows fastest signaling, whereas setting to Direct offers higher security at the expense of speed.
Selecting the channel response for this bit to Permissive offers higher dependability
IM5 FallBackMode Default Default or Latching
As for IM1
IM5 DefaultValue 0 0 1 1
Setting that defines the IM5 fallback status.
IM5 FrameSyncTim 1.5 s 0.01 s 1.5 s 0.01 s
Time delay after which IM5 DefaultValue is applied.
IM6 to IM8 Cells as for IM5 above
1.3 Protection communication configuration
The column PROT COMMS/ IM64 is used to set up all the differential protection communications parameters required by differential protection and also the parameters required for teleprotection when Differential function is disabled and the relay is working as a Distance relay using InterMiCOM64 for teleprotection purposes.
InterMiCOM64 is a fiber-optic based teleprotection scheme, described in detail in the Operation and Application chapters of this service manual.
In the settings listed here, Channel1 and Channel2 refer to the communications channels, and are associated with configuring the communications ports fitted to the co-processor board.
Each setting below that refers to Channel 2 is associated with the communications setting of the second communications channel (where fitted) and is visible only when 3 Terminal or Dual redundant teleprotection configuration is set.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -40
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Note: InterMiCOM64 provides 2 groups of 8 InterMiCOM64 commands. These are
referenced as Channel 1 and Channel 2. They have a subtly different meaning and should not be confused with communications channels 1 and 2.
InterMiCOM64 input and output mapping has to be done in the Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL).
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
PROT COMMS/IM64
Scheme Setup 2 Terminal 2 Terminal, Dual Redundant, or 3 Terminal
Settings to determine how many relay ends are connected in the differential zone or how many relays are connected to the teleprotection scheme for the protected line, with two or three ends possible.
For a plain two terminal line, there is an additional option to use dual communication channels, to implement redundancy (i.e. employ a parallel “hot-standby” path).
Address 0-0 0-0, 1-A…20-A, 1-B….20-B
Setting for the unique relay address that is encoded in the Differential message and in the InterMiCOM64 sent message. The aim of setting the address is to establish pairs of relays which will only communicate with each other. Should an inadvertent fiber/MUX misrouting or spurious loopback occur, an error will be logged, and the erroneous received data will be rejected.
As an example, in a 2 ended scheme the following address setting would be correct:
Local relay: 1-A
Remote relay: 1-B
Address 0-0 is a universal address, whereby any relay will be free to communicate with any other (equivalent to disabling of the unique addressing). When PROT COMMS/IM64 is set to loop back mode, the address 0-0 will replace any existing address in the relay.
Address 0-0 0-0, 1-A…20-A, 1-B….20-B, 1-C…20-C
In 3 terminal schemes, communicating groups of three relays may be configured.
Comm Mode Standard Standard or IEEE C37.94
Setting that defines the data format that will be transmitted on the fiber outputs from the relay.
If the Multiplexer accepts direct fiber inputs according to IEEE C37.94, the ‘IEEE C37.94’ setting is selected.
For a direct fiber link between relays, and where the MUX connection is in electrical format (G.703 or V.35 or X.21), the ‘Standard’ message format needs to be set.
For a setting change to take effect, rebooting of the relay will be required. The Comm Mode setting applies to both channels.
Baud Rate Ch 1 64 kbits/s 56 kbits/s or 64 kbits/s
Channel 1 data rate setting for signaling between ends. The setting will depend on the MUX electrical interface, set 64 kbit/s for G.703 and X.21, or generally 56 kbit/s for V.35.
For direct fiber connection between relays, 64kbit/s will offer slightly faster data transmission.
The setting is invisible when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Baud Rate Ch 2 64 kbits/s 56 kbits/s or 64 kbits/s
As ‘Baud Rate Ch1’ cell.
Clock Source Ch1 Internal Internal or External
Setting that defines which clock source is used to synchronize data transmissions over channel 1. The setting will depend on communications configuration and external clock source availability. If relays are connected direct fiber over channel 1, ‘Internal’ setting should be selected. If channel 1 is routed via a multiplexer, either setting may be required (see Application Notes).
Clock Source Ch2 Internal Internal or External
Setting that matches the clock source being used for data synchronization over channel 2.
Ch1 N*64kbits/s 1 Auto, 1, 2, 3, …..or 12
Setting for channel 1 when connected to MUX. When set to ‘Auto’ P54x will configure itself to match the multiplexer.
The setting is visible only when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 41
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Ch2 N*64kbits/s 1 Auto, 1, 2, 3, …..or 12
Setting for channel 2 when connected to Mux.
The setting is visible only when IEEE C37.94 Comm Mode is selected.
Comm Delay Tol 0.00025 s 0.00025 s 0.001 s 0.00005 s
If successive calculated propagation times exceed this time delay setting, the relay will initiate a change in relay setting for a short time period (“Char Mod Time” setting) and will raise a Comm Delay Alarm.
Comm Fail Timer 10 s 0.1 s 600 s 0.1 s
Time delay after which the ‘Channel Fail Alarm’ will be issued providing that no messages were received during the ‘Channel Timeout’ period or the ‘Alarm Level’ is exceeded.
Comm Fail Mode Ch 1 and 2 Fail Ch 1 Failure/ Ch 2 Failure/ Ch 1 or Ch 2 Fail/ Ch 1 and Ch 2 Fail
Fail mode setting that triggers the ‘Channel Fail Alarm’, providing that the Dual Redundancy or 3 ended scheme is set.
Normally the alarm would be raised for any loss of an operational channel (logical OR combination). However, when relays in a 3 ended scheme are deliberately operated in Chain topology AND logic may be used, for indication when the scheme becomes finally inoperative, with no self-healing (signal rerouting) mode possible.
GPS Sync GPS Disabled GPS Disabled,GPS -> Standard, GPS -> Inhibit, GPS -> Restrain
Setting to define type of GPS Mode. Refer to Operating Guide for full explanation of settings.
If set to GPS Disabled, Char Mod Time and Char Mod Ex are visible. Prop Delay Equal is invisible.
If set to GPS Standard, Char Mod Time and Char Mod Ex are invisible. Prop Delay Equal is visible.
If set to GPS -> Inhibit, Char Mod Time and Char Mod Ex are invisible. Prop Delay Equal is visible.
If set to GPS -> Restrain, Char Mod Time, Char Mod Ex and Prop Delay Equal are visible.
Char Mod Time 0.5 s 0 30 s 0.0001 s
Time delay during which the setting characteristic k1 is increased to 200% after successive calculated propagation delay time exceed the time delay setting Comm Delay Tol. This should be set to greater than the maximum switching delay expected.
Char Mod Ex Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
Setting to enable Char Mod Ex Time.
Char Mod Ex Time 0.5 s 0 s 30 s 0.0001 s
If the Char Mod Time has started then the Char Mod Ex Timer runs. If at the end of this timer and until Char Mod Time has expired, the bias current is above 5% In, and differential current is below 10% of bias current on all phases, then the Char Mod Time will reset and the characteristic will return to normal. If these conditions are not met, then the characteristic remains increased for the duration of the Char Mod Time. Char Mod Ex Timer should be set greater than the minimum switching delay expected, and less than Char Mod Time.
Prop Delay Equal No Operation No operation or Restore CDiff
If a P54x relay working with GPS sample synchronization loses GPS and there is a further switch in the protection communications network, the relay becomes Inhibited. If GPS become active again, the relay will automatically reset. But if not, the user can remove the inhibited condition by using this setting. This should only be performed if it can be guaranteed that the communication receiver and transmitter path delays are equal.
The setting is invisible when GPS Sync mode is disabled.
Re-Configuration Three Ended Three Ended, Two Ended (R1&R2) , Two Ended (L&R2) or Two Ended (L&R1)
This setting is to change the scheme from three ended scheme to two ended scheme or vice versa. An in deep explanation of relay performance for each case is given in chapter P54x/EN OP.
The setting is invisible when 3 Terminal Scheme Setup is selected.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -42
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Channel Timeout 0.1 s 0.1 s 10 s 0.1 s
A rolling time window beyond which any of the 8 IM signals that are set to ‘Default’ will be replaced by the corresponding ‘IM_X Default Value’ setting, providing that no valid message is received on that channel in the meantime. The ‘Chnl Fail Alarm’ timer will be also initiated.
If only one channel is used, each out of 16 IM signals available that is set to ‘Default’ will convert to corresponding ‘IM_X Default Value’
If a Dual redundant or 3 ended scheme is selected, each out of 8 IM signals available that is set to ‘Default’ will convert to corresponding ‘IM_X Default Value’, but only for the affected channel.
Alarm Level 25% 0% 100% 1%
Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality. If during a fixed 100 ms rolling window the number of invalid messages divided by the total number of messages that should be received (based upon the ‘Baud Rate’ setting) increase above the threshold, a ‘Channel Fail Alarm’ timer will be initiated.
Prop Delay Stats Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the alarms of Maximum propagation delay time
MaxCh 1 PropDelay 15 ms 1 ms 50 ms 1 ms
When the protection communications are enabled, the overall propagation delay divided by 2 is calculated and the maximum value is determined and displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh1 PropDelay (DDB 1386) is raised.
MaxCh 2 PropDelay 15 ms 1 ms 50 ms 1 ms
When the protection communications are enabled, the overall propagation delay divided by 2 is calculated and the maximum value is determined and displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh2 PropDelay (DDB 1387) is raised.
TxRx Delay Stats Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the alarms of absolute difference between the Transmission and Reception propagation delay. This setting is visible only in case that GPS Sync is Enabled.
MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime 15 ms 1 ms 50 ms 1 ms
When the protection communications and GPS Sync are enabled, the absolute difference between the Transmission and Reception propagation delay is calculated and the maximum value is determined and displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime (DDB 1388) is raised.
MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime 15 ms 1 ms 50 ms 1 ms
When the protection communications and GPS Sync are enabled, the absolute difference between the Transmission and Reception propagation delay is calculated and the maximum value is determined and displayed in Measurements 4 column. This value is displayed and compared against this setting. If the setting is exceeded, an alarm MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime (DDB 1389) is raised.
GPS Fail Timer 0 s 0 s 9999 s 1 s
Time delay setting after which the ‘GPS Alarm’ – DDB 310 is asserted following a loss of GPS signal or initiation by the GPS transient fail alarm function when active(see below).
GPS Trans Fail Disabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the transient GPS Fail alarm function.
GPS Trans Count 1 s 1 s 100 s 1 s
Sets the count for the number of failed GPS signals which must be exceeded in the set ‘GPS Trans Timer’ window after which the ‘GPS Fail Timer’ is initiated.
GPS Trans Timer 1 s 0 s 9999 s 1 s
Sets the rolling time window in which the ‘GPS Trans Count’ must be exceeded after which the ‘GPS Fail Timer’ is initiated.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 43
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
IM1 Cmd Type Permissive Direct or Permissive
Setting that defines the operative mode of the received InterMiCOM_1 signal.
When Direct tripping is chosen, for security reasons 2 consecutive valid messages have to be received before a change in the signal status will be acknowledged. That will impose an additional 1-2 ms delay comparing to ‘Permissive’ mode.
Set Direct in Direct Transfer Tripping (Intertripping) applications.
Set Permissive to accommodate any Permissive or Blocking scheme.
IM1 FallBackMode Default Default or Latching
Setting that defines the status of IM1 signal in case of heavy noise and message synchronization being lost.
If set to Latching the last valid IM1 status will be maintained until the new valid message is received.
If set to Default, the IM1 status, pre-defined by the user in IM1 Default Value cell will be set. A new valid message will replace IM1 Default Value, once the channel recovers.
IM1 DefaultValue 0 0 1 1
Setting that defines the IM1 fallback status.
IM2 to IM8 Cells as for IM1 above
Note: The IM1 – IM8 settings in the table above are applied the same to the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands grouped as Channel 1 as to the 8 InterMiCOM64 commands grouped as Channel 2. If IM1 Default Value is set to 0, then IM1 Channel 1, and IM1 Channel 2 will both default to 0.
1.4.4 Phase differential
The column “GROUP x PHASE DIFF” is used to:
Select the settings of the phase differential characteristic
Define CT correction factors
Define type of compensation (Capacitive Charging current or phase shift compensation). If charging current is selected, to set the value of susceptance and if phase shift is chosen, to set the value of vector compensation (P543 and P545 models only)
Enable or Disable inrush restrain in the case of transformers in zone (P543 and P545 models only)
Set the amount of positive sequence current required for Differential current transformer supervision
The column “GROUP x PHASE DIFF” is invisible if disabled in ‘CONFIGURATION’ column.
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Phase Diff Enabled Enabled or Disabled
To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Differential protection function in the group.
Phase Is1 0.2 In 0.2 In 2 In 0.05 In
Setting that defines the minimum pick-up level of the relay.
Phase Is2 2 In 1 In 30 In 0.05 In
This setting defines the bias current threshold, above which the higher percentage bias k2 is used.
Phase k1 30% 30% 150% 5%
The lower percentage bias setting used when the bias current is below s2. This provides stability for small CT mismatches, whilst ensuring good sensitivity to resistive faults under heavy load conditions.
Phase k2 150% (2 end or dual redundant)
100% (3 end) 30% 150% 5%
The higher percentage bias setting used to improve relay stability under heavy through fault current conditions.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -44
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Phase Char DT DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E inverse, UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Setting for the tripping characteristic for differential protection element.
Phase Time Delay 0 s 0 s 100 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected. The setting is visible only when DT function is selected.
Phase TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic.
Phase Time Dial 0.01 0.01 100 0.01
Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves. The Time Dial (TD) is a multiplier on the standard curve equation, in order to achieve the required tripping time. The reference curve is based on TD = 1.
Care: Certain manufacturer’s use a mid-range value of TD = 5 or 7, so it may be necessary to divide by 5 or 7 to achieve parity.
PIT Time 0.2 s 0 s 0.2 s 0.005 s
This timer is initiated upon receipt of PIT flag in the message. Once this timer elapses, and as long as the current is above of Is1 setting, the relay closes its three phase differential trip contacts.
Ph CT Corr’tion 1 1 8 0.01
Setting used to compensate CT ratios mismatch between terminals.
Compensation None None, Cap Charging, Transformer
Setting to define type of compensation.
If set to None, Susceptance Inrush Restraint and Transformer are invisible.
If set to Cap Charging, Susceptance setting becomes visible and Inrush Restraint and Transformer are invisible.
If set to Transformer, Inrush Restraint and Vectorial Comp settings become visible while Susceptance setting is invisible.
Inrush Restraint, Id High Set and Vectorial Comp are only applicable in relay models P543 and P545.
Susceptance 1E-8*In 1E-8*In 10*In 1E-8*In
Visible when Compensation is set to Cap Charging. Setting to define the positive sequence susceptance value of the circuit for capacitive charging current compensation
Inrush Restraint Disabled Disabled, Restraint, Blocking
Only models P543 and P545 when Compensation is set to Transformer.
Setting Restraint (activate), Blocking (Inrush blocking) or Disable (turn off) the additional bias inrush restrain.
If set to Restraint, Ih(2) Muliplier setting becomes visible.
If set to Blocking, Ih(2) %>, Ih(2) CrossBlock and Ih(5) Blocking settings becomes visible and Ih(2) Muliplier setting becomes invisible.
Note: It must be ensure that this function is enabling at each end to avoid maloperation.
Ih(2) Multiplier 4 1 20 0.01
Additional bias = Ih(2) Multiplier * √2 * Ih(2).
Ih(2) %> 15% 5% 50% 1%
If the % of 2nd harmonic in any phase is greater than Ih(2) %> setting, then inrush conditions shall be detected.
Ih(2) CrossBlock Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
If Ih(2) CrossBlock is set Disabled then independent blocking is used. If enabled then Cross blocking is used.
Ih(5) Blocking Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
Setting to enable 5th harmonic Blocking element. This shall be used to detect overfluxing conditions.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 45
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Ih(5) %> 35% 5% 100% 1%
If the % of 5th harmonic in any phase is greater than Ih(5) %> setting, then overfluxing conditions shall be detected.
Ih(5) CrossBlock Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
If Ih(5) CrossBlock is set Disabled then independent blocking is used. If enabled then Cross blocking is used.
Highset Status Disabled Disabled⁄Enabled
Setting to enable highset differential element. HighSet Status only models P543 and P545 when Compensation is set to Transformer and Inrush Restraint is set to Restraint or Blocking.
Vectorial Comp Yy0 (0 deg)
Yy0 (0 deg), Yd1 (-30 deg), Yy2 (-60 deg), Yd3 (-90 deg), Yy4 (-120 deg),
Yd5 (-150 deg), Yy6 (180 deg),
Yd7 (+150 deg), Yy8 (+120 deg),
Yd9 (+90 deg), Yy10 (+60 deg),
Yd11 (+30 deg), Ydy0 (0 deg),
Ydy6 (180 deg)
Only in models P543 and P545 when Vectorial Comp is enable. To define the vector compensation to account for phase shift correction and zero sequence current filtering (for transformer applications)
Id High Set 4*ln 4*ln 32*ln 0.01*ln
Only in models P543 and P545 when Inrush Restraint is set to Restrain or Blocking Pick-up setting for high set differential protection
Phase Is1 CTS 1.2*In 0.2*In 4*In 0.05*In
Setting that defines the minimum pick-up level of the relay when a current transformer supervision CTS is declared
PIT I Selection PIT I selection Remote PIT I selection Remote
Remote
Local or Remote
Setting that defines the current to be used for the Permissive Intertrip
1.4.12 Sensitive Earth Fault
If a system is earthed through a high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a suitably sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A separate four-stage sensitive earth fault element is provided within the P54x relay for this purpose, which has a dedicated input.
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
SEF/REF Options SEF SEF Enabled, Wattmetric SEF, HI Z REF
Setting to select the type of sensitive earth fault protection function and the type of high-impedance function to be used.
SEF>1 Function DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E inverse, UK LT Inverse , IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse, IDG
Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
SEF>1 Direction Non-directional Non-directional Direction Fwd Direction Rev
N/A
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -46
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
SEF>1 Current 0.05 x nSEF 0.005 x nSEF 0.1x nSEF 0.00025 x nSEF
Pick-up setting for the first stage sensitive earth fault element.
SEF>1 IDG Is 1.5 1 4 0.1
This setting is set as a multiple of SEF> setting for the IDG curve (Scandinavian) and determines the actual relay current threshold at which the element starts.
SEF>1 Delay 1 0 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the time delay for the first stage definite time element.
SEF>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.005
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic.
SEF>1 Time Dial 1 0.1 100 0.1
Setting for the time multiplier to adjust the operating time of the IEEE/US IDMT curves.
SEF>1 Reset Char. DT DT or Inverse N/A
Setting to determine the type of reset/release characteristic of the IEEE/US curves.
SEF>1 tRESET 0 0 s 100 s 0.01 s
Setting to determine the reset/release time for definite time reset characteristic.
SEF>1 IDG Time 1.2 1 2 0.01
Setting for the IDG curve used to set the minimum operating time at high levels of fault current.
SEF>2 Cells as for ISEF>1 Above
SEF>3 Status Disabled Disabled or Enabled N/A
Setting to enable or disable the third stage definite time sensitive earth fault element.
SEF>3 Direction Non-directional Non-directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev
N/A
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element.
SEF>3 Current 0.4 x nSEF 0.005 x nSEF 0.8 x nSEF 0.001 x nSEF
Pick-up setting for the third stage sensitive earth fault element.
SEF>3 Delay 1 0 s 200 s 0.01 s
Setting for the operating time delay for third stage sensitive earth fault element.
SEF>4 Cells as for SEF>3 Above
SEF> Func. Link 001111
Bit 0=VTS Blks ISEF>1,
Bit 1=VTS Blks ISEF>2,
Bit 2=VTS Blks ISEF>3,
Bit 3=VTS Blks ISEF>4,
Bit 4= A/R Blks ISEF>3,
Bit 5=A/R Blks ISEF>4,
Bit 6=Not Used,
Bit 7=Not Used
Settings that determine whether VT supervision and auto-reclose logic signals blocks selected sensitive earth fault stages.
ISEF DIRECTIONAL
SEF> Char. Angle 90° –95° +95° 1°
Setting for the relay characteristic angle used for the directional decision.
SEF>VNpol Set 5 0.5 V 88 V 0.5 V
Setting for the minimum zero sequence voltage polarizing quantity required for directional decision.
IREF> Is 0.2 * Insef 0.05 * Insef 1 * Insef 0.01 * Insef
Pick-up setting for the High Impedance restricted earth fault element.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 47
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
WATTMETRIC SEF Sub-heading in menu
PN> Setting 9 nSEF W 0 20 nSEF W 0.05 nSEF W
Setting for the threshold for the wattmetric component of zero sequence power. The power calculation is as follows:
The PN> setting corresponds to:
Vres x res x Cos ( – c) = 9 x Vo x o x Cos (– c)
Where; = Angle between the Polarizing Voltage (-Vres) and the Residual Current
c = Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) Setting (SEF> Char Angle)
Vres = Residual Voltage
res = Residual Current
Vo = Zero Sequence Voltage
o = Zero Sequence Current
1.5.1 System data
This menu provides information for the device and general status of the relay.
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Language English
The default language used by the device. Selectable as English, French, German, Spanish.
Password ****
Device default password.
Sys. Fn. Links 0 1
Setting to allow the fixed function trip LED to be self resetting (set to 1 to extinguish the LED after a period of healthy restoration of load current).
Description MiCOM P54x
16 character relay description. Can be edited.
Plant Reference MiCOM
Associated plant description and can be edited.
Model Number P54??1???M???0K
Relay model number. This display cannot be altered.
Serial Number 123456J
Relay model number. This display cannot be altered.
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Relay set frequency. Settable either 50 or 60 Hz
Comms. Level 2
Displays the conformance of the relay to the Courier Level 2 comms.
Relay Address 1 255 0 255 1
Sets the first rear port relay address.
Plant Status 0000000000000010
Displays the circuit breaker plant status.
Control Status 0000000000000000
Not used.
Active Group 1 1 4 1
Displays the active settings group.
CB Trip/Close No Operation No Operation/ Trip/Close
Supports trip and close commands if enabled in the Circuit Breaker Control menu.
Software Ref. 1 P54x____1__057_K
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -48
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Menu text Default setting Setting range Step size
Min. Max.
Software Ref. 2 P54x____1__057_K
Displays the relay software version including protocol and relay model.
Software Ref. 2 is displayed for relay with IEC 61850 protocol only and this will display the software version of the Ethernet card.
Opto I/P Status 00000000000000000000000000000000
Display the status of the available opto inputs fitted.
Relay O/P Status 00000000000000000000000000000000
Displays the status of all available output relays fitted.
Alarm Status 1 00000000000000000000000000000000
32 bit field gives status of first 32 alarms. Includes fixed and user settable alarms.
Alarm Status 2 00000000000000000000000000000000
Next 32 alarm status defined.
Access Level 2
Displays the current access level.
Level 0 — No password required — Read access to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records
Level 1 — Password 1 or 2 required — As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit breaker open/close
Reset of fault and alarm conditions, Reset LEDs Clearing of event and fault records
Level 2 — Password 2 required — As level 1 plus: All other settings
Password Control 2 1
Sets the menu access level for the relay. This setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled.
Password Level 1 ****
Allows user to change password level 1.
Password Level 2 ****
Allows user to change password level 2.
OPERATION (P54x/EN OP/La4)
1.1.1.2 Time alignment of current vectors with GPS input (all models) The effect of the deployment of switched SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) networks on telecommunications circuits used in the application of numerical current differential protection to transmission lines.
Such telecommunications networks can be deployed in flexible, self-healing topologies. Typically, ring network topologies are employed and these are characterized by the ability to self-heal in the event of a failure of an interconnection channel.
Consider a simple ring topology with 6 nodes, A — F, and consider two equipment situated at nodes B and C. Under healthy conditions equipment at B communicates with equipment at C directly between nodes B and C and equipment at C communicates with equipment at B directly between nodes C and B. In this condition the communications propagation time between nodes B and C will be the same as that between nodes C and B and so the traditional technique described in could be used to apply numerical current differential protection (see Figure 4).
If the link fails in one direction, say between the transmitter at node B and the receiver at node C, the self-healing ring can continue to transfer signals from node B to node C via the standby route through nodes B, A, F, E, D and then C (obviously a longer path). In this case the communication propagation delay times between nodes B and C differ in the two directions, and if the difference is greater than 1ms the traditional time alignment technique described in section 1.1.1.1 is no longer adequate.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 49
����
���
�������
���
� ������
� ������
���
���
���
���
���
����������
�� �������
��������
��������
Figure 4: Example of switched synchronous digital hierarchy
P54x make use of the timing information available from the GPS system to overcome the limitation of the traditional technique, and therefore allow application to communications that can provide a permanent or semi-permanent split path routing.
A 1 pulse per second output from a GPS receiver is used to ensure that the re-sampling of the currents at each relay occurs at the same instant in time. The technique is therefore not dependant on equal transmit and receive propagation delay times; changes in one or both of the propagation delay times also do not cause problems. These factors make it suitable for use with switched SDH networks.
The GPS technique is taken further, however, to overcome concerns about the reliability of the GPS system. Consider a similar two ended system to that of Figure 3 where the re-sampling instants (tAn, tBn) are synchronized using the GPS timing information. Here the re-sampling instants at the two ends will be coincidental as shown in Figure 5.
Note: Figure 5 demonstrates a case where the communications path propagation delay times are not the same.
��
���
���
���
���
���
���
��
��!
���!
���
���
���
���
���
��
��!
�
�»
���
� ����� ���� ����������������
Figure 5: Data Transmission
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -50
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Note: Relay A can measure the total elapsed time = (tA* — tA1). This equals the
sum of the propagation delay times tp1 and tp2, the delay in sending out the initial message ta, and the delay time tc+td at end B. Hence
tp1 + tp2 = tA* — tA1 — ta — tc — td
However, because of the GPS synchronization of the re-sampling instants, tA3 is at the same instant as tB3 (therefore tB3* = tA3) we can use this knowledge to calculate the receive path delay
tp2= tA* — tA3 – td
And, by the same process the relay can also calculate tp1.
In the event of the GPS synchronizing signal becoming unavailable, the synchronization of the re-sampling instants at the different ends will be lost and the sampling will become asynchronous. However, the behavior depends on which mode is selected. If GPS -> Standard is selected, the time alignment of the current data will now be performed, by using the memorized value of propagation delay times prior to the GPS outage (tp2 in relay A and tp1 in relay B – Figure 4). Each relay also keeps measuring the overall propagation delay, tp1+tp2. As long as the change in overall propagation delay does not exceed the setting value under PROT COMMS/IM64/Comm Delay Tol, it is considered that the communication path has not been switched, tp2 and tp1 at the two ends remains valid and the differential protection remains active. If the overall propagation delay exceeds the above mentioned setting, the differential protection will be inhibited. This patented “fallback” strategy ensures protection continuity even in the event of antenna vandalism, maintenance error, extremely adverse atmospheric conditions etc – all of which could result in GPS outage.
Note: tp1 and tp2 do not need to be equal for the fallback strategy to become operational.
If GPS -> Inhibit mode is selected and GPS synchronizing signal becomes unavailable and tp1 = tp2 then the time alignment is performed using the average loop delay. If at the time the GPS fails (tp1 not equal tp2, split path) then the time alignment can be performed using the memorized value of propagation delay prior to the GPS outage.
Each relay continues to measure the overall propagation delay, tp1+tp2. As long as the change in overall propagation delay does not exceed the Comm Delay Tol setting it is decided that the communication path has not been switched, tp1 and tp2 at the two ends remain valid and the protection remains active. If the change in overall propagation delay is greater than the Comm Delay Tol setting, the differential protection shall be inhibited.
If the GPS signal returns, continue in the GPS -> Standard mode of operation.
In GPS -> Restrain mode, behavior is similar to that of GPS -> Inhibit, except that when average loop delay is used, i.e. GPS Sync is lost, if the change in overall propagation delay is greater than the Comm Delay Tol setting, the differential protection shall be restrained by invoking the Char Mod Time functionality, and not inhibited.
1.2 Protection of transformers feeders (P543 and P545)
MiCOM P543/P545 relays can be applied when power transformers are located in the differential zone. In order to obtain the correct performance of the relay for this application, MiCOM P543/P545 is provided with:
Phase compensation to take unto account any phase shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either side of windings, and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In P543 and P545, software interposing CTs (ICTs) are provided to give the required compensation.
Inrush blocking or restrain options to cater for high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 51
For conditions where it is possible to temporarily load the transformer with a voltage in
excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing blocking prevents unwanted tripping. The fifth harmonic blocking feature does not require a voltage signal. A fifth harmonic signal is derived from the differential current waveform on each phase and blocking is on a per phase basis. The overfluxing protection should be used in such applications to protect the transformer accordingly.
CT ratio correction factor as mentioned in section 1.1.3 to match the transformer winding rated currents if needed.
Note: The P544 and P546 relays do not include any of the above features, except CT ratio mismatch compensation, and as such would not be suitable for the protection of in-zone transformer feeders.
1.2.1 Enabling or disabling differential protection for in-zone power transformer
Differential protection with an in-zone transformer can be enabled from the local control panel. Enabling can be done separately for each setting group. To enable the differential protection, set the cell [3310: Compensation] to Transformer under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading.
1.2.2 Transformer magnetizing inrush (P543 and P545)
The magnetizing inrush current to a transformer appears as a large operating signal to the differential protection. Special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs during inrush.
Figure 7 shows a transformer magnetizing characteristic. To minimize material costs, weight and size, transformers are generally operated near to the ‘knee point’ of the magnetizing characteristic. Consequently, only a small increase in core flux above normal operating levels will result in a high magnetizing current.
��������
��#��
��
�
�����������������������
Figure 7: Transformer magnetizing characteristic
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -52
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Under normal steady state conditions, the magnetizing current associated with the operating flux level is relatively small (usually less than 1% of rated current). However, if a transformer winding is energized at a voltage zero, with no remnant flux, the flux level during the first voltage cycle (2 x normal max. flux) will result in core saturation and in a high, non-sinusoidal magnetizing current waveform. This current is commonly referred to as magnetizing inrush current and may persist for several cycles. The magnitude and duration of magnetizing inrush current waveforms are dependent upon a number of factors, such as transformer design, size, system fault level, point on wave of switching, number of banked transformers, etc. Figure 8 shows typical transformer magnetizing currents for steady state and inrush conditions.
The magnetizing inrush current contains a high percentage of second harmonic. The P543 and P545 relays filter out this component of the waveform and use it as an additional bias quantity. The total bias used by the relay will therefore be a combination of the average load current on the line plus a multiple of the second harmonic component of the current. The multiplying factor is used to ensure stability and is a factory pre-set value.
Where P543 and P545 relays are used and inrush restrain function is enable, it must be ensure that this function is enabled at each end to avoid possible maloperation.
High set differential setting:
When inrush restrain is enabled, a high set differential protection becomes active. This unrestrained instantaneous ‘Id High Set ‘ is provided to ensure rapid clearance for heavy internal faults with saturated CTs. The high set is not restrained by magnetizing inrush. A setting range 4 In -32 In (RMS values) is provided on P543 and P545.
��������
$%��&
�
‘��&
%��&
�
$
�
�
����(���
�)*�»�������+� ��,�-.�
Figure 8: Magnetizing inrush waveforms
The P543 and P545 relay provides a choice between harmonic restraint and blocking by setting option, both providing stability during transformer inrush conditions.
To select second harmonic Restraint or Blocking option, set the cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading to Restraint or Blocking.Second harmonic restraints or blocking provide security during transformer energization.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 53
1.2.2.1 Second harmonic restraint (P543 and P545)
The magnetizing inrush current contains a high percentage of second harmonic. The P543 and P545 relays filter out this component of the waveform and use it as an additional bias quantity. The total bias used by the relay will therefore be a combination of the average load current on the line plus a multiple of the second harmonic component of the current. The multiplying factor which is used to ensure stability is controlled by the setting cell [3314: Ih(2) Multiplier] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading provided the setting cell [ 3312: Inrush Restraint ] is set to Restraint .
This multiplier is used in additional bias calculation as per following formula:
IF Inrush Restraint setting is set to Restraint
Additional bias = Ih(2) Multiplier * 1.414 * largest 2nd harmonic current
ELSE
Additional bias = 0
In the above equation 2nd harmonic current is derived from Fourier filtering techniques.
Where P543 and P545 relays are used and inrush restrain function is enabled, it must be ensured that this function is enabled at each end to avoid possible maloperation.
1.2.2.2 Second harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
To select second harmonic blocking option, set the cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading to Blocking.
Second harmonic blocking provides security during transformer energization.
For each phase, if the level of phase current is above 5% In, and if the ratio of second harmonic current, Ih(2) to fundamental in the line is above the settings at cell [3320: Ih(2) >%] then inrush conditions shall be detected which sets the appropriate phase block, to block local and remote ends.
Users have choice to apply Cross blocking or independent blocking by choosing the appropriate setting at cell [3321: Ih(2) CrossBlock] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading. If Ih(2) CrossBlock is set to Disabled then independent blocking is used.
If independent blocking is enabled only the affected phase is blocked at all ends.If cross blocking is enabled all phases are blocked at all ends.
The following logic diagram shows the inhibiting of the differential algorithm by magnetizing inrush conditions:
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -54
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
IA
2nd HarmonicIh(2) > Setting DDB: Ih(2) Local Blk A (1016)
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem1 Blk A
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem2 Blk A
&
IC2nd HarmonicIh(2) > Setting
IB2nd HarmonicIh(2) > Setting
Set: 2nd Harmonic
Disabled
Restraint
Blocking
&
&
DDB: Ih(2) Rem Blk A (1021)
DDB: Ih(2) Local Blk B (1017)
DDB: Ih(2) Local Blk C (1018)
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem1 Blk B
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem2 Blk B
DDB: Ih(2) Rem Blk B (1022)
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem1 Blk C
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem2 Blk C
DDB: Ih(2) Rem Blk C (1023)
Set: Cross Blocking Disabled
Enabled
1
&
Intsig: Ih(2) Local Blk A
Intsig: Ih(2) Local Blk B
Intsig: Ih(2) Local Blk C
Intsig: Ih(2) Local Cross Blk
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem1 Cross Blk
Intsig: Ih(2) Rem2 Cross Blk
1
1
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Block A
Intsig: Ih(2) Block B
Intsig: Ih(2) Block C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*Intsig received in message
Intsig sent in message
P4042ENa
Figure 9: Second harmonic restraint and blocking logic
1.2.2.3 Fifth harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
If the in-zone transformer on a protected line section is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high proportion of fifth harmonic serves as the basis of stabilization.
The P543 and P545 determine the fundamental components and the fifth harmonic components from the line currents and provide fifth harmonic blocking option when the setting cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu is set to Blocking.
For each phase, if the level of phase current is above 5% In, and if the ratio of fifth harmonic current ,Ih(5) to fundamental in the line is above the settings at cell [3328: Ih(5) >%] then the overfluxing conditions shall be detected which sets the appropriate phase block, to block local and remote ends.
Users have choice to apply Cross blocking or independent blocking by choosing the appropriate setting at cell [3329: Ih(5) CrossBlock] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading. If Ih(5) CrossBlock is set to Disabled then independent blocking is used.
If independent blocking is enabled only the affected phase is blocked at all ends.If cross blocking is enabled all phases are blocked at all ends.
The following logic diagram shows the inhibiting of the differential algorithm by overfluxing conditions:
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 55
IB
5th HarmonicIh(5) > Setting DDB: Ih(5) Local Blk A (1666)
1
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem1 Blk A
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem2 Blk A
&
IC5th Harmonic
Ih(5) > Setting
IB5th Harmonic
Ih(5) > Setting
Set: 5th Harmonic
Disabled
Blocking
&
&
DDB: Ih(5) Rem Blk A (1669)
DDB: Ih(5) Local Blk B (1667)
DDB: Ih(5) Local Blk C (1668)
1
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem1 Blk B
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem2 Blk B
DDB: Ih(5) Rem Blk B (1670)
1
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem1 Blk C
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem2 Blk C
DDB: Ih(5) Rem Blk C (1671)
Set: Cross Blocking Disabled
Enabled
1
&
Intsig: Ih(5) Local Blk A
Intsig: Ih(5) Local Blk B
Intsig: Ih(5) Local Blk C
Intsig: Ih(5) Local Cross Blk
1
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem1 Cross Blk
Intsig: Ih(5) Rem2 Cross Blk
1
1
1
Intsig: Ih(5) Block A
Intsig: Ih(5) Block B
Intsig: Ih(5) Block C
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*Intsig received in message
Intsig sent in message
Figure 10: Fifth harmonic blocking logic
1.2.2.4 High set differential (P543 and P545)
When Inrush Restraint is set to Restraint or Blocking a high set differential protection becomes active. This unrestrained instantaneous Id High Set is provided to ensure rapid clearance for heavy internal faults with saturated CTs. The high set is not restrained by magnetizing inrush. A setting range 4 In -32 In (RMS values) is provided on P543 and P545.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -56
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
LowSetIdiff >
HighSetIdiff >>
A Phase Differential Comparator
tDDB Diff Trip A (583)
Diff InterTrip A
DDB IDiff >> Start A (1438)
DDB IDiff > Start A (738)
LowSetIdiff >
HighSetIdiff >>
B Phase Differential Comparator
DDB Diff Trip B (584)
Diff InterTrip B
DDB IDiff >> Start B (1439)
DDB IDiff > Start B (739)
LowSetIdiff >
HighSetIdiff >>
C Phase Differential Comparator
DDB Diff Trip C (585)
Diff InterTrip C
DDB IDiff >> Start C (1440)
DDB IDiff > Start C (740)
DT/IDMT
1
DDB Inhibit C Diff (1145)(Remote Relay Inhibit)(From Remote relay)
DDB Inhibit C Diff (455)(Local Relay Inhibit)
&
&
&
&
&
&
1
t
DT/IDMT
1
t
DT/IDMT
1
Intsig: Ih(2) Block C
Intsig: Ih(5) Block C
Note, Intsig: Ih(2) Block x and Intsig: Ih(5) Block x are detailed in sections 5.2.1 and 5.2.2
1
1Intsig: Ih(2) Block B
Intsig: Ih(5) Block B
1Intsig: Ih(2) Block A
Intsig: Ih(5) Block A
Figure 11: Highset element logic
1.6.2 Trpping mode — selection of single or three phase tripping
This selects whether instantaneous trips are permitted as Single pole, or will always be 3 pole. Protection elements considered as “instantaneous” are those normally set to trip with no intentional time delay, i.e.: Differential, directional earth/ground DEF aided scheme and if fitted, Zone 1 distance and distance channel aided scheme. The selection 1 and 3 pole allows single pole tripping for single phase to ground faults. The selection 3 pole converts all trip outputs to close Trip A, Trip B and Trip C contacts simultaneously, for three pole tripping applications.
In the case of the P544/P546, the tripping mode can be set independently for the two circuit breakers controlled.
Logic is provided to convert any double phase fault, or any evolving fault during a single pole auto-reclose cycle into a three phase trip. Two phase tripping is never permitted. This functionality is shown in Figure12 for P543/P545 and in AR Figure 63 (logic diagram supplement) for P544/P546 models.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 57
�� ���� ������ � �����
�� ���� ������ � �����
�� ���� ������ � �����
�� ���� ������ � �����
�� ���� ������ ��� ��� �
�� !»�#$ ��»%$ ���� �����
�� ���� ������ � �����
�� ��� !�%� ���&�
� � �’� ��
!�%� ���(�
�� ��) ���� �����
*+�
�� �»%$,$, �
�& ��
�� �»%$,$, �
�& ��
�� �»%$,$, �
�& ��
�� ���� ��� �����
�
�
�
�
—
—
—
�- �
�
�
� �� ���� ������ � �����
—
�.$%%���/�
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
12
0
1
���&(��#
0$����3�������3 /»,$���’� �
�
��
Figure 15: Trip conversion scheme logic
1.29 Earth fault, Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection
The P54x relays include backup earth fault protection. Two elements are available; a derived earth fault element (where the residual current to operate the element is derived from the addition of the three line CT currents) and a sensitive earth fault element where low current settings are required. The sensitive earth fault element has a separate CT input and would normally be connected to a core balance CT. The derived and sensitive earth fault elements both have four stages of protection. The first two stages can be set either inverse time or definite time only. The third and fourth stages have a DT characteristic only. Each stage can be configured to be directional forward, directional reverse or non-directional.
Note: The input CT which is designed specifically to operate at low current magnitudes is common to both the Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and high impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection, so these features are treated as mutually exclusive within the relay menu.
A feature also exists whereby the protection can be enabled upon failure of the differential protection communication channel (not applicable to SEF and REF Functions). Earth fault Overcurrent IN> can be set to:
Permanently disabled
Permanently enabled
Enabled only in case of VT fuse/MCB failure
Enabled only in case of protection communication channel failure
Enabled if VT fuse/MCB or protection communication channel fail
Enabled if VT fuse/MCB and protection communication channel fail
In addition, each stage (not for SEF/REF) may be disabled by a DDB (467,468,469 and 470) Inhibit IN > x (x = 1, 2, 3 or 4).
The VTS element of the relay can be selected to either block the directional element or simply remove the directional control.
The N> and ISEF> Function Links settings have the following effect:
VTS Block — When the relevant is set to 1, operation of the Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) will block the stage if it directionalized. When set to 0 the stage will revert to non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
The inverse time characteristics available for the earth fault protection are the same as those for the phase overcurrent elements, but with the addition of an IDG curve characteristic.
Details of the IDG curve are provided below:
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -58
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
1.29.2 Restricted Earth Fault protection (REF)
The REF protection in the P54x relays is a high impedance element which shares the same CT input as the SEF protection hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
The setting options are available under the GROUP 1 SEF/REF PROT’N menu.
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 60.
�� �����/
0&
��/�
�1�
$� ��/
�1� �1�
�1�
�
��/�
0& ��2�3
���4.����/�.��»�»*.»4*�
� �
��� 5 6�7*&4&�(«���.����.�4,��8�4 ��»4..��
9�.���� 5 � ����4.�
��/�5 �4..����.��(8�.&.�(«���.��)*�*�,�.(*(���»
�1� 5 �(*(���»��8���(*�, � ��8.�&����. ���������»4..����.��(8�.&.
$� ��,��».�((�. ���»*.»4*�
$� �5���� ��:����/ �%����1�;
�
����* *(*�,�.(*(��.���/ *&*�(�(�* �»4..����� �� :. ���(��*�,;
���/ 5 $� 2 ���
��������
Figure 60: High impedance principle
If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetizing impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown in Figure 10. An additional non-linear, metrosil, may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions.
To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault, the CT’s used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4 Vs.
The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 61.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 59
10���
�
�
�
0�! �����
�������#
Figure 61: High impedance REF relay/CT connections
1.32 Undervoltage protection
Both the under and overvoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu Volt Protection. The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single phase or 3 phase) for both stages are independently settable.
Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT, DT or Disabled, within the V<1 function cell. Stage 2 is DT only and is enabled/disabled in the V<2 status cell.
Two stages are included to provide both alarm and trip stages, where required. Alternatively, different time settings may be required depending upon the severity of the voltage dip.
Outputs are available for single or three phase conditions via the V<Operate Mode cell.
When the protected feeder is de-energized, or the circuit breaker is opened, an undervoltage condition would be detected. Therefore, the V<Polehead nh cell is included for each of the two stages to block the undervoltage protection from operating for this condition. If the cell is enabled, the relevant stage will become inhibited by the inbuilt pole dead logic within the relay. This logic produces an output when it detects either an open circuit breaker via auxiliary contacts feeding the relay opto inputs or it detects a combination of both undercurrent and undervoltage on any one phase.
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/(1 — M)
Where:
K = Time multiplier setting
t = Operating time in seconds
M = Measured voltage / relay setting voltage (V< Voltage Set)
The logic diagram for the first stage undervoltage function is shown in Figure 67.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -60
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
VA
& (IDMT/DT)
1
&
&
&
1
&
&
&
DDB V>1 A/AB START (797) orDDB V>2 A/AB START (801)
DDB V>1 A/AB TRIP (692) orDDB V>2 A/AB TRIP (696)
DDB V>1 B/BC START (798) or DDB V>2 B/BC START (802)
DDB V>1 B/BC TRIP (693) or DDB V>2 B/BC TRIP (697)
DDB V>1 C/CA START (799) or DDB V>2 C/CA START (803)
DDB V>1 C/CA TRIP (694) or DDB V>2 C/CA TRIP (698)
DDB V>1 START (796) or DDB V>2 START (800)
DDB V>1 TRIP (691) or DDB V>2 TRIP (695)
SET : V> Operate
Mode
V>1 & V>2 Any Ph
V>1 & V>2 3Phase
V>1AnyPh V>2 3Ph
V>1 3Ph V>2AnyPh
Overvoltage Timer Block
(Single Stage)
VAB
VB
VBC
VC
VCA
SET : V> Measurement
Mode
V>1 & V>2 Ph-Ph
V>1 & V>2 Ph-N
V>1Ph-Ph V>2Ph-N
V>1Ph-N V>2Ph-Ph
V> Voltage Set
V> Voltage Set
V> Voltage Set& (IDMT/DT)
& (IDMT/DT)
1
1
This logic represents Stage 1 only. Stage 2 DDB’s are shown for reference
only. To convert to stage 2, also need to change the connections for V> Operate
Mode to look at stage 2 settings.
1
1
P1637ENg
Figure 67: Undervoltage — single and three phase tripping mode (single stage)
Note: Undervoltage protection is phase segregated, but the operation of any phase is mapped to 3 phase tripping in the default PSL.
Each stage of Undervoltage protection may be disabled by a DDB (471 or 472) Inhibit Vx<.
1.33 Overvoltage protection
Both the over and undervoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu Volt Protection. The measuring mode (ph-N or ph-ph) and operating mode (single phase or 3 phase) for both stages are independently settable.
The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following formula:
t = K/(M — 1)
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 61
Where:
K = Time multiplier setting
t = Operating time in seconds
M = Measured voltage/relay setting voltage (V> Voltage Set)
The logic diagram for the first stage overvoltage function is shown in Figure 68.
Figure 68: Overvoltage — single and three phase tripping mode (single stage)
Note: Phase overvoltage protection is phase segregated, but the operation of any phase is mapped to 3 phase tripping in the default PSL.
Each stage of Overvoltage protection may be disabled by a DDB (473 or 474) Inhibit Vx> (x = 1, 2).
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -62
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
1.35.1 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required. This covers the following situations:
Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault current, the initiating protection element may reset. Therefore, reset of the element may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of undercurrent elements (I<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example:
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage derives measurements from a line connected voltage transformer. Here, I< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating protection element might be a more reliable method.
Similarly, where the distance scheme includes Weak Infeed (“WI”) trip logic, the reset of the WI trip condition should be used in addition to the undercurrent check. Set: ‘WI Prot Reset’ = Enabled.
Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage transformer. Again using I< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded. Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay’s pole dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are summarized in the following table.
Initiation (menu selectable) CB fail timer reset mechanism
Current based protection
(e.g. 50/51/46/21/67)
The resetting mechanism is fixed [A< operates] & [B< operates] & [C< operates] & [N< operates]
Non-current based protection (e.g. 27/59)
Three options are available. The user can Select from the following options: [All < and N< elements operate] [Protection element reset] AND [All < and N< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All I< and N< elements operate]
External protection
Three options are available: The user can select any or all of the options. [All < and N< elements operate] [External trip reset] AND [All < and N< elements operate] CB open (all 3 poles) AND [All < and N< elements operate]
The complete breaker fail logic is illustrated in Figure 70, Figure 71 and Figure 72.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 63
���0�4 ����$�� ��»� 0�! ����
���0�4 �0�! 5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
� �7�% ����� ��� �&���-
—
—
—
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
�%�/ ��$8$�!�%
� �7�% ����� ��� �&���
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
-�
�
��
—
�-
�
�
�
-�0
2
�
�
�
� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
� �:�$��% ���� � ���(�
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� �»%$ $, � �& ��0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� �»%$ $, � �& ��0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
02
�
� �:�$��% ���� � ���(�
� �»%$ $, � �& ��0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
� �:�$��% ������� �����
� �%% �»%$� $, �& ��
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
0��� �� !�% � ��/$� ; 0�� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
����&��8
1
1
1
1
1
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
02
0$����3<«%� ��»� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
1
��) =»%�3$ ����
� �%% �»%$� $, �& ��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
0
12
02
02
1
1
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���&�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���&�
�� ��,� >� ���� � ��� �
� ��,� >� ���� � ��� �
�� ��,� >� ������� �����
� ��,� >� ������� �����
>� ��»� 1$�$� + ��9%$
—
—
—
—
Figure 70: CB failure for P543 and P545 models
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -64
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
���0�4 ����$�� ��»� 0�! ����
���0�4 �0�! 5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
� ��� !�% ����� �&���-
—
—
—
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
�%�/ ��$8$�!�%
� ��� !�% ����� �&���
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
-�
�
��
—
�-
�
�
�
-�
0
12
02
02
02
�
�
�
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � ���(�
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
02
�
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � ���(�
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
� ��� �:�$��% ������� �����
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
0��� �� !�% � ��/$� ; 0�� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
����&���
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
02
0$����3<«%� ��»� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
1
��) =»%�3$ ����
�
� ��� ��$� ��� � ���
� ��,� >� ������� �����
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
-� ��,� >� ������� �����
—
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���&�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���&� —
�� ��,� >� ���� � ��� �
� ��,� >� ���� � ��� � —
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
>� ��»� 1$�$� + ��9%$
Figure 71: CB1 failure logic for P544 and P546 models
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 65
���0�4 ����$�� ��»� 0�! ����
���0�4 �0�! 5 !�� 6�,$�#���$��
� ��� !�% ����� �&���-
—
—
—
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
�%�/ ��$8$�!�%
� ��� !�% ����� �&�(�
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
-�
�
��
—
�-
�
�
�
-�
0
12
02
02
02
�
�
�
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � ��� �
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
���0�4 ��5 !�� 6�,$�#���$�� ���
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
���0�4 ��) ���� ���$ �
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � ��� �
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
02
�
� ��� �:�$��% ���� � �����
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
02
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
� ��� �:�$��% ������� ���&�
� ��� ��$� � �� � ���
0��� �� !�% � ��/$�
0$����3�:� ��� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
0��� �� !�% � ��/$� ; 0�� �� !�% � ��/$�
�
�
�
����&���
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0����� !�% � 0����
��9%$
��9%$
02
0$����3<«%� ��»� 1$�$�� �5 ��%)� �� ��$� — �5� ��»� 1$�$� — �5
1
��) =»%�3$ ����
�
� ��� ��$� ��� � ���
� ��,� >� ������� �����
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���(�
-� ��,� >� ������� �����
—
�� ��,� >� ���� � ���&�
� ��,� >� ���� � ���&� —
�� ��,� >� ���� � ��� �
� ��,� >� ���� � ��� � —
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
>� ��»� 1$�$� + ��9%$
Figure 72: CB2 failure logic for P544 and P546 models
2.1.6 Switched communication networks
The P54x relays make use of digital communication signaling channels for the differential protection. For correct operation of this protection element, it is essential that the integrity of this link is continuously checked. For P54x relays, when GPS is not used it is also a requirement of this link that ‘go’ (tp1) and ‘return’ (tp2) times are similar (a difference of up to 1 ms can be tolerated). Times greater than this can result in relay instability.
Where switched communications networks are used, it is possible that during switching, a transient time period may exist with different ‘go’ and ‘return’ times. All P54x relays include a facility to ensure protection stability during this transient period.
One of the checks performed on the communications link is a check on the calculated propagation delay for each data message. During normal operation the difference in calculated time should be minimal (possible delays being introduced by multiplexers or other intermediary communication equipment). If successive calculated propagation delay times exceed a user settable value (250 – 1000 s). The P54x raise a comm delay alarm and initiate a change in relay setting for a short time period (Char Mod Time setting) to overcome any switching delay. This change in setting is shown in Figure 79 whereby the relay bias setting, k1, is increased to 200%. This characteristic provides stability for all load conditions and will still allow tripping for most internal fault conditions.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -66
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Figure 73 shows a possible scenario for a switched network. Initially the P54x relays are communicating via path 1. The go and return times for this path are 2 ms and hence the calculated propagation delay is (2 + 2)/2 = 2 ms. When the channel is switched to path 2, a small time period exists where the P54x’s could be sending messages via path 1 and returning via path 2.
The calculated propagation delay will now be (2 + 5)/2 = 3.5 ms. The resultant 1.5 ms error at each line end may cause the relay to maloperate due to incorrect time alignment of current vectors (see section 1.1.1.1). After a short delay, both ‘go’ and ‘return’ paths will follow route 2 and the calculated propagation delay will be (5 + 5)/2 = 5 ms. The relay will now be stable, as correct current vector time alignment exists at each line end.
The Char Mod timer is started when a change in propagation delay is detected. Any subsequent change during this period will cause the timer to restart. In the above example the timer will start for the first change (2 to 3.5 ms). The second change (3.5 ms to 5 ms) will cause the timer to restart, therefore allowing for multiple switching between communication paths.
A change in propagation delay may result in a temporary failure of the protection communications channel. If this occurs, the propagation delay change may not be detected by the relay. To overcome this problem, the Char Mod Timer is re-started when the channel recovers from a protection communications channel failure if the Char Mod Timer was running when the channel failure occurred.
When Char Mod Ex is enabled and if the Char Mod Time has started then the Char Mod Ex Timer runs. If at the end of this timer and until Char Mod Time has expired, the bias current is above 5% In, and differential current is below 10% of bias current on all phases, then the Char Mod Time will reset and the characteristic will return to normal. If these conditions are not met, then the characteristic remains increased for the duration of the Char Mod Time. Char Mod Ex Timer should be set greater than the minimum switching delay expected, and less than Char Mod Time.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 67
��((*� �. ���&� ��.��*��
<����/.��(*����*&��.*�����=:���.�6��/*&;
/*&
�� «4 ���.���,��*�� �����
�&(
�>�&(
�&(
��&&4�*»‘��*��
?4*�&��
��&&4�*»‘��*��
?4*�&��������
@,�@�5��&(
@.�4.�@�5��&(
������
@,�@�5��&(
@.�4.�@�5��&(
��������
Figure 78: Switched communication network
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -68
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Figure 79: Transient bias characteristic
2.1.13 Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than 1.2 km
When communicating via a pair of unconditioned pilots for distances greater than 1.2 km, a leased line or baseband modem can be used. For maximum security and performance it is strongly recommended that a screened twisted pair of 0.5 mm (or greater) conductors are used. When choosing between leased line or baseband modems the following aspects should be considered:
Leased line modems have a maximum transmission speed of 19.2 kbit/sec., whereas baseband modems can transmit at 64 kbit/sec.
Baseband modems have longer re-training times, typically between 10 to 60 s. If the connection between is temporarily lost, the protection communications will be interrupted until the re-training period has elapsed.
Since baseband modems use synchronous communication protocols, there is typically a 20% performance gain over leased line modems that use asynchronous protocols.
Modems tested:
Keymile LineRunner DTM modem with G703 interface.
Type Max distance (km) Recommended data
rate (kbit/sec) Typical re-train time
(seconds)
“Campus” 1092A (Obsolete)
17.2 64 10
LineRunner DTM 19.8 64 44
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 69
2.2 InterMiCOM
2.2.1 Protection signaling
In order to achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere within a high voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection relays are connected. Two distinct types of protection signaling can be identified:
Unit protection schemes:
In these schemes the signaling channel is used to convey analog data representative of the power system between relays. Typically current magnitude and/or phase information is communicated between line ends to enable a unit protection scheme to be implemented. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM or InterMiCOM64. Instead, the MiCOM P52x and P54x range of current differential and phase comparison relays are available for unit applications.
Teleprotection — channel aided schemes:
In channel-aided schemes the signaling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF commands from a local protection device to a remote device to provide some additional information to be used in the protection scheme operation. The commands can be used to accelerate in-zone fault clearance and/or prevent out-of-zone tripping.
The InterMiCOM application is an effective replacement to the traditional hardwired logic and communication schemes used by protection relays for such teleprotection signaling.
The MiCOM Px4x series products have a grouping of internal digital signals known as the digital data bus, DDB, that are used to implement the protection scheme logic. A number of these DDB signals are reserved as inputs and outputs for the InterMiCOM application. These are mapped using the programmable scheme logic (PSL) support tool. The InterMiCOM application provides a means of transferring the status of these mapped DDB signals between the protection relays using dedicated full-duplex communications channels.
2.2.2 InterMiCOM variants
There are 2 different types of integrated InterMiCOM teleprotection available in the MiCOM P54x relays:
An optical fiber implementation, InterMiCOM64 — designed, primarily, to work over fiber optic and multiplexed digital communications channels with data rates of 56/64 kbit/s. A total of sixteen InterMiCOM64 commands (16 inputs and 16 outputs) are available in the P54x. These are arranged as two groups of 8 bits each, and are referred to as Channel 1 and Channel 2. Three InterMiCOM64 scheme arrangements are possible:
Two-terminal with a single communications link
Two-terminal with a dual redundant communications link (sometimes referred to as hot standby)
Three terminal (or triangulated) scheme
An electrical implementation of InterMiCOM, realised over an EIA(RS)232 medium typically for MODEM applications and referred to as MODEM InterMiCOM for ease of differentiation with InterMiCOM64. MODEM InterMiCOM supports two-terminal applications with a single communications channel. Eight MODEM InterMiCOM commands can be transmitted between the line ends.
Provided the correct hardware options have been specified, it is possible to configure the P54x to operate using either InterMiCOM64 or MODEM InterMiCOM or both. The selection is made under the CONFIGURATION column of the menu software.
2.2.3 InterMiCOM features
The different requirements of applications that use teleprotection signaling for direct acting, permissive, or blocking schemes are all catered for by InterMiCOM.
Communications are supervised and alarms and signal defaults can be defined to give controlled actions in the event of communications signals being distorted or unavailable.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -70
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Communications statistics and loopback features are available to help with commissioning and testing purposes.
Both, InterMiCOM64 and MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection provide the ideal means to configure the schemes in the MiCOMho P443/P446 relay. The selection between the two will generally depend on communications media availability, system configuration, distances, cost issues and utility practice.
2.2.4 Definition of teleprotection commands
Three generic types of teleprotection command can be defined. These are Intertripping, Permissive signaling, and Blocking. All teleprotection signals are initiated in a transmitting relay but, according to the application, the receiving relay may condition the signal according to the scheme requirements:
Intertripping In intertripping (also called direct or transfer tripping) applications, the command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection relay and its receipt causes direct circuit breaker operation. Since no checking of the received signal by another protection element is performed, it is essential that any noise on the signaling channel is not interpreted as being a valid signal when the command isn’t being transmitted. For an intertripping scheme, therefore, the primary requirement of the signaling channel is security.
Permissive In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. Since the receiver applies a second independent check before tripping, the signaling channel for a permissive scheme does not have to be quite as secure as for an intertripping scheme, but it may need to be faster.
Blocking In blocking applications, tripping occurs when a protection element picks up in a receiving relay whilst no signal is received from a remote relay. In such schemes, when the command is received, the protection element is blocked even if a protection element picks up. Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is a requirement that the signal should be available whenever possible, and that it should be received as quickly as possible. The requirements of a blocking channel are, therefore, to be fast and to be dependable.
The requirements for the three channel types are represented pictorially in Figure 81.
�������� �� ��!������
� ��!
«#
$�����
�»#��
%��%
������&�������
��� ����’�
(«�)���
���*+���
Figure 81: Pictorial comparison of operating modes
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 71
This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure; and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability.
In MODEM InterMiCOM applications, selected signaling bits within each message can be conditioned to provide optimal characteristics for each type of the three teleprotection command types.
In InterMiCOM64 applications, the framing and error checking of a single command message is sufficient to meet the security of a permissive application, whilst the speed is sufficiently fast to meet the needs of a blocking scheme. Accordingly in InterMiCOM64 applications, there is no differentiation between blocking commands or permissive commands, so that only signals being used for direct intertripping with higher security requirements need to be differentiated from those in permissive (or blocking) schemes.
2.3 MODEM InterMiCOM, EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM or Copper InterMiCOM
2.3.1 Communications media
MODEM InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to eight commands over one communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most signaling channels are now digital schemes utilizing multiplexed communications links and for this reason, MODEM InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using digital signaling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable devices to a range of different communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232 output may alternatively be connected to MODEMs for use over analogue links.
Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements of teleprotection commands are described by an international standard, IEC60834-1:1999, and MODEM InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this standard. This standard describes the speed requirements of the commands as well as the security (defined in terms of probability of unwanted commands being received) and dependability (defined in terms of the probability of missing commands).
2.3.2 General features and implementation
InterMiCOM provides eight commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the IM# Cmd Type cell. Blocking mode provides the fastest signaling speed (available on commands 1 — 4), Direct Intertrip mode provides the most secure signaling (available on commands 1 — and Permissive mode provides secure, dependable signaling (available on commands 5 — 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay.
Since many applications involve commands being sent over a multiplexed communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is used. The relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses that correspond with each other in the Source Address and Receive Address cells. For example, at the local end relay, if the Source Address is set to 1, the Receive Address at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a Source Address set to 2, the Receive Address at the local end must also be set to 2. The two pairs of addresses should be set to be different in any scheme to avoid the possibility of incorrect operation during inadvertent loopback connections, and any schemes sharing the same communications services should be set to have different address pairs in order to avoid any problems caused by inadvertent cross-channel connections.
Noise on the communications should not be interpreted as valid commands by the relay. For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described above, basic signal format checking and an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) according to the security requirements of the commands. The CRC calculation is performed at both the sending and receiving end relays for each message and both must match in order to assure the security of the Direct Intertrip commands.
An alarm is provided if noise on the communications channel becomes excessive.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -72
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
During periods of excessive noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message structure will be lost and accurate decoding of the messages may not be possible. Predictable operation of InterMiCOM is assured during such noisy periods by means of the IM# FallBackMode cell. The status of the last received valid command can be maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the IM# FallBackMode cell to Latched. Alternatively, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by setting the IM# FallBackMode cell to Default. In this latter case, the time period between communication disruption and the default state being restored will need to be set in the IM# FrameSynTim cell and the default value will need to be set in IM# DefaultValue cell. Upon subsequent receipt of a valid message, all the timer periods will be reset and the new valid command states will be used.
If there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line.
2.3.3 EIA(RS)232 physical connections
MODEM InterMiCOM on the Px4x relays is implemented using a 9-pin D type female connector (labeled SK5) located at the bottom of the Second Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below:
Pin Acronym InterMiCOM Usage
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4
2 RxD Receive Data
3 TxD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel
5 GND Signal Ground
6 Not used —
7 RTS Ready To Send is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel
8 Not used —
9 Not used —
Dependant upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described as follows:
2.3.4 Direct connection
EIA(RS)232 is only suitable for short transmission distances due to the signaling levels used and the connection shown below is limited to less than 15 m. This limit may be overcome by introducing suitable signal converters as described in the following sections:
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 73
���������� �������� ���
���������
���������
���������� �������� ���
������������ !�
��»
������������ !�
��»
#####
#
#####
#
�����$!
Figure 82: Direct connection within the local substation
The connection configuration shown in Figure 82 should also be used when connecting to equipment that does not implement control the DCD line.
2.3.5 EIA(RS)232 modem connection
To achieve longer distance communication, modems may be used, in which the case the following connections should be made.
���������� �������� ���
���������
���������
���������� �������� ���
������������ !�
��»
������������ !�
��»
#####
#
#####
#
�����$!
���������
!�
���������
!�
�%&&’� (� %�!���%�)
Figure 83: InterMiCOM teleprotection via a MODEM link
This type of connection should be used when connecting to multiplexers which provide an EIA(RS)232 channel with the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should not exceed 15 m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected.
2.3.6 RS422 connection
An RS232 to RS422 converter such as CK212 may be employed to enable MODEM InterMiCOM to be applied if 4-wire pilots are available for signaling as shown in the example below.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -74
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Figure 84: MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection via a RS422 protocol
Using an appropriate converter, pilots of up to 1.2km in length can be used, depending on the converter performance.
In this case, the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the converter should not exceed 15 m.
2.3.7 Fiber optic connection
Although InterMiCOM64 is the recommended variant of InterMiCOM for use with optical fiber connections, MODEM InterMiCOM may also be applied over optical fibers by means of EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic converters. In this the case the following connections should be made:
Figure 85: MODEM InterMiCOM teleprotection via fiber optic
The overall fiber length that can be achieved depends on the converter performance.
In this case, the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the converter should not exceed 15 m.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 75
2.3.8 InterMiCOM functional assignment
The settings to control the mode of the intertrip signals are made using the relay’s menu software. In addition to this, it is necessary to assign InterMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) editor. Two icons are provided on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 (S1 Studio) for Integral tripping In and Integral tripping out which can be used to assign the eight intertripping commands. The example shown in figure 48 shows a Control Input_1 connected to the Intertrip O/P1 signal which would then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the Intertrip I/P1 signal would then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1 is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact, R1.
Figure 86: Example assignment of signals within the PSL
Note: When an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands initiated at the remote end and received locally, and vice-versa. InterMiCOM can, therefore, be described as a duplex teleprotection system.
2.3.9 InterMiCOM statistics and diagnostics
MODEM InterMiCOM channel statistics and diagnostics are available via the menu software. These can be hidden, according to preference, by setting the Ch Statistics and/or Ch Diagnostics cells to Invisible. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection by means of the Reset Statistics cell.
3.8 Read Only mode
With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become a pressing issue. The Px40 relay provides a facility to allow the user to enable or disable the change in configuration remotely. This feature is available only in relays with Courier, Courier with IEC 60870-5-103 and Courier with IEC 61850 protocol options. It has to be noted that in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, Read Only Mode function is different from the existing Command block feature.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -76
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
3.8.1 Protocol/port implementation:
3.8.1.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol on rear port 1:
The protocol does not support settings but the indications, measurands and disturbance records commands are available at the interface.
Allowed:
Poll Class 1 (read spontaneous events)
Poll Class 2 (read measurands)
GI sequence (ASDU7 ‘Start GI’, Poll Class 1)
Transmission of Disturbance Records sequence (ASDU24, ASDU25, Poll Class 1)
Time Synchronization (ASDU6)
General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
INF23 activate characteristic 1
INF24 activate characteristic 2
INF25 activate characteristic 3
INF26 activate characteristic 4
Blocked:
Write parameter (=change setting) (private ASDUs)
General Commands (ASDU20), namely:
INF16 auto-recloser on/off
INF19 LED reset
Private INFs (e.g. CB open/close, control inputs)
3.8.1.2 Courier protocol on rear port 1/2 and Ethernet
Allowed:
Read settings, statuses, measurands
Read records (event, fault, disturbance)
Time Synchronization
Change active setting group
Blocked:
Write settings
All controls, including:
Reset Indication (Trip LED)
Operate control inputs
CB operations
Auto-reclose operations
Reset demands
Clear event/fault/maintenance/disturbance records
Test LEDs & contacts
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 77
3.8.1.3 IEC 61850
Allowed:
Read statuses, measurands
Generate reports
Extract disturbance records
Time synchronization
Change active setting group
Blocked:
All controls, including:
Enable/disable protection
Operate control inputs
CB operations (Close/Trip, Lock)
Reset LEDs
3.8.2 Courier database support
Three new settings, one for each remote communications port at the back of the relay are created to support the enabling and disabling of the Read Only mode at each port.
The NIC Read Only setting will apply to all the communications protocols (including the Tunnelled Courier) that are transmitted via the Ethernet Port. Their default values are Disabled.
The DNP3 communication interface that do not support the feature will ignore these settings.
3.8.3 New DDB signals
The remote Read Only mode is also available in the PSL via three dedicated DDB signals:
RP1 Read Only
RP2 Read Only
NIC Read Only
Through careful scheme logic design, the activations of these Read Only signals can be facilitated via Opto Inputs, Control Inputs and Function Keys.
These DDBs are available in every build, however they are effective only in Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 build and in latest IEC 61850 (firmware version 57 onwards). The setting cells are not available in DNP3.0.
APPLICATION NOTES (P54x/EN AP/La4)
2.1.4 Transformers in zone applications (P543 and P545 models) In applying the well established principles of differential protection to transformers, a variety of considerations have to be taken into account. These include compensation for any phase shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either side of windings, and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In addition to these factors, which can be compensated for by correct application of the relay, the effects of normal system conditions on relay operation must also be considered. The differential element must restrain for system conditions which could result in maloperation of the relay, such as high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -78
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
In traditional transformer feeder differential schemes, the requirements for phase and ratio correction were met by correct selection of line current transformers. In the P543 and P545, software interposing CTs (ICTs) are provided which can give the required compensation. The advantage of having replica interposing CTs is that it gives the P54x relays the flexibility to cater for line CTs connected in either star or delta, as well as being able to compensate for a variety of system earthing arrangements. The P543 and P545 relays also include a magnetizing inrush restraint and blocking facility.
Note: The P544 and P546 relays do not include any of the above features, except CT ratio mismatch compensation, and as such would not be suitable for the protection of in-zone transformer feeders.
2.1.4.1 Magnetizing inrush stabilization (P543 and P545)
When a transformer is first energized, a transient magnetizing current flows, which may reach instantaneous peaks of 8 to 30 times the full load current. The factors controlling the duration and magnitude of the magnetizing inrush are:
Size of the transformer bank
Size of the power system
Resistance in the power system from the source to the transformer bank
Residual flux level
Type of iron used for the core and its saturation level.
There are three conditions which can produce a magnetizing inrush effect:
First energization
Voltage recovery following external fault clearance
Sympathetic inrush due to a parallel transformer being energized.
Figure 1 shows under normal steady state conditions the flux in the core changes from maximum negative value to maximum positive value during one half of the voltage cycle, which is a change of 2.0 maximum.
Figure 1: Steady state magnetizing inrush current
If the transformer is energized at a voltage zero when the flux would normally be at its maximum negative value, the flux will rise to twice its normal value over the first half cycle of voltage. To establish this flux, a high magnetizing inrush current is required. The first peak of this current can be as high as 30 times the transformer rated current. This initial rise could be further increased if there was any residual flux in the core at the moment the transformer was energized.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 79
Figure 2: Magnetizing inrush current during energization
As the flux enters the highly saturated portion of the magnetizing characteristic, the inductance falls and the current rises rapidly. Magnetizing impedance is of the order of 2000% but under heavily saturated conditions this can reduce to around 40%, which is an increase in magnetizing current of 50 times normal. This figure can represent 5 or 6 times normal full load current.
Analysis of a typical magnitude inrush current wave shows (fundamental = 100%):
Component -DC 2nd H 3rd H 4th H 5th H 6th H 7th H
55% 63% 26.8% 5.1% 4.1% 3.7% 2.4%
The offset in the wave is only restored to normal by the circuit losses. The time constant of the transient can be quite long, typically 0.1 second for a 100 KVA transformer and up to 1 second for larger units. The initial rate of decay is high due to the low value of air core reactance. When below saturation level, the rate of decay is much slower. The following graph shows the rate of decay of the DC offset in a 50 Hz or 60 Hz system in terms of amplitude reduction factor between successive peaks.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -80
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Variation of amplitude reduction factor between successive mMagnetising
inrush peaks with X/R ratio
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
X/R ratio
Am
pli
tud
e re
du
ctio
n f
acto
r (k
)
P4299ENa
Figure 3: Variation of amplitude reduction factor
The magnitude of the inrush current is limited by the air core inductance of the windings under extreme saturation conditions. A transformer with concentric windings will draw a higher magnetizing current when energized from the LV side, since this winding is usually on the inside and has a lower air core inductance. Sandwich windings have approximately equal magnitude currents for both LV and HV. Resistance in the source will reduce the magnitude current and increase the rate of decay.
The magnetizing inrush phenomenon is associated with a transformer winding which is being energized where no balancing current is present in the other winding(s). This current appears as a large operating signal for the differential protection. Therefore, special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs during inrush. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current.
The P543 and P545 relay provides a choice between harmonic restraint and blocking by setting option, both providing stability during transformer inrush conditions.
To select second harmonic Restraint or Blocking option, set the cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading to Restraint or Blocking. Second harmonic restraints or blocking provide security during transformer energization.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 81
2.1.4.2 Second harmonic restraint (P543 and P545)
The magnetizing inrush current contains a high percentage of second harmonic. The P543 and P545 relays filter out this component of the waveform and use it as an additional bias quantity. The total bias used by the relay will therefore be a combination of the average load current on the line plus a multiple of the second harmonic component of the current. The multiplying factor which is used to ensure stability is controlled by the setting cell [3314: Ih(2) Multiplier] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading provided the setting cell [ 3312: Inrush Restraint ] is set to Restraint .
This multiplier is used in additional bias calculation as per following formula:
IF Inrush Restraint setting is set to Restraint
Additional bias = Ih(2) Multiplier * 1.414 * largest 2nd harmonic current
ELSE
Additional bias = 0
In the above equation second harmonic current is derived from Fourier filtering techniques.
Where P543 and P545 relays are used and inrush restrain function is enabled, it must be ensured that this function is enabled at each end to avoid possible maloperation.
2.1.4.3 Second harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
To select second harmonic blocking option, set the cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading to Blocking.
Second harmonic blocking provides security during transformer energization.
For each phase, if the level of phase current is above 5% In, and if the ratio of second harmonic current ,Ih(2) to fundamental in the line is above the settings at cell [3320: Ih(2) >%] then inrush conditions shall be detected which sets the appropriate phase block, to block local and remote ends.
Users can choose to apply Cross blocking or independent blocking by choosing the appropriate setting at cell [3321: Ih(2) CrossBlock] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading. If Ih(2) CrossBlock is set to Disabled then independent blocking is used.
If independent blocking is enabled only the affected phase is blocked at all ends. If cross blocking is enabled all phases are blocked at all ends.
2.1.4.4 Fifth Harmonic blocking (P543 and P545)
The fifth Harmonic blocking feature is available for possible use to prevent unwanted operation of the low set differential element under transient overfluxing conditions.
When overfluxing occurs, the transformer core becomes partially saturated and the resultant magnetizing current waveforms increase in magnitude and become harmonically distorted. Such waveforms have a significant fifth harmonic content, which can be extracted and used as a means of identifying the abnormal operating condition.
The fifth harmonic blocking threshold is adjustable between 5 — 100%. The threshold should be adjusted so that blocking will be effective when the magnetizing current rises above the chosen threshold setting of the low-set differential protection.
For example, when a load is suddenly disconnected from a power transformer the voltage at the input terminals of the transformer may rise by 10-20% of the rated value. Since the voltage increases, the flux, which is the integral of the excitation voltage, also increases. As a result, the transformer steady state excitation current becomes higher. The resulting excitation current flows in one winding only and therefore appears as differential current which may rise to a value high enough to operate the differential protection. A typical differential current waveform during such a condition is shown in Figure 4. A typical setting for Ih(5)%> is 35%
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -82
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
P4353ENa
Figure 4: Typical overflux current waveform
To offer some protection against damage due to persistent overfluxing that might be caused by a geomagnetic disturbance, the fifth harmonic blocking element can be routed to an output contact using an associated timer. Operation of this element could be used to give an alarm to the network control centre. If such alarms are received from a number of transformers, they could serve as a warning of geomagnetic disturbance so that operators could take some action to safeguard the power system. Alternatively this element can be used to initiate tripping in the event of prolonged pick up of a fifth harmonic measuring element. It is not expected that this type of overfluxing condition would be detected by the AC overfluxing protection. This form of time delayed tripping should only be applied in regions where geomagnetic disturbances are a known problem and only after proper evaluation through simulation testing.
The P543 and P545 determine the fundamental components and the fifth harmonic components from the line currents and provide fifth harmonic blocking option when the setting cell [3312: Inrush Restraint] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu is set to Blocking.
For each phase, if the level of phase current is above 5% In, and if the ratio of fifth harmonic current, Ih(5) to fundamental in the line is above the settings at cell [3328: Ih(5) >%] then the overfluxing conditions shall be detected which sets the appropriate phase block, to block local and remote ends.
Users can choose to apply Cross blocking or independent blocking by choosing the appropriate setting at cell [3329: Ih(5) CrossBlock] under the GROUP 1 PHASE DIFF menu heading. If Ih(5) CrossBlock is set to Disabled then independent blocking is used.
If independent blocking is enabled only the affected phase is blocked at all ends. If cross blocking is enabled all phases are blocked at all ends.
2.1.4.7 High set differential setting (P543 and P545)
When Inrush Restraint is set to Restraint or Blocking, a high set differential protection becomes active. This is provided to ensure rapid clearance for heavy internal faults with saturated CTs. Because high set is not restrained by magnetizing inrush, hence the setting must be set such that it will not operate for the largest inrush currents expected. It is difficult to accurately predict the maximum anticipated level of inrush current. Typical waveforms peak values are of the order of 8-10x rated current. A worst case estimation of inrush could me made by dividing the transformer full load current by the per unit leakage reactance quoted by the transformer manufacturer.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 83
2.8.4 Restricted Earth Fault protection
Earth faults occurring on a transformer winding or terminal may be of limited magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the percentage of transformer winding that is involved in the fault. It is common to apply standby earth fault protection fed from a single CT in the transformer earth connection — this provides time-delayed protection for a transformer winding or terminal fault. In general, particularly as the size of the transformer increases, it becomes unacceptable to rely on time delayed protection to clear winding or terminal faults as this would lead to an increased amount of damage to the transformer. A common requirement is therefore to provide instantaneous phase and earth fault protection. Applying differential protection across the transformer may fulfill these requirements. However, an earth fault occurring on the LV winding, particularly if it is of a limited level, may not be detected by the differential relay, as it is only measuring the corresponding HV current. Therefore, instantaneous protection that is restricted to operating for transformer earth faults only is applied. This is referred to as restricted earthfault protection (REF).
When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must be employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, therefore ensuring that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding / connections.
Two methods are commonly used; bias or high impedance. The biasing technique operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the relay.
The REF protection in the P54x relays can be configured to operate as high impedance element. Following sections describe the application of the relay for high impedance element.
Note: The high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
2.8.4.1 Setting guidelines for high impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF)
From the SEF/REF options cell, Hi Z REF must be selected to enable this protection. The only setting cell then visible is REF>s, which may be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly earthed system.
The primary operating current (op) will be a function of the current transformer ratio, the relay operating current (REF>s1), the number of current transformers in parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetizing current of each current transformer (e) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in three ways:
1. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetizing current to achieve a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current:
e < 1
n x
op
CT ratio — REF > s
2. To determine the minimum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary operating current with a given current transformer magnetizing current.
[REF > s] <
op
CT ratio — ne
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -84
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
2.8.4.2 Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors
Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000 V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that can be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur.
Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf — Vk )
Vf = ‘f (Rct + 2RL + RST)
Where:Vp = Peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions
Vk = Current transformer kneepoint voltage
Vf = Maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur
‘f = Maximum internal secondary fault current
Rct = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay
RST = Relay stabilizing resistor
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000 V peak, metrosils should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating characteristics follow the expression:
V = C0.25
Where:V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (metrosil)
C = Constant of the non-linear resistor (metrosil)
I = Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (metrosil)
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52 x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows:
(rms) = 0.52
Vs (rms) x 2
C 4
Where: Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the metrosil is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (metrosil), it’s characteristic should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
3. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30 mA rms for 1 A current transformers and approximately 100 mA rms for 5 A current transformers.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 85
4. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should limit the
voltage to 1500 V rms or 2120 V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
5. Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
6. The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions:
7. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30 mA rms.
8. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500 V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT’s are as shown in the following table:
Relay voltage setting
Nominal characteristic
Recommended Metrosil type
C Single pole relay Triple pole relay
Up to 125 V rms 125 to 300 V rms
450 900 0.25 0.25600 A/S1/S256 600 A/S1/S1088
600 A/S3/1/S802 600 A/S3/1/S1195
Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for relays with a 5 amp CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:
9. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100 mA rms (the actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description.
10. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500 V rms for 0.25 secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500 V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
11. The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary
internal fault
current
Recommended Metrosil type
Relay voltage setting
Amps rms Up to 200 V rms 250 V rms 275 V rms 300 V rms
50 A 600 A/S1/S1213
C = 540/640 35 mA rms
600 A/S1/S1214 C = 670/800 40 mA rms
600 A/S1/S1214 C =670/800 50 mA rms
600 A/S1/S1223 C = 740/870* 50 mA rms
100 A 600 A/S2/P/S1217 C
= 470/540 70 mA rms
600 A/S2/P/S1215 C = 570/670 75 mA rms
600 A/S2/P/S1215 C =570/670
100 mA rms
600 A/S2/P/S1196 C =620/740*
100 mA rms
150 A 600 A/S3/P/S1219 C
= 430/500 100 mA rms
600 A/S3/P/S1220 C = 520/620
100 mA rms
600 A/S3/P/S1221C = 570/670** 100 mA
rms
600 A/S3/P/S1222C =620/740*** 100 mA rm
Note: *2400 V peak **2200 V peak ***2600 V peak
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact Alstom Grid for detailed applications.
12. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for usewith triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order these units please specify Triple pole Metrosil type, followed by the single pole type reference.
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -86
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
13. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if
required.
14. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay operating current and with a particular level of magnetizing current.
op = (CT ratio) x (REF > s + nc)
To achieve the required primary operating current with the current transformers that are used, a current setting (REF>s) must be selected for the high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the stabilizing resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting (REF>s).
Rst = Vs
REF>s =
F (RCT + 2RL)
REF > s
Note: The above formula assumes negligible relay burden.
The stabilizing resistor that can be supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum declared resistance.
2.17 Integral intertripping
The MiCOM P54x supports integral intertripping in the form of InterMiCOM. InterMiCOM can be realized using an auxiliary EIA(RS)232 connection (MODEM InterMiCOM), or it can be realised by means of an integral optical fiber communication connection (fiber InterMiCOM, or InterMiCOM64). EIA(RS)232 (MODEM) InterMiCOM provides a single, full duplex communication channel, suitable for connection between two MiCOM P54x. The fiber InterMiCOM (InterMiCOM64) can provide up to two full-duplex communications channels. It can be used to connect two MiCOM P54x using a single channel, or redundancy can be added by using dual communications. Alternatively, InterMiCOM64 can be used to connect three MiCOM P54x devices in a triangulated scheme for the protection of Teed feeders. MODEM InterMiCOM and InterMiCOM64 are completely independent. They have separate settings, are described by separate DDB signals.
As a general rule, where possible, InterMiCOM64 would be preferable from an application point of view since it is faster, and based on optical fibers it has high immunity to electro-magnetic interference. If the high speed communication channel requirement of InterMiCOM64 cannot be provided, EIA(RS)232 provides a cost effective alternative.
Because of the differences between the implementation of EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM and InterMiCOM64, the settings associated with each implementation are different. Refer to P54x/EN ST for details of all settings. There are settings to prevent inadvertent cross-connection or loopback of communications channels (address settings), settings to accommodate different channel requirements (baud rate, clock source, channel selection) as well as the different settings used for channel quality monitoring and signal management actions in the event of channel failures.
The received InterMiCOM signals are continually monitored for quality and availability. In the event of quality or availability of the received signals falling below set levels, then an alarm can be raised.
Note: An alarm indicating the signaling has failed, refers only to the incoming signals. The remote relay will monitor the other direction of the communications link for quality of transmission. If indication of the quality of the signal transmitted from the local relay for reception at the remote relay is required, then one of the InterMiCOM command channels can be used to reflect this back.
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 87
2.17.1 EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM (“Modem InterMiCOM”)
The settings necessary for the implementation of MODEM InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled INTERMICOM COMMS contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled INTERMICOM CONF selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode.
The settings required for the InterMiCOM signaling are largely dependant upon whether a direct or indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used.
Direct connections will either be short metallic or dedicated fiber optic based (by means of suitable EIA 232 to optical fiber converters) and hence can be set to have the highest signaling speed of 19200b/s. Due to this high signaling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type signals is so small that the most secure signaling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signaling requires the full checking of the message frame structure and CRC checks, it would seem prudent that the IM# Fallback Mode be set to Default with a minimal intentional delay by setting IM# FrameSyncTim to 10 msecs. In other words, whenever two consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the relay will immediately revert to the default value until a new valid message is received.
For indirect connections, the settings that can be applied will become more application and communication media dependent. As for the direct connections, consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high baud rates may suffer from data jams during periods of interference and in the event of communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods. Both of these factors will reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9.6 kbit/s. As the baud rate decreases, the communications will become more robust with fewer interruptions, but the overall signaling times will increase.
Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signaling mode becomes significant. However, once the signaling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If Blocking mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal, which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message. In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Default with a reasonably long IM# FrameSyncTim. A typical default selection of Default = 1 (blocking received substitute) would generally apply as the failsafe assignment for blocking schemes.
If Direct Intertrip mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Default with a minimum IM# FrameSyncTim setting i.e. whenever a non-valid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. A typical default selection of Default = 0 (intertrip NOT received substitute) would generally apply as the failsafe assignment for intertripping schemes.
If Permissive mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the Blocking and Direct Intertrip modes. In this case, it is possible that the IM# Fallback Mode is set to Latched. The table below highlights the recommended IM# FrameSyncTim settings for the different signaling modes and baud rates:
Baud rate Minimum recommended
“IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting Minimum setting
(ms) Maximum setting
(ms)
Direct intertrip
mode Blocking mode
600 100 250 100 1500
1200 50 130 50 1500
2400 30 70 30 1500
4800 20 40 20 1500
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -88
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
Baud rate Minimum recommended
“IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting Minimum setting
(ms) Maximum setting
(ms)
9600 10 20 10 1500
19200 10 10 10 1500
Note: No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that Latched operation will be selected. However, if Default mode is selected, the IM# FrameSyncTim setting should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the IM# FrameSyncTim setting is set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the relay will monitor a correct change in message as a corrupted message.
A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.
4.4 Read Only mode
With IEC 61850 and Ethernet/Internet communication capabilities, security has become a pressing issue. The Px40 relay provides a facility to allow the user to enable or disable the change in configuration remotely.
Read Only mode can be enabled/disabled for the following rear ports:
Rear Port 1 — IEC 60870-5-103 and Courier protocols
Rear Port 2 (if fitted) — Courier protocol
Ethernet Port (if fitted) — Courier protocol (tunnelled)
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC (P54x/EN MR/La4)
1.7 Description of logic nodes
Note: Where applicable. Not all nodes appear in every product variant.
DDB no. English text Source Description
0 Output R1 Output Conditioner Assignment of signal to drive output Relay 1
31 Output R32 Output Conditioner Assignment of signal to drive output Relay 32
32 Input L1 Opto Input From opto input 1 — when opto energized
55 Input L16 Opto Input From opto input 24 — when opto energized
63 Input L24 Opto Input From opto input 32 — when opto energized
64 to 79 Not used
80 IM Input 1 InterMiCOM InterMiCOM Input 1 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
87 IM Input 8 InterMiCOM InterMiCOM Input 8 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
88 IM Output 1 InterMiCOM InterMiCOM Output 1 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
95 IM Output 8 InterMiCOM InterMiCOM Output 8 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
96 IM64 Ch1 Input 1 IM64 IM64 Ch1 input 1 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
103 IM64 Ch1 Input 8 IM64 IM64 Ch1 input 8 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
104 IM64 Ch2 Input 1 IM64 IM64 Ch2 input 1 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
111 IM64 Ch2 Input 8 IM64 IM64 Ch2 input 8 — is driven by a message from the remote line end
112 IM64 Ch1 Output 1 PSL IM64 Ch1 output 1 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
119 IM64 Ch1 Output 8 PSL IM64 Ch1 output 8 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 89
DDB no. English text Source Description
120 IM64 Ch2 Output 1 PSL IM64 Ch2 output 1 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
127 IM64 Ch2 Output 8 PSL IM64 Ch2 output 8 — mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
128 Relay Cond 1 PSL Input to relay 1 output conditioner
159 Relay Cond 32 PSL Input to relay 32 output conditioner
160 Timer in 1 PSL Input to auxiliary timer 1
175 Timer in 16 PSL Input to auxiliary timer 16
176 Timer out 1 Auxiliary Timer Output from auxiliary timer 1
191 Timer out 16 Auxiliary Timer Output from auxiliary timer 16
192 Control Input 1 Control Input Command Control input 1 — for SCADA and menu commands into PSL
223 Control Input 32 Control Input Command Control input 32 — for SCADA and menu commands into PSL
256 Virtual Output 1 PSL Virtual output 1 — allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices
287 Virtual Output32 PSL Virtual output 32 — allows user to control a binary signal which can be mapped via SCADA protocol output to other devices
288 SG-opto Invalid Group Selection Setting group selection opto inputs have detected an invalid (disabled) settings group
289 Prot’n Disabled Commissioning Test Protection disabled — typically out of service due to test mode
290 Static Test Mode Commissioning Test
Static test mode option bypasses the delta phase selectors, power swing detection and reverts to conventional directional line and cross polarization to allow testing with test sets that can not simulate a real fault
291 Test Loopback C Diff Loopback test in service (external or internal)
292 Test IM64 C Diff Indication that relay is in test mode
293 VT Fail Alarm VT Supervision VTS indication alarm- failed VT (fuse blow) detected by VT supervision
294 CT Fail Alarm CT Supervision
CTS indication alarm (CT supervision alarm)
In the cases of two CTs:
— If standard CTS is used, this indication is ON in case of failure on any of the CTs
— If Diff CTS is used this indication is ON in case of failure on CT1
295 CT2 Fail Alarm CT Supervision
CT2S indication alarm (CT supervision alarm). This indication is ON If Diff CTS is used and there is a failure on CT2
P544 and P546 only
296 Remote CT Alarm CT Supervision CTS remote indication alarm (CT supervision alarm)
297 Power Swing Powerswing Blocking Powerswing blocking will block any distance zone selected in the setting file
298 CB Fail Alarm CB Fail Circuit breaker fail alarm
299 CB Monitor Alarm CB Monitoring This alarm indicates that DDB I ^ Maint. Alarm (1106) or DDB CB OPs Maint. (1108) or DDB CB Time Maint. (1110)
300 CB Lockout Alarm CB Monitoring This alarm indicates that DDB I ^ Lockout Alarm (1107) or DDB CB Ops Lock (1109) or DDB CB Time lockout (1111)
301 CB Status Alarm CB Status Indication of problems by circuit breaker state monitoring — example defective auxiliary contacts
302 CB Trip Fail CB Control Circuit breaker failed to trip (after a manual/operator) trip command
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -90
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
303 CB Close Fail CB Control Circuit breaker failed to close (after a manual/operator or auto-reclose close command)
304 Man CB Unhealthy CB Control
Manual circuit breaker unhealthy output signal indicating that the circuit breaker has not closed successfully after a manual close command. (A successful close also requires The circuit breaker healthy signal to reappear within the «healthy window» timeout)
305 No C/S Man Close CB Control Indicates that the check synchronism signal has failed to appear for a manual close
306 A/R Lockout Auto-reclose Indicates an auto-reclose lockout condition -no further auto-reclosures possible until resetting
307 A/R CB Unhealthy Auto-reclose
Auto-reclose circuit breaker unhealthy signal, output from auto-reclose logic. Indicates during auto-reclose in progress, if the circuit breaker has to become healthy within the circuit breaker healthy time window
308 A/R No Checksync Auto-reclose Indicates during auto-reclose in progress, if system checks have not been satisfied within the check synchronizing time window
309 System Split Check sync
System split alarm — will be raised if the system is split (remains permanently out of synchronism) for the duration of the system split timer
310 GPS Alarm C Diff Indicates that GPS is lost
311 Signaling fail C Diff
If a differential protection communication path has remained failed for a period which is longer than the “Comms Fail Timer”, this alarm is ON
312 Comm Delay Alarm C Diff If successive calculated propagation delay times exceed time delay setting “Comm Delay Tol”, this alarms is ON
313 C Diff Failure C Diff It indicates that differential protection communications are completely lost and therefore C diff does not work
314 IM64 SchemeFail It indicates that communications between relays are completely lost and therefore IM64 does not work
315 IEEE C37.94 Fail C Diff
It will appear in case of at least one of the following: CH1 (or CH2) loss of signal, CH1 (or CH2) PATH_YELLOW or CH1 (or CH2) BAD_RX_N
316 C Diff Inhibited C Diff Indicate that a differential protection has been inhibited
317 Aid 1 Chan Fail PSL Aided channel scheme 1 — channel out of service indication, indicating channel failure
318 Aid 2 Chan Fail PSL Aided channel scheme 2 — channel out of service indication, indicating channel failure
319 F out of Range Frequency Tracking Frequency out of range alarm
320 CB2 Fail Alarm CB2 Fail Circuit breaker 2 fail alarm.
P544 and P546 only
321 CB2 Monitor Alm CB2 Monitoring
This alarm indicates that DDB CB2 I ^ Maint. Alarm (1113) or DDB CB2 OPs Maint. (1115) or DDB CB2 Time Maint. (1117)
P544 and P546 only
322 CB2 Mon LO Alarm CB2 Monitoring
This alarm indicates that DDB CB2 I ^ Lockout Alarm (1114) or DDB CB Ops Lock (1116) or DDB CB Time lockout (1118)
P544 and P546 only
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 91
DDB no. English text Source Description
323 CB2 Status Alarm CB2 Status
Indication of problems by circuit breaker 2 state monitoring — example defective auxiliary contacts
P544 and P546 only
324 CB2 Trip Fail CB2 Control
Circuit breaker 2 failed to trip (after a manual/operator) trip command
P544 and P546 only
325 CB2 Close Fail CB2 Control
Circuit breaker 2 failed to close (after a manual/operator or auto-reclose close command)
P544 and P546 only
326 Man CB2 Unhealthy CB2 Control
Manual circuit breaker unhealthy output signal indicating that the circuit breaker 2 has not closed successfully after a manual close command. (A successful close also requires The circuit breaker healthy signal to reappear within the «healthy window» timeout)
P544 and P546 only
327 NoCS CB2ManClose CB2 Control
Indicates that the check synchronism signal has failed to appear for a manual close
P544 and P546 only
328 AR CB2 Lockout CB2 Auto-reclose
Indicates an auto-reclose lockout condition -no further auto-reclosures possible until resetting
P544 and P546 only
329 AR CB2 Unhealthy CB2 Auto-reclose
Auto-reclose circuit breaker unhealthy signal, output from auto-reclose logic. Indicates during auto-reclose in progress, if the circuit breaker has to become healthy within the circuit breaker healthy time window
P544 and P546 only
330 AR CB2 No C/S CB2 Auto-reclose
Indicates during auto-reclose in progress, if system checks have not been satisfied within the check synchronizing time window
P544 and P546 only
331 Invalid AR Mode Auto-reclose
AR Mode selected via optos is not supported
P544 and P546 only
332 to 333 Not used
334 Main Prot. Fail Co-processor Interface Indicates a failure in differential or distance or DEF
335 Config Error C Diff
In three ended schemes on power up, the relays check to see if one of them should be configured out. Under some circumstances it is possible for them to fail to resolve this in which case they produce the DDB_CONFIGURATION_ERROR alarm
336 Re-Config Error C Diff Indicates that RESTORE or RECONFIGURE or CONFIGURE operations have failed
335 to 336 Not used
337 Comms Changed C Diff This is an alarm which indicates that C3794 comms have been changed to standard or vice versa and relay must be rebooted
338 to 343 Not used
344 SR User Alarm 1 PSL Triggers user alarm 1 message to be alarmed on LCD display (self-resetting)
347 SR User Alarm 4 PSL Triggers user alarm 4 message to be alarmed on LCD display (self-resetting)
348 MR User Alarm 5 PSL Triggers user alarm 5 message to be alarmed on LCD display (manual-resetting)
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -92
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
351 MR User Alarm 8 PSL Triggers user alarm 8 message to be alarmed on LCD display (manual-resetting)
352 Battery Fail Self Monitoring Front panel miniature battery failure — either battery removed from slot, or low voltage
353 Field Volts Fail Self Monitoring 48 V field voltage failure
354 Rear Comm 2 Fail Self Monitoring Comm2 hardware failure — second rear communications board
355 GOOSE IED Absent The IED is not subscribed to a publishing IED in the current scheme
356 NIC Not Fitted Ethernet board not fitted
357 NIC No Response Ethernet board not responding
358 NIC Fatal Error Ethernet board unrecoverable error
359 NIC Soft. Reload Ethernet problem
360 Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Ethernet problem
361 Bad OSI Config. Ethernet problem
362 NIC Link Fail Ethernet link lost
363 NIC SW Mis-Match Ethernet board software not compatible with main CPU
364 IP Addr Conflict The IP address of the IED is already used by another IED
365 IM Loopback InterMiCOM EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM indication that Loopback testing is in progress
366 IM Message Fail InterMiCOM
EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Message Failure alarm. Setting that is used to alarm for poor channel quality. If during the fixed 1.6 s rolling window the ratio of invalid messages to the total number of messages that should be received (based upon the ‘Baud Rate’ setting) exceeds the above threshold, a ‘Message Fail’ alarm will be issued
367 IM Data CD Fail InterMiCOM EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Data Channel Detect Fail i.e. modem failure
368 IM Channel Fail InterMiCOM EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM Channel Failure alarm. No messages were received during the alarm time setting
365 to 368 Not used
369 Backup setting Self Monitoring
This is an alarm that is ON if any setting fail during the setting changing process. If this happens, the relay will use the last known good setting
370 to 383 Not used
384 Block Zone 1 Gnd PSL Zone 1 ground basic scheme blocking
385 Block Zone 1 Phs PSL Zone 1 phase basic scheme blocking
386 Block Zone 2 Gnd PSL Zone 2 ground basic scheme blocking
387 Block Zone 2 Phs PSL Zone 2 phase basic scheme blocking
388 Block Zone 3 Gnd PSL Zone 3 ground basic scheme blocking
389 Block Zone 3 Phs PSL Zone 3 phase basic scheme blocking
390 Block Zone P Gnd PSL Zone P ground basic scheme blocking
391 Block Zone P Phs PSL Zone P phase basic scheme blocking
392 Block Zone 4 Gnd PSL Zone 4 ground basic scheme blocking
393 Block Zone 4 Phs PSL Zone 4 phase basic scheme blocking
394 Aid1 InhibitDist PSL Block distance aided scheme 1 tripping
395 Aid1 Inhibit DEF PSL Block DEF aided scheme 1 tripping
396 Aid1 Inhibit DIR PSL Block Delta directional aided scheme 1 tripping
397 Aid2 InhibitDist PSL Block distance aided scheme 2 tripping
398 Aid2 Inhibit DEF PSL Block DEF aided scheme 2 tripping
399 Aid2 Inhibit DIR PSL Block Delta directional aided scheme 2 tripping
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 93
DDB no. English text Source Description
400 Time Synch PSL Time synchronism by opto pulse
401 I>1 Timer Block PSL Block phase overcurrent stage 1 time delayed tripped trip
402 I>2 Timer Block PSL Block phase overcurrent stage 2 time delayed tripped trip
403 I>3 Timer Block PSL Block phase overcurrent stage 3 time delayed trip
404 I>4 Timer Block PSL Block phase overcurrent stage 4 time delayed trip
405 IN>1 Timer Block PSL Block standby earth fault stage 1 time delayed trip
406 IN>2 Timer Block PSL Block standby earth fault stage 2 time delayed trip
407 IN>3 Timer Block PSL Block standby earth fault stage 3 time delayed trip
408 IN>4 Timer Block PSL Block standby earth fault stage 4 time delayed trip
409 ISEF>1 Timer Blk PSL Block sensitive earth fault stage 1 time delayed trip
410 ISEF>2 Timer Blk PSL Block sensitive earth fault stage 2 time delayed trip
411 ISEF>3 Timer Blk PSL Block sensitive earth fault stage 3 time delayed trip
412 ISEF>4 Timer Blk PSL Block sensitive earth fault stage 4 time delayed trip
413 Not used
414 V<1 Timer Block PSL Block phase undervoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
415 V<2 Timer Block PSL Block phase undervoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
416 V>1 Timer Block PSL Block phase overvoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
417 V>2 Timer Block PSL Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
418 VN>1 Timer Block PSL Block residual overvoltage stage 1 time delayed trip
419 VN>2 Timer Block PSL Block residual overvoltage stage 2 time delayed trip
420 CB1 Aux 3ph(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB closed) CB auxiliary input (3 phase)
421 CB1 Aux A(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB A phase closed) CB auxiliary
422 CB1 Aux B(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB B phase closed) CB auxiliary
423 CB1 Aux C(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB C phase closed) CB auxiliary
424 CB1 Aux 3ph(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB open) CB auxiliary input (3 phase)
425 CB1 Aux A(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB A phase open) CB auxiliary input
426 CB1 Aux B(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB B phase open) CB auxiliary input
427 CB1 Aux C(52-B) PSL 52-B (CB C phase open) CB auxiliary input
428 CB2 Aux 3ph(52-A) PSL
52-A (CB2 closed) CB2 auxiliary input (3 phase)
P544 and P546 only
429 CB2 Aux A(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 A phase closed) CB2 auxiliary
P544 and P546 only
430 CB2 Aux B(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 B phase closed) CB2 auxiliary
P544 and P546 only
431 CB2 Aux C(52-A) PSL 52-A (CB2 C phase closed)CB2 auxiliary
P544 and P546 only
432 CB2 Aux 3ph(52-B) PSL
52-B (CB2 open) CB2 auxiliary input (3 phase)
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -94
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
433 CB2 Aux A(52-B) PSL
52-B (CB2 A phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
P544 and P546 only
434 CB2 Aux B(52-B) PSL
52-B (CB2 B phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
P544 and P546 only
435 CB2 Aux C(52-B) PSL
52-B (CB2 C phase open) CB2 auxiliary input
P544 and P546 only
436 CB Healthy PSL Circuit breaker healthy (input to auto-recloser — that the CB1 has enough energy to allow re-closing)
437 CB2 Healthy PSL
Circuit breaker healthy (input to auto-recloser — that the CB2 has enough energy to allow re-closing)
P544 and P546 only
438 MCB/VTS PSL VT supervision input — signal from external miniature circuit breaker showing MCB tripped
439 Trip CB PSL Initiate tripping of circuit breaker from a manual command
440 Close CB PSL Initiate closing of circuit breaker from a manual command
441 Init Trip CB2 PSL
Initiate tripping of circuit breaker 2 from a manual command
P544 and P546 only
442 Init Close CB2 PSL
Initiate closing of circuit breaker 2 from a manual command
P544 and P546 only
443 Reset Close Dly PSL Reset manual circuit breaker close time delay
444 Reset Relays/LED PSL Reset latched relays & LEDs (manual reset of any lockout trip contacts, auto-reclose lockout, and LEDs)
445 Reset Thermal PSL Reset thermal state to 0%
446 Reset (CB1) Lockout PSL Manual control to reset auto-recloser from lockout
447 Reset CB (1) Data PSL Reset circuit breaker maintenance values
448
BAR (P543 and P545)
Block CB1 AR (P544 and P546)
PSL
Block the Auto-reclose function (CB1 only in P544 and P546) from an external input
449 En 1pole reclose PSL Enable 1 pole reclose from an external input
P543/P545 only
450 En 3pole reclose PSL Enable 3 pole reclose from an external input
P543/P545 only
451 Pole Discrepancy (CB1) PSL Pole discrepancy (from external detector) — input used to force a 2nd single pole trip to move to a 3 pole auto-reclose cycle
452 Loopback Mode PSL To enable loopback mode via opto input
453 Perm Intertrip Permissive intertrip mapping what will be sent to the remote line end
454 Stub Bus Enabled
To enable stub bus protection in relays with two CT inputs. When enabled, all current values transmitted to the remote relays, and all those received from remote relays, are set to zero. Differential intertrip signals are not sent The protection provides differential protection for the stub zone
455 Inhibit C Diff When linked to an opto input, inhibits differential relay at the local end and send an inhibit command to the remote end
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 95
DDB no. English text Source Description
456 Recon Interlock
This must be energized (along with DDB 455 — inhibit C Diff) at the time that a relay configuration is changed from 3 ended to 2 ended scheme. This usually should be driven from a 52-B contact of the CB connected to the line end that is taken out of service
457 Prop Delay Equal PSL
If a P54x relay working with GPS sample synchronization loses GPS and there is a further switch in the protection communications network, the relay becomes Inhibit. If GPS become active again, the relay will automatically reset. But if not, the user can remove the inhibited condition by energizing this DDB signal as long as it is ensured that propagation delay times are equal
458 Inhibit WI PSL Inhibit weak infeed aided scheme logic
459 Test Mode PSL Commissioning tests — automatically places relay in test mode
460 103 Command Blocking PSL For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for «Command Blocking» (relay ignores SCADA commands)
461 103 Monitor Blocking PSL For IEC-870-5-103 protocol only, used for «Monitor Blocking» (relay is quiet — issues no messages via SCADA port)
462 Not used
463 Inhibit I>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 overcurrent protection
464 Inhibit I>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 overcurrent protection
465 Inhibit I>3 PSL Inhibit stage 3 overcurrent protection
466 Inhibit I>4 PSL Inhibit stage 4 overcurrent protection
467 Inhibit IN>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 earth fault protection
468 Inhibit IN>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 earth fault protection
469 Inhibit IN>3 PSL Inhibit stage 3 earth fault protection
470 Inhibit IN>4 PSL Inhibit stage 4 earth fault protection
471 Inhibit V<1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 undervoltage protection
472 Inhibit V<2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 undervoltage protection
473 Inhibit V>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 overvoltage protection
474 Inhibit V>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 overvoltage protection
475 Inhibit VN>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 residual overvoltage protection
476 Inhibit VN>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 residual overvoltage protection
477 Not used
478 Inhibit Thermal PSL Inhibit thermal overload protection
479 Inhibit CB Status PSL Inhibit circuit breaker state monitoring (no alarm for defective/stuck auxiliary contact)
480 Inhibit CB Fail PSL Inhibit circuit breaker fail protection
481 Inhibit OpenLine PSL Broken conductor protection
482 Inhibit VTS PSL Inhibit VT supervision (including turn OF MCB’s) via PSL
483 Inhibit CTS PSL Inhibit CT supervision (both differential and standard CTS) via PSL
484 InhibitChecksync PSL Inhibit checksync
485 Inhibit TOR PSL Inhibit trip on reclose (TOR)
486 Inhibit SOTF PSL Inhibit switch onto fault (SOTF)
487 Disable Diff CTS PSL To disable differential CTS via PSL
488 Set SOTF PSL
To enable SOTF logic by an external pulse. When this input is energized by en external pulse, SOTF becomes enabled during “SOTF Pulse” time setting
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -96
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
489 AR Reset Z1 EXT Zone 1 Extension Scheme
AR reset Z1X reach back to Z1 reach in Z1 extension scheme
490 Reset Zone 1 Ext PSL Reset zone Z1X back to Z1 reach using logic input (i.e. case when external AR and Z1 extension scheme are used)
491 Inhibit LoL PSL Inhibit Loss of Load scheme function
492 Aided 1 COS/LGS PSL
Aided 1 channel out of service signal (COS) or loss of guard signal (LGS) in distance unblocking schemes. This signal is normally driven from an opto input on conventional channels or from InterMiCOM
493 Aided1 Scheme Rx PSL Aided channel 1 — external signal received, for input to distance fixed scheme logic
494 Aided 1 Receive Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 1 — internal signal received generated in the signal receive logic
495 Not used
496 Aid1 Block Send PSL Prevent sending by customized logic — aided scheme 1
497 Aid1 Custom Send PSL Programmable send logic for special customized scheme (aided channel 1)
498 Aided 1 Send Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 1 send — internal send signal generated in signal send logic
499 Aid1 Custom T In PSL
When using a custom programmable aided scheme 1, the user is able to include a current reversal guard timer. Energizing this DDB will additionally start this timer, from PSL
500 Aid1 CustomT Out Aided Scheme Logic
When using customized aided scheme 1, this signal is used to indicate any additional condition that should be treated as permission for an aided trip (for example a permissive signal received could be connected, or a blocking signal could be inverted and then connected)
501 Aid1 Trip Enable Aided Scheme Logic
Aided scheme 1 trip enable — this is a permissive signal used to accelerate zone 2, or a blocking signal which has been inverted. It is a signal output, part-way through the internal fixed logic of aided schemes
502 Aid1 Custom Trip PSL Aid1 custom trip enable
503 Aid 1 Dist Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 distance trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
504 Aid 1 Delta Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided Scheme 1 Delta Directional Trip command (output from Aided tripping logic)
505 Aid 1 DEF Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 DEF trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
506 Aided 2 COS/LGS PSL
Aided 2 channel out of service signal (COS) or loss of guard signal (LGS) in distance unblocking schemes. This signal is normally driven from an opto input on conventional channels or from InterMiCOM
507 Aided2 Scheme Rx PSL Aided channel 2 — external signal received, for input to distance fixed scheme logic
508 Aided 2 Receive Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 2 — internal signal received generated in the signal receive logic
509 to 511 Not used
512 Aid2 Block Send PSL Prevent sending by customized logic — aided scheme 2
513 Aid2 Custom Send PSL Programmable send logic for special customized scheme (aided channel 2)
514 Aided 2 Send Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel 2 send — internal send signal generated in signal send logic
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 97
DDB no. English text Source Description
515 Aid2 Custom T In PSL
When using a custom programmable aided scheme 2, the user is able to include a current reversal guard timer. Energizing this DDB will additionally start this timer, from PSL
516 Aid2 CustomT Out Aided Scheme Logic
When using customized aided scheme 2, this signal is used to indicate any additional condition that should be treated as permission for an aided trip (for example a permissive signal received could be connected, or a blocking signal could be inverted and then connected)
517 Aid2 Trip Enable Aided Scheme Logic
Aided scheme 2 trip enable — this is a permissive signal used to accelerate zone 2, or a blocking signal which has been inverted. It is a signal output, part-way through the internal fixed logic of aided schemes
518 Aid2 Custom Trip PSL Aid2 custom trip enable
519 Aid 2 Dist Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 distance trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
520 Aid 2 Delta Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided Scheme 2 Delta Directional Trip command (output from Aided tripping logic)
521 Aid 2 DEF Trip Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 DEF trip command (output from aided tripping logic)
522 Any Trip Trip Conversion Logic Any trip signal — can be used as the trip command in three-pole tripping applications
523 Trip Output A (CB1) Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for phase A — used as a command to drive trip A output contact(s). Takes the output from the internal trip conversion logic
524 Trip Output B (CB1) Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for phase B — used as a command to drive trip B output contact(s). Takes the output from the internal trip conversion logic
525 Trip Output C (CB1) Trip Conversion Logic
Trip signal for phase C — used as a command to drive trip C output contact(s). Takes the output from the internal trip conversion logic
526 Trip 3ph (CB1) Trip Conversion Logic 3 phase trip command
527 2/3 Ph Fault Trip Conversion Logic
2 or 3 phase fault indication — used to flag whether the fault is polyphase. Typically used to control auto-reclose logic, where auto-reclosing is allowed only for single phase faults
528 3 Ph Fault Trip Conversion Logic
3 phase fault indication. Typically used to control auto-reclose logic, where auto-reclosing is blocked for faults affecting all three phases together
529 Trip Inputs 3Ph (CB1) PSL Trip 3 phase — input to trip latching logic
530 Trip Inputs A PSL
A phase trip — input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or three pole trip command results (e.g. converts a 2 pole trip to 3 phase)
531 Trip Inputs B PSL
B phase trip — input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or three pole trip command results (e.g. converts a 2 pole trip to 3 phase)
532 Trip Inputs C PSL
C phase trip — input to trip conversion logic. Essential to ensure correct single or three pole trip command results (e.g. converts a 2 pole trip to 3 phase)
533 Force 3Pole Trip (CB1) PSL
Force any trip which is issued to always be 3 pole (trip conversion — used in single pole trip applications, to signal when single pole tripping and re-closing is either unwanted, or impossible)
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -98
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
534 External Trip3ph (or CB1 Ext Trip3Ph)
PSL
External trip 3 phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled)
535 External Trip A (or CB1 Ext Trip A)
PSL
External trip A phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled)
536 External Trip B (or CB1 Ext Trip B)
PSL
External trip B phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled)
537 External Trip C (or CB1 Ext Trip C)
PSL
External trip C phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker fail, circuit breaker condition monitoring statistics, and internal auto-reclose (if enabled)
538 CB2 Ext Trip3ph PSL
External trip 3 phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail
P544 and P546 only
539 CB2 Ext Trip A PSL
External trip A phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail
P544 and P546 only
540 CB2 Ext Trip B PSL
External trip B phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail
P544 and P546 only
541 CB2 Ext Trip C PSL
External trip C phase — allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail
P544 and P546 only
542 SG Select x1 PSL
Setting group selector X1 (low bit)-selects SG2 if only DDB 542 signal is active.
SG1 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=0
SG4 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=1
543 SG Select 1x PSL
Setting group selector 1X (high bit)-selects SG3 if only DDB 543 is active.
SG1 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=0
SG4 is active if both DDB 542 & DDB 543=1
544 Clear Statistics PSL
To reset all statistics values cumulated on the relay. If mapped, the input for this signal could come from a command of the remote end (DDB 1020 — clear stats cmd -) via IM64
545 to 549 Not used
550 Inhibit Predictive OST PSL Block predictive out of step tripping command
551 Predictive OST PSL Predictive out of step trip
552 Inhibit OST PSL Block out of step tripping command
553 OST PSL Out of step trip
554 Start Z5 PSL Positive sequence impedance is detected in Z5
555 Start Z6 PSL Positive sequence impedance is detected in Z6
556 CNV Active Distance Basic Scheme Level detector Current No Volts (CNV) exceeded
557 TOR Trip CNV Distance Basic Scheme Trip on Reclose trip due to Current No Volts (CNV) level detectors
558 SOTF Trip CNV Distance Basic Scheme Switch on to Fault trip due to Current No Volts (CNV) level detectors
559 Fast OV PHA Distance Basic Scheme Phase A Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
560 Fast OV PHB Distance Basic Scheme Phase B Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
561 Fast OV PHC Distance Basic Scheme Phase C Fast Overvoltage level detector used by Current No Volts (CNV)
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 99
DDB no. English text Source Description
562 I2> Inhibit PSL Inhibit Neg Sequence overcurrent protection
563 I2>1 Tmr Blk PSL Block Neg Sequence overcurrent stage 1 time delayed trip
564 I2>2 Tmr Blk PSL Block Neg Sequence overcurrent stage 2 time delayed trip
565 I2>3 Tmr Blk PSL Block Neg Sequence overcurrent stage 3 time delayed trip
566 I2>4 Tmr Blk PSL Block Neg Sequence overcurrent stage 4 time delayed trip
567 I2>1 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent
1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
568 I2>2 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent
2nd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
569 I2>3 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent
3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
570 I2>4 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent
4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start
571 I2>1 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent
1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
572 I2>2 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent
2nd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
573 I2>3 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent
3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
574 I2>4 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent
4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip
575 Not used
576 AR Trip Test Commissioning Test
Auto-reclose trip test cycle in progress. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in progress
P543 and P545 only
577 AR Trip Test A Commissioning Test Auto-reclose trip test A phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in progress
578 AR Trip Test B Commissioning Test Auto-reclose trip test B phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in progress
579 AR Trip Test C Commissioning Test Auto-reclose trip test C phase. Indication that a manually-initiated test cycle is in progress
580 AR Init 3Ph Auto-Reclose
Initiate 3 phase auto-reclose (signal to an external re-closer)
P543 and P545 only
581 Not used
582 Diff Trip C Diff Current differential trip
583 Diff Trip A C Diff Current differential A phase trip
584 Diff Trip B C Diff Current differential B phase trip
585 Diff Trip C C Diff Current differential C phase trip
586 Diff InterTrip C Diff Current differential intertrip
587 Diff InterTrip A C Diff Current differential A phase intertrip
588 Diff InterTrip B C Diff Current differential B phase intertrip
589 Diff InterTrip C C Diff Current differential C phase intertrip
590 Perm InterTrip C Diff Permissive intertrip
591 Stub Bus Trip C Diff Stub bus trip
592 df/dt> Inhibit PSL Inhibit df/dt protection
593 df/dt>1 Tmr Blk PSL Block df/dt Stage 1 Timer
594 df/dt>2 Tmr Blk PSL Block df/dt Stage 2 Timer
595 df/dt>3 Tmr Blk PSL Block df/dt Stage 3 Timer
596 df/dt>4 Tmr Blk PSL Block df/dt Stage 4 Timer
597 df/dt>1 Start df/dt protection df/dt Stage 1 Start
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -100
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
598 df/dt>2 Start df/dt protection df/dt Stage 2 Start
599 df/dt>3 Start df/dt protection df/dt Stage 3 Start
600 df/dt>4 Start df/dt protection df/dt Stage 4 Start
601 df/dt>1 Trip df/dt protection df/dt Stage 1 Trip
602 df/dt>2 Trip df/dt protection df/dt Stage 2 Trip
603 df/dt>3 Trip df/dt protection df/dt Stage 3 Trip
604 df/dt>4 Trip df/dt protection df/dt Stage 4 Trip
605 Not used
608 Zone 1 Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 trip
609 Zone 1 A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 A phase trip
610 Zone 1 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 B phase trip
611 Zone 1 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 C phase trip
612 Zone 1 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 N trip
613 Zone 2 Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 trip
614 Zone 2 A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 A phase trip
615 Zone 2 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 B phase trip
616 Zone 2 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 C phase trip
617 Zone 2 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 N trip
618 Zone 3 Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 trip
619 Zone 3 A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 A phase trip
620 Zone 3 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 B phase trip
621 Zone 3 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 C phase trip
622 Zone 3 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 N trip
623 Zone P Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P trip
624 Zone P A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P A phase trip
625 Zone P B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P B phase trip
626 Zone P C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P C phase trip
627 Zone P N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone P N trip
628 Zone 4 Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 trip
629 Zone 4 A Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 A phase trip
630 Zone 4 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 B phase trip
631 Zone 4 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 C phase trip
632 Zone 4 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 N phase trip
633 Aided 1 Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 1 trip A phase
634 Aided 1 Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 1 trip B phase
635 Aided 1 Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 1 trip C phase
636 Aided 1 Trip N Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 1 trip involving ground (N)
637 Aid 1 WI Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 weak infeed trip phase A
638 Aid 1 WI Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 weak infeed trip phase B
639 Aid 1 WI Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 weak infeed trip phase C
640 Aid1 Delta Tr3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 1 Delta directional Trip 3 Phase
641 Aid1 DEF Trip3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided 1 directional earth fault scheme trip 3 phase
642 Aid1 WI Trip 3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 1 — weak infeed logic trip 3 phase
643 Aided 2 Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 2 trip A phase
644 Aided 2 Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 2 trip B phase
645 Aided 2 Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 2 trip C phase
646 Aided 2 Trip N Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 2 trip involving ground (N)
647 Aid 2 WI Trip A Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase A
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 101
DDB no. English text Source Description
648 Aid 2 WI Trip B Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase B
649 Aid 2 WI Trip C Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 weak infeed trip phase C
650 Aid2 Delta Tr3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided scheme 2 Delta directional Trip 3 Phase
651 Aid2 DEF Trip3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided 2 directional earth fault scheme trip 3 phase
652 Aid2 WI Trip 3Ph Aided Scheme Logic Aided channel scheme 2 — weak infeed logic trip 3 phase
653 Not used
654 Loss of Load Trip Loss of Load Logic Loss of load trip
655 I>1 Trip Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
656 I>1 Trip A Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
657 I>1 Trip B Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
658 I>1 Trip C Overcurrent 1st stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
659 I>2 Trip Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
660 I>2 Trip A Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
661 I>2 Trip B Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
662 I>2 Trip C Overcurrent 2nd stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
663 I>3 Trip Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
664 I>3 Trip A Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
665 I>3 Trip B Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
666 I>3 Trip C Overcurrent 3rd stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
667 I>4 Trip Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip 3 phase
668 I>4 Trip A Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase A
669 I>4 Trip B Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase B
670 I>4 Trip C Overcurrent 4th stage phase overcurrent trip phase C
671 IN>1 Trip Earth Fault 1st stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
672 IN>2 Trip Earth Fault 2nd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
673 IN>3 Trip Earth Fault 3rd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
674 IN>4 Trip Earth Fault 4th stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) protection trip
675 ISEF>1 Trip Sensitive Earth Fault 1st stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection trip
676 ISEF>2 Trip Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection trip
677 ISEF>3 Trip Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection trip
678 ISEF>4 Trip Sensitive Earth Fault 4th stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection trip
679 Broken Wire Trip Broken Conductor Broken conductor trip
680 Thermal Trip Thermal Overload Thermal overload trip
681 Not Used
682 IREF> Trip Sensitive Earth Fault Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection trip
683 V<1 Trip Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, three phase trip
684 V<1 Trip A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 A/AB phase trip
685 V<1 Trip B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 B/BC phase trip
686 V<1 Trip C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1 C/CA phase trip
687 V<2 Trip Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, three phase trip
688 V<2 Trip A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 A/AB phase trip
689 V<2 Trip B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 B/BC phase trip
690 V<2 Trip C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2 C/CA phase trip
691 V>1 Trip Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, three phase trip
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -102
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
692 V>1 Trip A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 A/AB phase trip
693 V>1 Trip B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 B/BC phase trip
694 V>1 Trip C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 C/CA phase trip
695 V>2 Trip Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase trip
696 V>2 Trip A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 A/AB phase trip
697 V>2 Trip B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 B/BC phase trip
698 V>2 Trip C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2 C/CA phase trip
699 Pole Discrepancy (CB1) Pole Discrepancy Pole discrepancy signal to force a three pole trip conversion, if the relay detects one pole dead, and no auto-reclose in progress
700 VN>1 Trip Residual overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 1 trip
701 VN>2 Trip Residual Overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 2 trip
702 Fault REC TRIG PSL Trigger for fault recorder
703 Not used
704 TOR Trip Zone 1 Trip on Close TOR trip zone 1 (trip on reclose)
705 TOR Trip Zone 2 Trip on Close TOR trip zone 2
706 TOR Trip Zone 3 Trip on Close TOR trip zone 3
707 TOR Trip Zone 4 Trip on Close TOR trip zone 4
708 TOR Trip Zone P Trip on Close TOR trip zone P
709 SOTF Trip Zone 1 Trip on Close SOTF trip zone 1 (switch on to fault)
710 SOTF Trip Zone 2 Trip on Close SOTF trip zone 2
711 SOTF Trip Zone 3 Trip on Close SOTF trip zone 3
712 SOTF Trip Zone 4 Trip on Close SOTF trip zone 4
713 SOTF Trip Zone P Trip on Close SOTF trip zone P
714 to 735 Not used
736 Any Start Any start
737 Differential Start C Diff Current differential start
738 Differential Start A C Diff Current differential A phase start
739 Differential Start B C Diff Current differential B phase start
740 Differential Start C C Diff Current differential C phase start
741 Zone 1 A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 A phase start
742 Zone 1 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 B phase start
743 Zone 1 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 C phase start
744 Zone 1 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 ground element start
745 Zone 2 A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 A phase start
746 Zone 2 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 B phase start
747 Zone 2 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 C phase start
748 Zone 2 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 2 ground element start
749 Zone 3 A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 A phase start
750 Zone 3 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 B phase start
751 Zone 3 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 C phase start
752 Zone 3 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 3 N start
753 Zone P A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P A phase start
754 Zone P B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P B phase start
755 Zone P C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P C phase start
756 Zone P N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone P N start
757 Zone 4 A Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 A phase start
758 Zone 4 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 B phase start
759 Zone 4 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 C phase start
760 Zone 4 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 N start
761 I>1 Start Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start 3 phase
762 I>1 Start A Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase A
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 103
DDB no. English text Source Description
763 I>1 Start B Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase B
764 I>1 Start C Overcurrent 1st stage overcurrent start phase C
765 I>2 Start Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start 3 phase
766 I>2 Start A Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase A
767 I>2 Start B Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase B
768 I>2 Start C Overcurrent 2nd stage overcurrent start phase C
769 I>3 Start Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start 3 phase
770 I>3 Start A Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase A
771 I>3 Start B Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase B
772 I>3 Start C Overcurrent 3rd stage overcurrent start phase C
773 I>4 Start Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start 3 phase
774 I>4 Start A Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start phase A
775 I>4 Start B Overcurrent 4th stage overcurrent start phase B
776 I>4 Start C Overcurrent 4th Stage overcurrent start phase C
777 IN>1 Start Earth Fault 1st stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
778 IN>2 Start Earth Fault 2nd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
779 IN>3 Start Earth Fault 3rd stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
780 IN>4 Start Earth Fault 4th stage stand by earth fault (SBEF) overcurrent start
781 ISEF>1 Start Sensitive Earth Fault 1st stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) overcurrent start
782 ISEF>2 Start Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) overcurrent start
783 ISEF>3 Start Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) overcurrent start
784 ISEF>4 Start Sensitive Earth Fault 4th stage Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) overcurrent start
785 Thermal Alarm Thermal Overload Thermal overload alarm
786,787 Not used
788 V<1 Start Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, three phase start
789 V<1 Start A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, A phase start
790 V<1 Start B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, B phase start
791 V<1 Start C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 1, C phase start
792 V<2 Start Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, three phase start
793 V<2 Start A/AB Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, A phase start
794 V<2 Start B/BC Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, B phase start
795 V<2 Start C/CA Undervoltage Undervoltage stage 2, C phase start
796 V>1 Start Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, three phase start
797 V>1 Start A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, A phase start
798 V>1 Start B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, B phase start
799 V>1 Start C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, C phase start
800 V>2 Start Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase start
801 V>2 Start A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, A phase start
802 V>2 Start B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, B phase start
803 V>2 Start C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, C phase start
804 VN>1 Start Residual Overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 1 start
805 VN>2 Start Residual Overvoltage Residual overvoltage stage 2 start
806 to 828 Not used
829 VA< Start Poledead
Phase A undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors have a fixed threshold: undervoltage pickup 38.1 V-drop off 43.8 V
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -104
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
830 VB< Start Poledead
Phase B undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors have a fixed threshold: undervoltage pickup 38.1 V-drop off 43.8 V
831 VC< Start Poledead
Phase C undervoltage level detector used in the pole dead logic. Detectors have a fixed threshold: undervoltage pickup 38.1 V-drop off 43.8 V
832 VTS Fast Block VT Supervision VT supervision fast block — blocks elements which would otherwise maloperate immediately a fuse failure event occurs
833 VTS Slow Block VT Supervision VT supervision slow block — blocks elements which would otherwise maloperate some time after a fuse failure event occurs
834 Bfail1 Trip 3ph (CB1) CB Fail tBF1 trip 3Ph — three phase output from circuit breaker failure logic, stage 1
835 Bfail2 Trip 3ph (CB1) CB Fail tBF2 trip 3Ph — three phase output from circuit breaker failure logic, stage 2
836 CB2 Fail1 Trip CB Fail
tBF1 trip 3Ph — three phase output from circuit breaker failure 2 logic, stage 1
P544 and P546 only
837 CB2 Fail2 Trip CB Fail
tBF2 trip 3Ph — three phase output from circuit breaker failure 2 logic, stage 2
P544 and P546 only
838 Control Trip (CB1) CB Control Control trip — operator trip instruction to the circuit breaker, via menu, or SCADA. (Does not operate for protection element trips)
839 Control Close (CB1) CB Control
Control close command to the circuit breaker. Operates for a manual close command (menu, SCADA), and additionally is driven by the
auto-reclose close command
840 Control Trip CB2 CB Control
Control trip — operator trip instruction to the circuit breaker 2, via menu, or SCADA. (Does not operate for protection element trips)
P544 and P546 only
841 Control Close CB2 CB Control
Control close command to the circuit breaker 2. Operates for a manual close command (menu, SCADA)
P544 and P546 only
842 Close in Prog (CB1) CB Control
Control close in progress — the relay has been given an instruction to close the circuit breaker, but the manual close timer delay has not yet finished timing out
843 Block Main Prot Auto-Reclose Auto-reclose block main protection
844 AR 3pole in prog (CB1) Auto-Reclose Auto-reclose 3 pole in progress (dead time is running)
845 AR 1pole in prog (CB1) Auto-Reclose Single pole auto-reclose in progress (dead time is running)
846 Seq Counter = 0 Auto-Reclose
Auto-reclose sequence counter is at zero — no previous faults have been cleared within recent history. The sequence count is at zero because no reclaim times are timing out, and the auto-recloser is not locked out. The recloser is awaiting the first protection trip, and all programmed cycles are free to follow
847 Seq Counter = 1 Auto-Reclose
The first fault trip has happened in a new auto-reclose sequence. Dead time 1, or reclaim time 1 are in the process of timing out
848 Seq Counter = 2 Auto-Reclose
Auto-reclose sequence counter is at 2. This means that the initial fault trip happened, and then another trip followed, moving the counter on to 2
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 105
DDB no. English text Source Description
849 Seq Counter = 3 Auto-Reclose
Auto-reclose sequence counter is at 3. This means that the initial fault trip happened, and then 2 trips followed, moving the counter on to 3
850 Seq Counter = 4 Auto-Reclose
Auto-reclose sequence counter is at 4. This means that the initial fault trip happened, and then 3 trips followed, moving the counter on to 4
851 Reserved
852 Successful Close (CB1) Auto-Reclose
Successful re-closure indication. The circuit breaker was re-closed by the AR function, and stayed closed. This indication is raised at the expiry of the reclaim time
853 3P Dead Time IP Auto-Reclose 3 pole Auto-reclose dead time in progress
P544 and P546 only
854 Auto Close (CB1) Auto-Reclose Auto-reclose command to the circuit breaker
855 CB2 AR 1p InProg Auto-reclose CB2
Single pole auto-reclose in progress (dead time is running) CB2
P544 and P546 only
856 A/R Status 3P Auto-Reclose
3 Pole auto-recloser in service — the auto-reclose function has been enabled either in the relay menu, or by an opto input
P544 and P546 only
857 AR Status 1P Auto-Reclose
Single pole auto-recloser in service — the auto-reclose function has been enabled either in the relay menu, or by an opto input
P544 and P546 only
858 Force 3 pole (CB1) Auto-Reclose
Due to the sequence count reached, lockout, or any outage of the internal auto-recloser — this signal instructs any other trips to be forced to three pole trips
859 AR Blocked Auto-Reclose It indicates that AR has been blocked (ex. from external input BAR)
860 Lockout Alarm (CB1) CB Control Composite lockout alarm — circuit breaker locked out due to auto-recloser, or condition monitoring reasons
861 GPSAlarm Instant C Diff Instantaneous GPS Alarm initiated immediately on loss of the GPS 1 pulse per second input signal
862 to 863 Not used
864 IA< Start Undercurrent
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for breaker failure in models with one CT input and also it is used for fault record reset (as the sum CTs in models with two CTs)
865 IB< Start Undercurrent
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for breaker failure in models with one CT input and also it is used for fault record reset (as the sum CTs in models with two CTs)
866 IC< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for breaker failure in models with one CT input and also it is used for fault record reset (as the sum CTs in models with two CTs)
867 CB1 IA< Start Undercurrent
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
868 CB1 IB< Start Undercurrent
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -106
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
869 CB1 IC< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT1). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
870 CB2 IA< Start Undercurrent
A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
871 CB2 IB< Start Undercurrent
B phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
872 CB2 IC< Start Undercurrent
C phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT2). It is used for breaker failure in models with two CT inputs
P544 and P546 only
873 ISEF< Start Undercurrent SEF undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current in CT SEF)
874 to 875 Not used
876 Z1X Active Zone 1 Extension Scheme
Zone 1 extension active — zone 1 is operating in its reach extended mode
877 TOC Active Trip on Close
Trip on close functions (either SOTF or TOR) active. These elements are in-service for a period of time following circuit breaker closure
878 TOR Active Trip on Close
Trip on re-close protection is active — indicated TOC delay timer has elapsed after circuit breaker opening, and remains in-service on auto-reclosure for the duration of the trip on close window
879 SOTF Active Trip on Close
Switch on to fault protection is active — in service on manual breaker closure, and then remains
in-service for the duration of the trip on close window
880 SysChks Inactive (CB1) Check Sync System checks inactive (output from the check synchronism, and other voltage checks)
881 CS1 Enabled (CB1) PSL Check sync. stage 1 enabled
882 CS2 Enabled (CB1) PSL Check sync. stage 2 enabled
883 Check Sync 1 OK (CB1) Check Sync Check sync. stage 1 OK
884 Check Sync 2 OK (CB1) Check Sync Check sync. stage 2 OK
885 SysSplit Enabled PSL System split function enabled
P543 and P545 only
886 Live Bus (CB1) Voltage Monitoring Indicates live bus condition is detected
887 Dead Bus (CB1) Voltage Monitoring Indicates dead bus condition is detected
888 Live Line Voltage Monitoring Indicates live line condition is detected
889 Dead Line Voltage Monitoring Indicates dead line condition is detected
890 All Poles Dead Pole Dead Logic Pole dead logic detects 3 phase breaker open
891 Any Pole Dead Pole Dead Logic Pole dead logic detects at least one breaker pole open
892 Pole Dead A Pole Dead Logic Phase A pole dead
893 Pole Dead B Pole Dead Logic Phase B pole dead
894 Pole Dead C Pole Dead Logic Phase C pole dead
895 Reserved
896 Reserved
897 AR Check Sync OK PSL Input to the auto-reclose logic to indicate system in synchronism
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 107
DDB no. English text Source Description
898 Ctl Check Sync PSL Input to the circuit breaker control logic to indicate manual check synchronization conditions are satisfied
899 AR Sys Checks OK PSL Input to the auto-reclose logic to indicate system checks conditions are satisfied
900 CB1 Ext CS OK Check sync External check-sync is OK for CB1
P544 and P546 only
901 CB2 Ext CS OK Check sync External check-sync is OK for CB2
P544 and P546 only
902 Not used
903 CB(1) Open 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker is open, all three phases
904 CB(1) Open A ph CB Status Circuit breaker A phase is open
905 CB(1) Open B ph CB Status Circuit breaker A phase is open
906 CB(1) Open C ph CB Status Circuit breaker A phase is open
907 CB(1) Closed 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker is closed, all three phases
908 CB(1) Closed A ph CB Status Circuit breaker A phase is closed
909 CB(1) Closed B ph CB Status Circuit breaker B phase is closed
910 CB(1) Closed C ph CB Status Circuit breaker C phase is closed
911 CB2 Open 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 is open, all three phases
P544 and P546 only
912 CB2 Open A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
P544 and P546 only
913 CB2 Open B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
P544 and P546 only
914 CB2 Open C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is open
P544 and P546 only
915 CB2 Closed 3 ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 is closed, all three phases
P544 and P546 only
916 CB2 Closed A ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 A phase is closed
P544 and P546 only
917 CB2 Closed B ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 B phase is closed
P544 and P546 only
918 CB2 Closed C ph CB Status Circuit breaker 2 C phase is closed
P544 and P546 only
919 Inhibit Cmp V1>1 PSL Inhibit the first stage compensated
overvoltage element
920 Inhibit Cmp V1>2 PSL Inhibit the second stage compensated
overvoltage element
921 Cmp V1>1 Tim Blk PSL Block the first stage compensated
overvoltage element
922 Cmp V1>2 Tim Blk PSL Block the second stage compensated
overvoltage element
923 V1>1 Cmp Start Overvoltage
1st stage compensated overvoltage start signal
924 V1>2 Cmp Start Overvoltage 2nd stage compensated overvoltage start
signal
925 V1>1 Cmp Trip Overvoltage
1st stage compensated overvoltage trip signal
926 V1>2 Cmp Trip Overvoltage
2nd stage compensated overvoltage trip signal
927 Not used
928 CTS Block CT Supervision Standard or differential CT supervision block (current transformer supervision)
929 CTS Block Diff CT Supervision Differential CT supervision block (current transformer supervision)
930 CTS Restrain CT Supervision Differential CT supervision restrain (current transformer supervision)
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -108
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
931 CT1 L i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in local end CT1 exceed CTS i1> setting
932 CT2 L i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in local end CT2 exceed CTS i1> setting
933 CT1 R1 i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in remote 1 end CT1 exceed CTS i1> setting
934 CT2 R1 i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in remote 1 end CT2 exceed CTS i1> setting
935 CT1 R2 i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in remote 2 end CT1 exceed CTS i1> setting
936 CT2 R2 i1> CT Supervision Positive sequence current in remote 2 end CT2 exceed CTS i1> setting
937 CT1 L i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in local end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
938 CT2 L i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in local end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
939 CT1 R1 i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
940 CT2 R1 i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
941 CT1 R2 i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 2 end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
942 CT2 R2 i2/i1> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 2 end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1> setting
943 CT1 L i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in local end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
944 CT2 L i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in local end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
945 CT1 R1 i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
946 CT2 R1 i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
947 CT1 R2 i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 2 end CT1 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
948 CT2 R2 i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1 ratio in remote 2 end CT2 exceed CTS i2/i1>> setting
949 to 951 Not used
952 Faulted Phase A PSL Faulted phase A — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
953 Faulted Phase B PSL Faulted phase B — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
954 Faulted Phase C PSL Faulted phase C — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
955 Faulted Phase N PSL Faulted phase N (fault involves ground) — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
956 Started Phase A PSL Started phase A — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
957 Started Phase B PSL Started phase B — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
958 Started Phase C PSL Started phase C — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
959 Started Phase N PSL Started phase N (fault involves ground) — must be assigned, as this sets the start flag used in records, and on the LCD display
960 Zone1 AN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 AN ground fault element
961 Zone1 BN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 BN ground fault element
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 109
DDB no. English text Source Description
962 Zone1 CN Element Distance Elements Zone 1 CN ground fault element
963 Zone1 AB Element Distance Elements Zone 1 AB phase fault element
964 Zone1 BC Element Distance Elements Zone 1 BC phase fault element
965 Zone1 CA Element Distance Elements Zone 1 CA phase fault element
966 Zone2 AN Element Distance Elements Zone 2 AN ground fault element
967 Zone2 BN Element Distance Elements Zone 2 BN ground fault element
968 Zone2 CN Element Distance Elements Zone 2 CN ground fault element
969 Zone2 AB Element Distance Elements Zone 2 AB phase fault element
970 Zone2 BC Element Distance Elements Zone 2 BC phase fault element
971 Zone2 CA Element Distance Elements Zone 2 CA phase fault element
972 Zone3 AN Element Distance Elements Zone 3 AN ground fault element
973 Zone3 BN Element Distance Elements Zone 3 BN ground fault element
974 Zone3 CN Element Distance Elements Zone 3 CN ground fault element
975 Zone3 AB Element Distance Elements Zone 3 AB phase fault element
976 Zone3 BC Element Distance Elements Zone 3 BC phase fault element
977 Zone3 CA Element Distance Elements Zone 3 CA phase fault element
978 ZoneP AN Element Distance Elements Zone P AN ground fault element
979 ZoneP BN Element Distance Elements Zone P BN ground fault element
980 ZoneP CN Element Distance Elements Zone P CN ground fault element
981 ZoneP AB Element Distance Elements Zone P AB phase fault element
982 ZoneP BC Element Distance Elements Zone P BC phase fault element
983 ZoneP CA Element Distance Elements Zone P CA phase fault element
984 Zone4 AN Element Distance Elements Zone 4 AN ground fault element
985 Zone4 BN Element Distance Elements Zone 4 BN ground fault element
986 Zone4 CN Element Distance Elements Zone 4 CN ground fault element
987 Zone4 AB Element Distance Elements Zone 4 AB phase fault element
988 Zone4 BC Element Distance Elements Zone 4 BC phase fault element
989 Zone4 CA Element Distance Elements Zone 4 CA phase fault element
990 to 995 Not used
996 DEF Forward Directional Earth Fault DEF forward (directional earth fault aided scheme detector)
997 DEF Reverse Directional Earth Fault DEF reverse (directional earth fault aided scheme detector)
998 Delta Dir FWD AN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward AN detection
999 Delta Dir FWD BN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward BN detection
1000 Delta Dir FWD CN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward CN detection
1001 Delta Dir FWD AB Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward AB detection
1002 Delta Dir FWD BC Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward BC detection
1003 Delta Dir FWD CA Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme forward CA detection
1004 Delta Dir Rev AN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse AN detection
1005 Delta Dir Rev BN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse BN detection
1006 Delta Dir Rev CN Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse CN detection
1007 Delta Dir Rev AB Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse AB detection
1008 Delta Dir Rev BC Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse BC detection
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -110
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1009 Delta Dir Rev CA Delta Directional ElementDelta directional scheme reverse CA detection
1010 Phase Select A Phase Selector Phase selector — phase A pickup
1011 Phase Select B Phase Selector Phase selector — phase B pickup
1012 Phase Select C Phase Selector Phase selector — phase C pickup
1013 Phase Select N Phase Selector Phase selector — neutral indication
1014 P Swing Detector Powerswing Blocking Power swing detected
1015 PSB Fault Powerswing Blocking Power swing block fault
1016 Ih(2) Loc Blk A Inrush Detector
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase A (may be used to block any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a power transformer)
1017 Ih(2) Loc Blk B Inrush Detector
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase B (may be used to block any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a power transformer)
1018 Ih(2) Loc Blk C Inrush Detector
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase C (may be used to block any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a power transformer)
1019 Ih(2) Loc Blk N Inrush Detector
2nd harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on neutral current measurement (may be used to block any instantaneous distance elements that reach through the reactance of a power transformer)
1020 Clear Stats Cmd PSL
This is an indication of the command “Clear Statistics” available in the PSL. This DDB could be used to reset statistics at the remote end (via IM64) by linking it to DDB 544 — clear statistics — at the remote end
1021 Ih(2) Rem Blk A SW Indication that remote end phase A is blocked by 2nd harmonic
1022 Ih(2) Rem Blk B SW Indication that remote end phase B is blocked by 2nd harmonic
1023 Ih(2) Rem Blk C SW Indication that remote end phase C is blocked by 2nd harmonic
1021 to 1023 Not used
1024 LED1 Red Output Conditioner Programmable LED 1 red is energized
1025 LED1 Grn. Output Conditioner Programmable LED 1 green is energized
1038 LED8 Red Output Conditioner Programmable LED 8 red is energized
1039 LED8 Grn. Output Conditioner Programmable LED 8 green is energized
1040 FnKey LED1 Red Output Conditioner Programmable function key LED 1 red is energized
1041 FnKey LED1 Grn. Output Conditioner Programmable function key LED 1 green is energized
1058 FnKey LED10 Red Output Conditioner Programmable function key LED 10 red is energized
1059 FnKey LED10 Grn. Output Conditioner Programmable function key LED 10 green is energized
1060 LED1 Con R PSL Assignment of input signal to drive output LED 1 red
1061 LED1 Con G PSL Assignment of signal to drive output LED 1 green. To drive LED 1 yellow DDB 676 and DDB 677 must be driven at the same time
1074 LED8 Con R PSL Assignment of signal to drive output LED 8 red
1075 LED8 Con G PSL Assignment of signal to drive output LED 8 green. To drive LED 8 yellow DDB 690 and DDB 691 must be active at the same time
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 111
DDB no. English text Source Description
1076 FnKey LED1 ConR PSL Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 1 red. This LED is associated with function key 1
1077 FnKey LED1 ConG PSL
Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 1 green. This LED is associated with function key 1. To drive function key LED, yellow DDB 692 and DDB 693 must be active at the same time
1094 FnKey LED10 ConR PSL Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 10 red. This LED is associated with function key 10
1095 FnKey LED10 ConG PSL
Assignment of signal to drive output function key LED 10 green. This LED is associated with function key 10. To drive function key LED1 yellow, DDB 710 and DDB 711 must be active at the same time
1096 Function Key 1 Function Key Function key 1 is activated. In ‘Normal’ mode it is high on keypress and in ‘Toggle’ mode remains high/low on single keypress
1105 Function Key 10 Function Key Function key 10 is activated. In ‘Normal’ mode it is high on keypress and in ‘Toggle’ mode remains high/low on single keypress
1106 I^ Maint. Alarm (CB1) CB Monitoring Broken current maintenance alarm — circuit breaker cumulative duty alarm set-point
1107 I^ Lockout Alarm (CB1) CB Monitoring Broken current lockout alarm — circuit breaker cumulative duty has been exceeded
1108 CB OPs Maint. (CB1) CB Monitoring No of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm — indicated due to circuit breaker trip operations threshold
1109 CB OPs Lockout (CB1) CB Monitoring No of circuit breaker operations maintenance lockout — excessive number of circuit breaker trip operations, safety lockout
1110 CB Op Time Maint (CB1) CB Monitoring
Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm — excessive operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (slow interruption time)
1111 CB Op Time Lockout (CB1)
CB Monitoring
Excessive circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm — excessive operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (too slow interruption)
1112 Fault Freq. Lock (CB1) CB Monitoring Excessive fault frequency lockout alarm
1113 CB2 I^ Maint CB2 Monitoring
Broken current maintenance alarm — circuit breaker cumulative duty alarm set-point CB2
P544 and P546 only
1114 CB2 I^ Lockout CB2 Monitoring
Broken current lockout alarm — circuit breaker cumulative duty has been exceeded CB2
P544 and P546 only
1115 No.CB2 OPs Maint CB2 Monitoring
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm — indicated due to circuit breaker trip operations threshold CB2
P544 and P546 only
1116 No.CB2 OPs Lock CB2 Monitoring
No of circuit breaker operations maintenance lockout — excessive number of circuit breaker trip operations, safety lockout CB2
P544 and P546 only
1117 CB2 Time Maint CB2 Monitoring
Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm — excessive operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (slow interruption time) CB2
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -112
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1118 CB2 Time Lockout CB2 Monitoring
Excessive circuit breaker operating time lockout alarm — excessive operation time alarm for the circuit breaker (too slow interruption) CB2
P544 and P546 only
1119 CB2FaultFreqLock CB2 Monitoring
Excessive fault frequency lockout alarm CB2
P544 and P546 only
1120 SignalFail Ch1Rx C Diff Reception of messages on channel 1 has stopped
1121 SignalFail Ch1Tx C Diff Transmission of messages on channel 1 has stopped
1122 Ch 1 GPS Fail C Diff It indicates that GPS sampling synchronization (for protection purposes) running on channel 1 is lost
1123 Ch1 Mux Clk Fiber Monitor Bits This is an alarm that appears if the channel 1 baud rate is outside the limits 52 Kbis/s or 70 Kbits/s
1124 Ch1 Signal Lost Fiber Monitor Bits Mux indicates signal lost over channel 1
1125 Ch1 Path Yellow Fiber Monitor Bits One way communication. Local relay that is sending over Ch1 indicates that remote end is not receiving
1126 Ch1 Mismatch RxN Fiber Monitor Bits Indication of mismatch between Ch1 N*64kbits/s setting and Mux
1127 Ch1 Timeout Fiber Monitor Bits Indication that no valid message is received over channel 1 during ‘Channel Timeout’ window
1128 Ch1 Degraded Fiber Monitor Bits Indicates poor channel 1 quality
1129 Ch1 Passthrough Fiber Monitor Bits Ch1 data received via Ch 2 in 3 ended configuration — self healing indication —
1130 SignalFail Ch2Rx C Diff Reception of messages on channel 2 has stopped
1131 SignalFail Ch2Tx C Diff Transmission of messages on channel 1 has stopped
1132 Ch 2 GPS Fail C Diff It indicates that GPS sampling synchronization (for protection purposes) running on channel 2 is lost
1133 Ch2 Mux Clk Fiber Monitor Bits This is an alarm that appears if the channel 2 baud rate is outside the limits 52Kbis/s or 70 Kbits/s
1134 Ch2 Signal Lost Fiber Monitor Bits Mux indicates signal lost over channel 2
1135 Ch2 Path Yellow Fiber Monitor Bits One way communication. Local relay that is sending over Ch2 indicates that remote end is not receiving
1136 Ch2 Mismatch RxN Fiber Monitor Bits Indication of mismatch between InterMiCOM64 Ch 2 setting and Mux
1137 Ch2 Timeout Fiber Monitor Bits Indication that no valid message is received over channel 2 during ‘Channel Timeout’ window
1138 Ch2 Degraded Fiber Monitor Bits Indicates poor channel 2 quality
1139 Ch2 Passthrough Fiber Monitor Bits Ch2 data received via Ch 1 in 3 ended configuration — self healing indication —
1140 to 1148 Hidden
1149 F<1 Timer Block PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer
1150 F<2 Timer Block PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer
1151 F<3 Timer Block PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 3 Timer
1152 F<4 Timer Block PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 4 Timer
1153 F>1 Timer Block PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer
1154 F>2 Timer Block PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer
1155 F<1 Start Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 1 Start
1156 F<2 Start Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 2 Start
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 113
DDB no. English text Source Description
1157 F<3 Start Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 3 Start
1158 F<4 Start Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 4 Start
1159 F>1 Start Frequency Protection Overfrequency Stage 1 Start
1160 F>2 Start Frequency Protection Overfrequency Stage 2 Start
1161 F<1 Trip Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 1 Trip
1162 F<2 Trip Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 2 Trip
1163 F<3 Trip Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 3 Trip
1164 F<4 Trip Frequency Protection Underfrequency Stage 4 Trip
1165 F>1 Trip Frequency Protection Overfrequency Stage 1 Trip
1166 F>2 Trip Frequency Protection Overfrequency Stage 2 Trip
1167 Inhibit F<1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 Underfrequency protection
1168 Inhibit F<2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 Underfrequency protection
1169 Inhibit F<3 PSL Inhibit stage 3 Underfrequency protection
1170 Inhibit F<4 PSL Inhibit stage 4 Underfrequency protection
1171 Inhibit F>1 PSL Inhibit stage 1 Overfrequency protection
1172 Inhibit F>2 PSL Inhibit stage 2 Overfrequency protection
1173 to 1175 Not used
1176 HMI Access Lvl 1 It indicates that level access 1 for HMI interface is enabled
1177 HMI Access Lvl 2 It indicates that level access 2 for HMI interface is enabled
1178 FPort AccessLvl1 It indicates that level access 1 for the front port interface is enabled
1179 FPort AccessLvl2 It indicates that level access 2 for the front port interface is enabled
1180 RPrt1 AccessLvl1 It indicates that level access 1 for the rear port 1 interface is enabled
1181 RPrt1 AccessLvl2 It indicates that level access 2 for the rear port 1 interface is enabled
1182 RPrt2 AccessLvl1 It indicates that level access 1 for the rear port 2 interface is enabled
1183 RPrt2 AccessLvl2 It indicates that level access 2 for the rear port 2 interface is enabled
1184 Monitor Bit 1 Commissioning Test Monitor port signal 1 — allows mapped monitor signals to be mapped to disturbance recorder or contacts
1191 Monitor Bit 8 Commissioning Test Monitor port signal 8
1192 Hidden
1193 Not used
1194 PSL Int 1 PSL PSL internal node
1293 PSL Int 100 PSL PSL internal node
1294 VTS Ia> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in phase a
1295 VTS Ib> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in phase b
1296 VTS Ic> VT Supervision “VTS I> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded in phase c
1297 VTS Va> VT Supervision Va has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1298 VTS Vb> VT Supervision Vb has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1299 VTS Vc> VT Supervision Vc has exceed 30 volts (drop off at 10 volts)
1300 VTS I2> VT Supervision “VTS I2> Inhibit “ setting has been exceeded
1301 VTS V2> VT Supervision V2 has exceed 10 volts
1302 VTS Ia delta> VT Supervision Superimposed phase a current has exceed 0.1 In
1303 VTS Ib delta> VT Supervision Superimposed phase b current has exceed 0.1 In
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -114
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1304 VTS Ic delta> VT Supervision Superimposed phase c current has exceed 0.1 In
1305 to 1363
Not used
1364 CB1 Pre-Lockout Output from CB1 monitoring logic
1363 to 1374
Not used
1375 Teleprotection Disturbed
This is an output signal available in the PSL, that could be mapped to “C Diff Failure” for
IEC 870-5-103
1376 I>> Back Up Supervision
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC 870-5-103)
This signal is ON if an overcurrent stage is selected to be enabled on VTS and distance is blocked by VTS
1377 O/C Trip By VTS
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC 870-5-103)
This signal is ON if DDB 1376 is ON and one of the overcurrent stages set to be enabled on VTS condition trips
1378 Teleprot Tx
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC 870-5-103)
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which could be mapped to a signal send of one of the two teleprotection channels
1379 Teleprot Rx
This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC 870-5-103)
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which could be mapped to a signal receive of one of the two teleprotection channels
1380 Group Warning
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped in IEC 870-5-103 to a minor defect which does not shut down the main protection
1381 Group Alarm
This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped in IEC 870-5-103 to a major problem normally linked to the watchdog
1382 AR On Pulse This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped to enable AR via pulse
1383 AR OFF Pulse This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped to disable AR via pulse
1384 AR Enable This is an output signal available in the PSL, which can be mapped to enable AR
1385 AR In Service Auto-reclose in service
1386 MaxCh1 PropDelay Setting MaxCh 1 PropDelay has been exceeded
1387 MaxCh2 PropDelay Setting MaxCh 2 PropDelay has been exceeded
1388 MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime Setting MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime has been exceeded
1389 MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime Setting MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime has been exceeded
1390 to 1403
Not used
1404 VTS Blk Distance VTS Logic Signal from the VTS logic that can be used to block operation of the distance elements
1405 to 1407
Not used
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 115
DDB no. English text Source Description
1408 CB2 Lead Auto-reclose
If setting «Leader Select By:» = Opto, then preferred leader CB is CB1 if input DDB «CB2 LEAD» is low, or CB2 if DDB «CB2 LEAD» is high.
P544 and P546 only
1409 Follower AR 1P Auto-reclose
If setting «Foll AR Mode» = Opto, then if input DDB «FARSP» is high, the follower CB is enabled for single phase autoreclose, if «FARSP» is low, the follower CB is NOT enabled for single phase autoreclose.D2215
P544 and P546 only
1410 Follower AR 3P Auto-reclose
If setting «Foll AR Mode» = Opto, then if input DDB «FAR3P» is high, the follower CB is enabled for three phase autoreclose, if «FAR3P» is low, the follower CB is NOT enabled for three phase autoreclose.
P544 and P546 only
1411 CB2 AR 3p InProg Auto-reclose Autoreclose in progress CB2
P544 and P546 only
1412 En CB2 Independ Auto-reclose
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. A signal from an autoreclose scheme on an adjacent circuit having shared control of CB2, to allow the «Independent Follower time» to start. (see description for DDB «CB2 Indep Init A» or «CB2 Indep Init B» or «CB2 Indep Init C» ).
P544 and P546 only
1413 to 1416
Not used
1417 Ext Rst CB2 AROK PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when required to reset any CB2 Successful Autoreclose» signal.
P544 and P546 only
1418 Ext Rst CB2Shots PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when required to reset the CB2 cumulative «Shots» counters.
P544 and P546 only
1419 Rst CB2 CloseDly PSL
DDB mapped in PSL. Reset Manual CB2 Close Timer Delay (stop & reset Manual Close Delay time for closing CB2).
P544 and P546 only
1420 Inhibit AR PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. External signal to inhibit autoreclose.
P544 and P546 only
1421 Block CB2 AR PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. External signal to force CB2 autoreclose to lockout.
P544 and P546 only
1422 Rst CB2 Lockout PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Reset Lockout Opto Input to reset CB2 Lockout state
P544 and P546 only
1423 MCB/VTS CS2 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (Bus2 VT secondary MCB tripped or VT fail detected by external VTS scheme), or signal from host relay VTS scheme
P544 and P546 only
1424 Inhibit LB2 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Bus 2 function)
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -116
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1425 Inhibit DB2 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Bus 2 function)
P544 and P546 only
1426 CB2 CS1 Enabled PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input or logic DDBs (enable CS2-1 check synchronism function)
P544 and P546 only
1427 CB2 CS2 Enabled PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input or logic DDBs (enable CS2-2 check synchronism function)
P544 and P546 only
1428 CB2 In Service
Signal from CB In Service logic, indicating that CB2 is «In Service», i.e. can be initiated to autoreclose,
P544 and P546 only
1429 CB2 NoAR Autoreclose CB2 not available for autoreclose
P544 and P546 only
1430 Not used
1431 Leader CB2 Autoreclose CB2 set as leader
P544 and P546 only
1432 Follower CB1 Autoreclose CB1 set as follower
P544 and P546 only
1433 Follower CB2 Autoreclose CB2 set as follower
P544 and P546 only
1434 CB2 AR Init Autoreclose
Indicates initiation of a CB2 autoreclose cycle
P544 and P546 only.
1435 CB2 ARIP Autoreclose CB2 autoreclose cycle in progress
P544 and P546 only
1436 Not used
1437 Differential High Start C Diff Current differential High Set start
1438 Differential High Start A C Diff Current differential High Set A phase start
1439 Differential High Start B C Diff Current differential High Set B phase start
1440 Differential High Start C C Diff Current differential High Set C phase start
1441 CB2 Failed AR
CB2 autoreclose failed due to persistent fault
P544 and P546 only
1442 DTOK CB2L 1P
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB2 lead single phase autoreclose dead time to run are satisfied
P544 and P546 only
1443 DTOK CB2L 3P
Output DDB indicates conditions to enable CB2 lead three phase autoreclose dead time to run are satisfied
P544 and P546 only
1444 CB2 3P DTime
Indicates CB2 three phase autoreclose dead time running
P544 and P546 only
1445 En CB2 Follower
Indicates conditions are satisfied to enable CB2 follower sequence
P544 and P546 only
1446 1P Follower Time
Indicates a single pole autoreclose follower time is running (either CB)
P544 and P546 only
1447 3P Follower Time
Indicates a three pole autoreclose follower time is running (either CB)
P544 and P546 only
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 117
DDB no. English text Source Description
1448 Auto Close CB2
Signal from autoreclose logic to initiate CB2 close via “CB2 CB Control”
P544 and P546 only
1449 Set CB2 Close
Indicates a CB2 Auto Close signal has been issued
P544 and P546 only
1450 CB2 Control
Output DDB can be applied to inhibit CB2 reclose by adjacent scheme until local autoreclose scheme confirms it is OK to close CB2
P544 and P546 only
1451 CB2 Succ 1P AR CB2 successful single phase AR
P544 and P546 only
1452 CB2 Succ 3P AR CB2 successful three phase AR
P544 and P546 only
1453 CB2 Close inProg
CB2 Manual Close initiated – awaiting Man Close Delay time
P544 and P546 only
1454 CB2 Fast SCOK
OK to reclose CB2 with sync check without waiting for dead time to complete
P544 and P546 only
1455 CB2L SCOK
System conditions OK to reclose CB2 as leader when dead time complete
P544 and P546 only
1456 CB2F SCOK
System conditions OK to reclose CB2 when follower time complete
P544 and P546 only
1457 Not used
1458 CB2 Man SCOK
System conditions OK to manually close CB2
P544 and P546 only
1459 CB2 Fail Pr Trip
signal to force CB2 AR lockout if CB2 fails to trip when protection operates
P544 and P546 only
1460 Not used
1461 Live Bus 2
Indicates Bus 2 input is live, i.e. voltage >= setting «Live Bus 2»
P544 and P546 only
1462 Dead Bus 2
Indicates Bus 2 input is dead i.e. voltage < setting «Dead Bus 2»
P544 and P546 only
1463 CB2 CS2 OK
CB2 close with synchronism check type 2 is permitted (setting CS2-2 = Enabled), and Line and Bus 2 voltages satisfy relay settings for CB2 synchronism check type 2
P544 and P546 only
1464 CB1 CS2 SlipF>
Line-Bus 1 slip freq > SlipFr 1-2 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 1 voltage is greater than maximum slip permitted for CB1 synchronism check type 2)
P544 and P546 only
1465 CB1 CS2 SlipF<
Line-Bus 1 slip freq < SlipFr 1-2 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 1 voltage is within the permitted range for CB1 synchronism check type 2)
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -118
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1466 CB2 CS1 SlipF>
Line-Bus 2 slip freq > SlipFr 2-1 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 2 voltage is greater than maximum slip permitted for CB2 synchronism check type 1)
P544 and P546 only
1467 CB2 CS1 SlipF<
Line-Bus 2 slip freq < SlipFr 2-1 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 2 voltage is within the permitted range for CB2 synchronism check type 1)
P544 and P546 only
1468 CB2 CS2 SlipF>
Line-Bus 2 slip freq > SlipFr 2-2 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 2 voltage is greater than maximum slip permitted for CB2 synchronism check type 2)
P544 and P546 only
1469 CB2 CS2 SlipF<
Line-Bus 2 slip freq < SlipFr 2-2 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 2 voltage is within the permitted range for CB2 synchronism check type 2)
P544 and P546 only
1470 CB2 CS1 VL>VB
Voltage magnitude difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «VDiff2-1» (line V > Bus V)
P544 and P546 only
1471 CB2 CS2 VL>VB
Voltage magnitude difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «VDiff2-1» (line V > Bus V)
P544 and P546 only
1472 CB2 CS1 VL<VB
Voltage magnitude difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «VDiff2-1» (line V < Bus V)
P544 and P546 only
1473 CB2 CS2 VL<VB
Voltage magnitude difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «VDiff2-1» (line V < Bus V)
P544 and P546 only
1474 CB2 CS1 FL>FB
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «SlipFr2-1» (line freq > Bus freq)
P544 and P546 only
1475 CB2 CS2 FL>FB Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «SlipFr2-2» (line freq > Bus freq)+D2253
1476 CB2 CS1 FL<FB
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «SlipFr2-1» (line freq < Bus freq)
P544 and P546 only
1477 CB2 CS2 FL<FB
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting «SlipFr2-2» (line freq < Bus freq)
P544 and P546 only
1478 CB2 CS1 AngHigh+
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: +Angle 2-1 to +180deg (anticlockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
1479 CB2 CS1 AngHigh-
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: -Angle 2-1 to -180deg (clockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
1480 CB2 CS2 AngHigh+
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: +Angle 2-2 to +180deg (anticlockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 119
DDB no. English text Source Description
1481 CB2 CS2 AngHigh-
Line/Bus2 phase angle in range: -Angle 2-2 to -180deg (clockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
1482 CB2 CS AngRotACW
Line freq > (Bus2 freq + 0.001 Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating anticlockwise relative to VBus2)
P544 and P546 only
1483 CB2 CS AngRotCW
Bus2 freq > (Line freq + 0.001 Hz) (Line voltage vector rotating clockwise relative to VBus2)
P544 and P546 only
1484 SChksInactiveCB2
Output from CB2 system check logic: indicates system checks for CB2 are disabled (setting «System Checks CB2» = Disabled or global setting «System Checks» = Disabled)
P544 and P546 only
1485 AR Force CB2 3P Autoreclose
This DDB is set when the autoreclose logic has determined that single pole tripping/autoreclosing is not permitted for CB2. It can be applied in PSL when required to force trip conversion logic for internal and/or external protection to three phase trip mode for CB2.
P544 and P546 only
1486 Not used
1487 Not used
1488 En CB1 Follower
Indicates conditions are satisfied to enable CB1 follower sequence
P544 and P546 only
1489 to 1492 Not used
1493 CB1 CS2 FL>FB
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus1 V is greater than setting «SlipFr1-2» (line freq > Bus freq)
P544 and P546 only
1494 CB1 CS2 FL<FB
Frequency difference between Line V and Bus1 V is greater than setting «SlipFr1-2» (line freq < Bus freq)
P544 and P546 only
1495 CB1 CS2 AngHigh+
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: +Angle 1-2 to +180deg (anticlockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
1496 CB1 CS2 AngHigh-
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: -Angle 1-2 to -180deg (clockwise from Vbus)
P544 and P546 only
1497 Lead AR 1P PSL
If setting «Lead AR Mode» = Opto, then if input DDB «LARSP» is high, the leader CB is enabled for single phase autoreclose, if «LARSP» is low, the leader CB is NOT enabled for single phase autoreclose.
P544 and P546 only
1498 Lead AR 3P PSL
If setting «Lead AR Mode» = Opto, then if input DDB «LAR3P» is high, the leader CB is enabled for three phase autoreclose, if «LAR3P» is low, the leader CB is NOT enabled for three phase autoreclose.
P544 and P546 only
1499 CB2 Trip AR MemA CB2 A Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
1500 CB2 Trip AR MemB CB2 B Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -120
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1501 CB2 Trip AR MemC CB2 C Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
1502 to 1503 Not used
1504 Init APh AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input high-low operation will initiate APh test trip & autoreclose cycle
P544 and P546 only
1505 Init BPh AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input high-low operation will initiate BPh test trip & autoreclose cycle
P544 and P546 only
1506 Init CPh AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input high-low operation will initiate CPh test trip & autoreclose cycle
P544 and P546 only
1507 Init 3P AR Test PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. Input high-low operation will initiate 3Ph test trip & autoreclose cycle
P544 and P546 only
1508 Ext Fault APh PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input: indicates external protection operated for fault involving A phase
P544 and P546 only
1509 Ext Fault BPh PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input: indicates external protection operated for fault involving B phase
P544 and P546 only
1510 Ext Fault CPh PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input: indicates external protection operated for fault involving C phase
P544 and P546 only
1511 to 1516 Not used
1517 Ext Rst CB1 AROK PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when required to reset any CB1 «Successful Autoreclose» signal.
P544 and P546 only
1518 Ext Rst CB1Shots PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when required to reset the CB1 cumulative «Shots» counters.
P544 and P546 only
1519 to 1520 Not used
1521 MCB/VTS CS1 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (Bus1 VT secondary MCB tripped or VT fail detected by external VTS scheme), or signal from host relay VTS scheme
P544 and P546 only
1522 Inhibit LL PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Line function)
P544 and P546 only
1523 Inhibit DL PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Line function)
P544 and P546 only
1524 Inhibit LB1 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Live Bus 1 function)
P544 and P546 only
1525 Inhibit DB1 PSL
DDB mapped in PSL from opto input (external signal to inhibit Dead Bus 1 function)
P544 and P546 only
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 121
DDB no. English text Source Description
1526 CB1 In Service
CB1 In Service (can be initiated for autoreclose)
P544 and P546 only
1527 Not used
1528 CB1 NoAR Autoreclose CB1 not available for autoreclose
P544 and P546 only
1529 Not used
1530 Leader CB1 Autoreclose CB1 set as leader
P544 and P546 only
1531 to 1534 Not used
1535 CB1 Trip AR MemA A Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
1536 CB1 Trip AR MemB B Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
1537 CB1 Trip AR MemC C Ph trip & AR initiation memory
P544 and P546 only
1538 to 1540 Not used
1541 AR Start Autoreclose Any AR initiation signal present
P544 and P546 only
1542 ARIP Autoreclose Any AR cycle in progress
P544 and P546 only
1543 CB1 AR Init Autoreclose CB1 AR cycle initiation
P544 and P546 only
1544 CB1 ARIP Autoreclose CB1 AR cycle in progress
P544 and P546 only
1545 Not used
1546 SC Count>Shots Sequence counts greater than shots
P544 and P546 only
1547 Evolve 3Ph
Convert SPAR to 3PAR. DDB mapped to give 100ms pulse to CB1 Trip 3Ph and CB2 Trip 3Ph outputs
P544 and P546 only
1548 to 1549 Not used
1550 CB1 Failed AR CB1 AR failed due to persistent fault
P544 and P546 only
1551 DTOK All Enabling condition for any dead time
P544 and P546 only
1552 DTOK CB1L 1P required for CB1 lead SPAR D Time
P544 and P546 only
1553 DTOK CB1L 3P required for CB1 lead 3PAR D Time
P544 and P546 only
1554 1P DTime Single pole dead time in progress
P544 and P546 only
1555 OK Time 3P OK to start 3PAR dead time
P544 and P546 only
1556 3P DTime1 3Phase dead time 1 running
P544 and P546 only
1557 3P DTime2 3Phase dead time 2 running
P544 and P546 only
1558 3P DTime3 3Phase dead time 3 running
P544 and P546 only
1559 3P DTime4 3Phase dead time 4 running
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -122
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1560 CB1 3P DTime CB1 3PAR dead time running
P544 and P546 only
1561 1PF TComp Either CB SP follower time complete
P544 and P546 only
1562 3PF TComp Either CB 3P follower time complete
P544 and P546 only
1563 Indep 1PF TComp
Either CB independent SP follower time complete
P544 and P546 only
1564 Indep 3PF TComp
Either CB independent 3P follower time complete
P544 and P546 only
1565 Set CB1 Close DDB (Optional PSL mapping to indication)
P544 and P546 only
1566 CB1 Control Inhibits CB1 reclose by adjacent scheme
P544 and P546 only
1567 1P Reclaim Time Single Ph AR reclaim time running
P544 and P546 only
1568 1P Reclaim TComp Single Ph AR reclaim time complete
P544 and P546 only
1569 3P Reclaim Time Three Ph AR reclaim time running
P544 and P546 only
1570 3P Reclaim TComp Three Ph AR reclaim time complete
P544 and P546 only
1571 CB1 Succ 1P AR CB1 successful single phase AR
P544 and P546 only
1572 CB1 Fast SCOK
OK to reclose CB1 with sync check without waiting for dead time to complete
P544 and P546 only
1573 CB1L SCOK
System conditions OK to reclose CB1 when dead time complete
P544 and P546 only
1574 CB1 Man SCOK
System conditions OK to manually close CB1
P544 and P546 only
1575 CB1 Fail Pr Trip signal to force CB1 AR lockout
P544 and P546 only
1576 Not used
1577 CB2 CS1 OK
CS2-1 is enabled and Line and Bus 2 voltages meet CS2-1 settings
P544 and P546 only
1578 CB1 CS1 SlipF> Line-Bus 1 slip freq > SlipFr 1-1 setting
P544 and P546 only
1579 CB1 CS1 SlipF< Line-Bus 1 slip freq < SlipFr 1-1 setting
P544 and P546 only
1580 CS VLine< Line Volts < CS UV setting
P544 and P546 only
1581 CS VLine> Line Volts > CS OV setting
P544 and P546 only
1582 CS VBus1< Bus1 Volts < CS UV setting
P544 and P546 only
1583 CS VBus1> Bus1 Volts > CS OV setting
P544 and P546 only
1584 CS VBus2< Bus2 Volts < CS UV setting
P544 and P546 only
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 123
DDB no. English text Source Description
1585 CS VBus2> Bus2 Volts > CS OV setting
P544 and P546 only
1586 CB1 CS1 VL>VB Line V > (Bus1 V + [VDiff1-1])
P544 and P546 only
1587 CB1 CS2 VL>VB Line V > (Bus1 V + [VDiff1-2])
P544 and P546 only
1588 CB1 CS1 VL<VB Bus1 V > (Line V + [VDiff1-1])
P544 and P546 only
1589 CB1 CS2 VL<VB Bus1 V > (Line V + [VDiff1-2])
P544 and P546 only
1590 CB1 CS1 FL>FB Line F > (Bus1 F + [SlipFr1-1])
P544 and P546 only
1591 CB1 CS1 FL<FB Bus1 F > (Line F + [SlipFr1-1])
P544 and P546 only
1592 CB1 CS1 AngHigh+
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: +Angle 1-1 to +180deg
P544 and P546 only
1593 CB1 CS1 AngHigh-
Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: -Angle 1-1 to -180deg
P544 and P546 only
1594 CB1 CS AngRotACW
Line freq > (Bus1 freq + 0.001Hz) (CS1 Angle Rotating Anticlockwise)
P544 and P546 only
1595 CB1 CS AngRotCW
Bus1 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz) (CS1 Angle Rotating Clockwise)
P544 and P546 only
1596 Not used
1597 Rst CB2 Data Rst CB2 All Val
P544 and P546 only
1598 CB2 Pre-Lockout Output from CB2 monitoring logic
1599 CB2 LO Alarm CB2 LO Alarm
P544 and P546 only
1600 CB2 Trip 3ph Trip Conversion Logic 3 Phase Trip 2
P544 and P546 only
1601 CB2 Trip OutputA Trip Conversion Logic A Phase Trip 2
P544 and P546 only
1602 CB2 Trip OutputB Trip Conversion Logic B Phase Trip 2
P544 and P546 only
1603 CB2 Trip OutputC Trip Conversion Logic C Phase Trip 2
P544 and P546 only
1604 Force 3PTrip CB2 PSL
External input via DDB to force host relay trip conversion logic to issue a three phase trip signal to CB2 for all faults
P544 and P546 only
1605 Enable AR CB2
External input via DDB to enable CB2, if «in service», to be initiated for autoreclosing by an AR initiation signal from protection. DDB input defaults to high if not mapped in PSL, so CB2 AR initiation is permitted.
P544 and P546 only
1606 Pole Discrep.CB2 PSL Pole Discrepancy
P544 and P546 only
1607 Pole Discrep.CB2 Pole discrepency Pole Discrepancy
P544 and P546 only
1608 CB2 Trip I/P 3Ph PSL Trip 3 Phase — Input to Trip Latching Logic
P544 and P546 only
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -124
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
DDB no. English text Source Description
1609 AR Enable CB1
External input via DDB mapped in PSL to enable CB1, if «in service», to be initiated for autoreclosing by an AR initiation signal from protection. DDB input defaults to high if not mapped in PSL, so CB1 AR initiation is permitted.
P544 and P546 only
1610 to 1615 Not used
1616 PSL Int 101 PSL PSL internal node
1665 PSL Int 150 PSL PSL internal node
1666 Ih(5) Loc Blk A SW 5th harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase A
1667 Ih(5) Loc Blk B SW 5th harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase B
1668 Ih(5) Loc Blk C SW 5th harmonic current ratio exceeds threshold on phase C
1669 Ih(5) Rem Blk A SW Indication that remote end phase A is blocked by 5th harmonic
1670 Ih(5) Rem Blk B SW Indication that remote end phase B is blocked by 5th harmonic
1671 Ih(5) Rem Blk C SW Indication that remote end phase C is blocked by 5th harmonic
1672 to 1695 Not used
1696 IEC Usr 01 Open PSL IEC 61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Open
1697 IEC Usr 01 Close PSL IEC 61850 User Dual Point Status 1 Close
1710 IEC Usr 08 Open PSL IEC 61850 User Dual Point Status 8 Open
1711 IEC Usr 08 Close PSL IEC 61850 User Dual Point Status 8 Close
1712 to 1727 Not Used
1728 Quality VIP 1 GOOSE virtual input 1 — provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message
1759 Quality VIP 32 GOOSE virtual input 32 — provides the Quality attributes of any data object in an incoming GOOSE message
1760 PubPres VIP 1
GOOSE virtual input 1- indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present.
1791 PubPres VIP 32
GOOSE virtual input 32- indicates if the GOOSE publisher responsible for publishing the data that derives a virtual input is present.
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING (P54x/EN MR/La4)
1.4.1 Measured voltages and currents The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current values. They are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle measurement for each individual CT.
Currents mentioned above can be seen on the Measurement 1 column. P54x also shows local and remote currents in Measurement 3 column. These currents have the same treatment as the currents used for differential protection purposes.
1.4.8 Measurement display quantities
There are four Measurement columns available in the relay for viewing of measurement quantities. These can also be viewed with MiCOM S1 Studio (see MiCOM Px40 — Monitoring section of the MiCOM S1 Studio User Manual) and are shown below:
Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Lb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
(AD) — 125
MEASUREMENTS 1 MEASUREMENTS 2 MEASUREMENTS 3 MEASUREMENTS 4
IA Magnitude 0 A A Phase Watts 0 W IA Local 0 A Ch 1 Prop Delay
IA Phase Angle 0 deg B Phase Watts 0 W IA Angle Local 0 deg Ch 2 Prop Delay
IB Magnitude 0 A C Phase Watts 0 W IB Local 0 A Ch1 Rx Prop Delay
IB Phase Angle 0 deg A Phase VArs 0 Var IB Angle Local 0 deg Ch1 Tx Prop Delay
IC Magnitude 0 A B Phase VArs 0 Var IC Local 0 A Ch2 Rx Prop Delay
IC Phase Angle 0 deg C Phase VArs 0 Var IC Angle Local 0 deg Ch2 Tx Prop Delay
IN Derived Mag. 0 A A Phase VA 0 VA IA remote 1 0 A Channel 1 Status
IN Derived Angle 0 deg B Phase VA 0 VA IA Ang remote 1 0 deg Channel 2 Status
ISEF Magnitude 0 A C Phase VA 0 VA IB remote 1 0 A IM64 Rx Status
ISEF Angle 0 deg 3 Phase Watts 0 W IB Ang remote 1 0 deg STATISTICS
I1 Magnitude 0 A 3 Phase VArs 0 VAr IC remote 1 0 A Last Reset on
I2 Magnitude 0 A 3 Phase VA 0 VA IC Ang remote 1 0 deg Date/Time
I0 Magnitude 0 A 3Ph Power Factor 0 IA remote 2 0 A Ch1 No.Vald Mess
IA RMS 0 A APh Power Factor 0 IA Ang remote 2 0 deg Ch1 No.Err Mess
IB RMS 0 A BPh Power Factor 0 IB remote 2 0 A Ch1 No.Errored s
IC RMS 0 A CPh Power Factor 0 IB Ang remote 2 0 deg Ch1 No.Sev Err s
IN RMS 0 A 3Ph WHours Fwd 0 Wh IC remote 2 0 A Ch1 No. Dgraded m
VAB Magnitude 0 V 3Ph WHours Rev 0 Wh IC Ang remote 2 0 deg Ch2 No.Vald Mess
VAB Phase Angle 0 deg 3Ph VArHours Fwd 0 VArh IA Differential 0 A Ch2 No.Err Mess
VBC Magnitude 0 V 3Ph VArHours Rev 0 VArh IB Differential 0 A Ch2 No.Errored s
VBC Phase Angle 0 deg 3Ph W Fix Demand 0 W IC Differential 0 A Ch2 No.Sev Err s
VCA Magnitude 0 V 3Ph VArs Fix Dem. 0 VAr IA Bias 0 A Ch2 No. Dgraded m
VCA Phase Angle 0 deg IA Fixed Demand 0 A IB Bias 0 A Max Ch 1 Prop Delay
VAN Magnitude 0 V IB Fixed Demand 0 A IC Bias 0 A Max Ch 2 Prop Delay
VAN Phase Angle 0 deg IC Fixed Demand 0 A Max Ch1 TxRx Time
VBN Magnitude 0 V 3 Ph W Roll Dem. 0 W Max Ch2 TxRx Time
VBN Phase Angle 0 deg 3Ph VArs Roll Dem. 0 VAr Clear Statistics
VCN Magnitude 0 V IA Roll Demand 0 A
VCN Phase Angle 0 deg IB Roll Demand 0 A
IC Roll Demand 0 A
3Ph W Peak Dem. 0 W
V1 Magnitude 0 V 3Ph VAr Peak Dem. 0 VAr
V2 Magnitude 0 V IA Peak Demand 0 A
V0 Magnitude 0 V IB Peak Demand 0 A
VAN RMS 0 V IC Peak Demand 0 A
VBN RMS 0 V Reset Demand No
VCN RMS 0 V
VAB RMS 0 V
VBC RMS 0 V
VCA RMS 0 V
Frequency
CB1 CS Volt Mag 0 V
CB1 CS Volt Ang 0 deg
CB1 Bus-Line Ang 0 deg
CB1 CS Slip Freq
IM Magnitude 0 A
IM Phase Angle 0 deg
I1 Magnitude 0 A
P54x/EN AD/LKb4 Update Documentation (AD) -126
MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546
MEASUREMENTS 1 MEASUREMENTS 2 MEASUREMENTS 3 MEASUREMENTS 4
I1 Phase Angle 0 deg
I2 Magnitude 0 A
I2 Phase Angle 0 deg
I0 Magnitude 0 A
I0 Phase Angle 0 deg
V1 Magnitude 0 V
V1 Phase Angle 0 deg
V2 Magnitude 0 V
V2 Phase Angle 0 deg
V0 Magnitude 0 V
V0 Phase Angle 0 deg
CB2 CS Volt Mag 0 V
CB2 CS Volt Ang 0 deg
CB2 Bus-Line Ang 0 deg
CB2 CS Slip Freq
VRem Magnitude 0 V
VRem Phase Ang 0 deg
IA CT1 Magnitude 0 A
IA CT1 Phase Ang 0 deg
IB CT1 Magnitude 0 A
IB CT1 Phase Ang 0 deg
IC CT1 Magnitude 0 A
IC CT1 Phase Ang 0 deg
IA CT2 Magnitude 0 A
IA CT2 Phase Ang 0 deg
IB CT2 Magnitude 0 A
IB CT2 Phase Ang 0 deg
IC CT2 Magnitude 0 A
IC CT2 Phase Ang 0 deg
FIRMWARE AND SERVICE MANUAL VERSION HISTORY (P54x/EN VH/Lb4)
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-127
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
01 A A Feb 2000 First release to production V1.07 or Later TG8613A
02 A A Mar 2000
PSB. Three settings added to set zone 6 to increase flexibility
Protection address. Universal address added
SEF & EF. Polarizing voltage setting range increased
Thermal. Setting range increased
Trip conversion logic. 3 DDB signals added to simplify logic for users
Distance. Min polarizing voltage increased to prevent tripping for close up three phase faults
Check sync. angle measurement improved
PSB. Text for power swing indication improved
Include pole discrepancy logic to P543
Susceptance setting corrected
V1.08 or Later TG8613B
03 A A May 2000
German text changed
Spanish text changed
Changes to DDB names & properties
Improvements in auto-reclose and reset from lockout code
Changes to pole dead & trip conversion logic
Changes to P544 circuit breaker fail logic
Added DDB for CS103 test mode
Recommend upgrading to 03B software or later
V1.09 or Later TG8613B
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-128
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
03 Cont. B A Feb 2002
All builds released for maintenance upgrades
Resolved possible reboot caused by disturbance recorder
Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS requests
Resolved a loss of measurements (column 3 & 4) problem that can occur in 3 terminal applications
Problem whereby MiCOM S1 could only set group 1 line length corrected
Fixed capacitive charging current compensation in P544
Corrected P544 display of phase C current phase angle
IDMT curves improvements
Removed rounding error in calculation of tp
Menu dependence using ripple bit corrected
Directional/non-direction earth fault fixed
Battery fail alarm improvements
Power measurements read over MODBUS may be incorrect
Resolved problem caused by rapid changing self resetting alarm resetting the relay when read key pressed
Prevented software errors from clearing event log
V1.09 or Later TG8613B
A A Aug 2000 Trip conversion logic moved from internal fixed logic to PSL V1.10 or Later TG8613B
B A Mar 2001 Only P543 CS103 builds released
Improvements to the CS103 time synchronization V1.10 or Later TG8613B
C A Jun 2001 Only P543 CS103 builds released. Based on 04B
Resolved a loss of measurements (columns 3 & 4) problem that can occur in 3 terminal applications
V1.10 or Later TG8613B 04
D A Jun 2001 Only P543 CS103 build released. Based on 04C
Prevents a reboot on power-up when battery is removed V1.10 or Later TG8613B
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-129
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A A Sep 2000
Internal release for validation only
Includes DNP3.0
Courier bay module compatibility modification
MODBUS bay module compatibility modification
Distance — Z3 selectable forward/reverse
Spanish text corrected
Menu dependence using ripple bit corrected
MODBUS problem reading negative values of fault location corrected
RDF file modified
Directional/non-direction earth fault fixed
Battery fail alarm corrected
Very low fault location could be shown incorrectly as negative
Some MODBUS address changed
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
B A Oct 2000
Released to production
Includes all of 05A changes
Requirement to use relays 8, 9 & 10 for Trip A, B & C removed
MODBUS communication problem when used with P140 fixed
Power measurements read over MODBUS may be incorrect
MODBUS status register reports disturbance records incorrectly following power cycle
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
C A Mar 2001 Only P543 & P544 builds released for customer tests
PSB now works with single pole open V2.0 or Later TG8613B
05
D A May 2001
Only P543 & P544 builds released for customer tests
Distance directional line fixed at -30º
PSB block issued when impedance passes into any Z1, Z2 or Z3
PSB unblock via negative sequence current now done via PSL
New PSL will be required
—
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-130
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
E A Jun 2001
All builds released to production. Based on 05B software
Resolved a loss of measurements (column 3 & 4) problem that can occur in 3 terminal applications
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
F A Sep 2001
All builds released to production. Based on 05E software
Problem whereby MiCOM S1 could only set group 1 line length corrected
Fixed capacitive charging current compensation in P544
Corrected P544 display of phase C current phase angle
IDMT curves improvements
Removed rounding error in calculation of tp
Fixed problems caused by changes to DNP3.0 address
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
G A Jan 2002
All builds except MODBUS released to production. Based on 05F software
Resolved possible reboot caused by disturbance recorder
Problem in MODBUS build which can cause a reboot
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
H A Jan 2002
All builds released to production. Based on 05G software
Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS requests
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
05 Cont.
I A Oct 2002
Limited release — not released to production. Based on 05H software
Correct the format used to display frequency over the MODBUS interface
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-131
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
J A Nov 2002
All builds released to production. Based on 05I software
Resolved incorrect operation of C diff failure alarm in 3 terminal schemes
Correct operation of capacitive charging current compensation in 3 terminal schemes
Resolved problem which caused short duration current differential trips in some applications
Recommended upgrading to 05K or later
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
K A Feb 2003 All builds released to production. Based on 05I software
Resolved problem with IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization V2.0 or Later TG8613B
L A Jan 2004
Maintenance release based on 05K (not formally released)
Prevents compressed disturbance recorder stalling
Prevent a maintenance record when reading from an inaccessible MODBUS register
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
M A Jun 2004
Maintenance release based on 05L
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Improved self checking of SRAM
Reception of MODBUS frame improved
Rejection of spurious messages injected onto RS485 network improved
Permissive intertrip in dual redundant schemes corrected
V2.0 or Later TG8613B
05 Cont.
N A Jun 2005 Maintenance release based on 05M
Changed MODBUS driver V2.0 or Later TG8613B
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-132
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A A May 2001
Internal Release for validation only — runs on phase 1 hardware with an old co-processor board
In non GPS mode the char modification timer has been made visible in P545/6
The char modification timer setting was not being seen by the co-processor board
GPS detected flag was not cleared when switching from GPS to non GPS mode
Equal prop delay command was not resetting inhibit following a comms. switch
Problem displaying Rx & Tx when comms. path was short fixed
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
— —
06
B A Jun 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 1 hardware with an old co-processor board
Prevent loss of measurements in 3 ended schemes
Added a 1s drop off timer to C diff inhibit
Changed max value of char mod timer to 2s
Increased number of PSL timers to 16 (all models)
Corrected PSL default reference
Added a setting to P543/5 AR to select which edge of trip initiates AR
Added 3 DDB signals to block distance
Removed force 3 pole trip DDB
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
— —
07 A A Feb 2002 Limited release (P543 only) — not released to production. Based on 05K software
Additional check sync signals added to PSL V2.08 or Later —
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-133
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
10 A B Feb 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 1 hardware with a modified co-processor board to accept a 1pps input
GPS synchronization
Flexible intertripping
Signaling message format changed
Models 5 & 6 (but limited to 16 optos & 14 relays)
Remains of neutral C diff removed
Event optimization & filtering
Watt hour measurement correction
Addition of digital opto filtering control
Changes & additions to error codes
Increase in protection signaling address
DDB increased in size to 1022 and also support functions changed
Support for universal optos (model number suffix B)
Support for new output relays added
No official release to support this version. Will need V2 to extract PSL files
—
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-134
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A B Feb 2001
Internal loopback setting added (not full functional)
PSL references added
Reset LEDs DDB name change
Text for cells 0F20 — 0F2F changed
Problem whereby MiCOM S1 could only set group 1 line length corrected
Control inputs added
Restore defaults now restores DNP3.0 cells correctly
Prevent non DNP3.0 builds generating fatal error when S1 request DNP3.0 upload
MODBUS enabling/disabling of IRIG-B now works
Courier/MODBUS event bit functionality corrected
DNP3.0 & MODBUS address are compatible but there are several new ones
Software is not compatible with previous software (signaling message)
No official release to support this version. Will need V2 to extract PSL files
—
10 Cont.
B B Apr 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 1 hardware with a modified co-processor board to accept a 1pps input
Fixed a reset indications problem in CS103 build
Fixed a problem with P544 display of phase C current phase angle
Setting relay address via rear port corrupted other setting ranges
As per 10A —
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-135
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
C B May 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 2 hardware with a new co-processor board
Support for new co-processor board added
In non GPS mode the char modification timer has been made visible in P545/6
The char modification timer setting was not being seen by the co-processor board
GPS detected flag was not cleared when switching from GPS to non GPS mode
Equal prop delay command was not resetting inhibit following a comms. switch
Problem displaying Rx & Tx when comms. path was short fixed
Opto filtering corrected
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
As per 10A —
10 Cont.
D B Jun 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 2 hardware with a new co-processor board
Prevent loss of measurements in 3 ended schemes
Added a 1s drop off timer to C diff inhibit
Changed max value of char mod timer to 2s
Increased number of PSL timers to 16 (all models)
Corrected PSL default reference
Added a setting to P543/5 AR to select which edge of trip initiates AR
Added 3 DDB signals to block distance
Removed force 3 pole trip DDB
Resolved problem caused by rapid changing self resetting alarm resetting the relay when read key pressed
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
V2.01b
(not issued) —
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-136
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
10 Cont. E B Jul 2001
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 2 hardware with a new co-processor board
Fixed capacitive charging current compensation in P544 & P546
Fixed fast operating times for IDMT at a particular multiply of setting
Added MODBUS control of opto filter cell
Removed the quick start up for GPS because it was causing general startup problems
Fixed the GPS inhibit in dual redundant mode
Fixed an error in GPS synchronization when a timer wraps round
Fixed comms. delay equal command in 3 terminal schemes
CS103 time sync modified not to generate courier events
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
V2.01b
(not issued) —
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-137
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
10 Cont. F
B
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 2 hardware with a new co-processor board
Added CS103 private codes
Added uncompressed disturbance recorder to CS103 build
Added translations for filter control
Fixed the GI list for P545 & P546
Fixed the incorrect response in three terminal mode with GPS present and running on a split path followed by a power cycle at one end
Fixed the occasional incorrect calculation of tp being caused by rounding errors
Fixed the incorrect response in dual redundant schemes with GPS failure followed by a switch to a split path on one channel and a comms. failure on the other
Prevented software errors from clearing event log
Unextracted disturbance records now set the courier status flag on power up
Added support for MODBUS function code 7
Corrected the MODBUS status bit 0
Corrected the OTEV bit in the status of fault in IEC60870-5-103
Menu text files do not contain the additional translations
Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production
V2.01b
(not issued)
—
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-138
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A B Sep 2001
First phase 2 release to production
Includes all of 10F
Added CS103 monitor/command blocking
PSB now uses 6 comparators
Distance directional line fixed at -30º
PSB block issued when impedance passes into any Z1, Z2 or Z3
PSB unblock via negative sequence current now done via PSL
Modified co-processor initiation to run on 1 wait state (memory access problem)
Fixed a problem with P545 & P546 opto & relay labels in disturbance record
Fixed the GPS inhibit
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
11
B B Oct 2001
All builds released to production. Based on 11A software
Modified the co-processor start-up routine to work with alternative types of SRAM
Improved response to a CS103 poll class 1 when monitor blocked was active
Resolved a time alignment problem which resulted in C diff failure alarms being raised
Corrected some MODBUS address for P545 & P546
Fixed a problem with the relays response to MODBUS commands read coils and read inputs
Fixed an incorrect response to a DNP3.0 command
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-139
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
C B Dec 2001
All builds released to production. Based on 11B software
Fixed a problem in P541 & P542 CS103 builds where the voltage and power measurements were not being marked as invalid
Fixed a problem in P544 & P546 where the SEF current measurement was incorrect when set to 1A & 60 Hz
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
D B Jan 2002
All builds released to production. Based on 11C software
Resolved possible reboot caused by disturbance recorder
Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS requests
Resolved problem when internal loopback was selected with external clocks
Resolved a problem which caused the loss of IEC 60870-5-103 class 1 messages
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11 11 Cont.
E B Oct 2002
All builds released to production. Based on 11D software
Resolved incorrect operation of C diff failure alarm in 3 terminal schemes
Correct operation of capacitive charging current compensation in 3 terminal schemes
Resolved problem which caused short duration GPS failure alarms
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-140
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
F B Feb 2003
All builds ready. Based on 11E software
Resolved several problems related to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Resolved problem which may cause short duration current differential trips
Corrected the format used to display frequency over the MODBUS interface
Recommended upgrading to 11G or later
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
G B May 2003
All builds ready. Based on 11F software
Changes to clock recovery circuits to improve operation with multiplexers.
PSL logic for user defined intertrips corrected P545 & P546
Permissive intertrip in dual redundant schemes corrected
Prevented unwanted comms. delay alarms
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
11 Cont.
H B Sept 2003
All builds ready. Based on 11G software
Prevents compressed disturbance recorder stalling
Prevents CS103 reporting more non-compressed disturbance records than actually present
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-141
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
I B Oct 2004
All builds released to production. Based on 11G software
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct FAN
SRAM self checking added to co-processor board
Reception of MODBUS frame improved
Rejection of spurious messages injected onto RS485 network improved
Improved self checking of SRAM
Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Prevented incorrect behavior of P545/P546 when one relay is energized when there is noise on the signaling channel
Status of local GPS reported incorrectly in dual redundant schemes
Setting “Char Mod Time” was missing on P541 — P544
Prevent a maintenance record when reading from an inaccessible MODBUS register
Prevents relay crashing when phase 2 software used with phase 1 optos
Cell 0709 now replies OK change
V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
11 Cont.
J B Jul 2005 All builds released to production. Based on 11I software
Changed MODBUS driver V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-142
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A B Mar 2002
Released for validation testing only
2nd rear comms. added
Alarms increased to 64 with user programmable alarms
Enhancements and corrections to CS103
Prevented additional events being generated on power up
French language text improvements
Prevent a maintenance record when reading from an inaccessible MODBUS register
Setting “Char Mod Time” was missing on P541 — P544
Prevents relay crashing when phase 2 software used with phase 1 optos
Cell 0709 now replies OK change
Maximum pre-trigger time for disturbance recorder in IEC 870-103-5 builds reduced to allow extraction via rear port
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
12
B B Nov 2002
All builds released to production. Based on 12A software
Resolved incorrect operation of C diff failure alarm in 3 terminal schemes
Correct operation of capacitive charging current compensation in 3 terminal schemes
Resolved problem which caused short duration GPS failure alarms
Resolved problem selecting setting group via optos
Resolved a circuit breaker lockout problem
Corrected the thermal measurement displayed when thermal protection is disabled
Spanish text for user defined alarms contained an extra letter
Blocked overcurrent elements now generate events
Correct DNP3.0 operation of object 10
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-143
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
12 Cont. B B Nov 2002
Resolved problem with P541 & P542 IEC 60870-5-103 builds not running
Resolved a problem with IEC 60870-5-103 class 1 polling
Resolved a problem with IEC 60870-5-103 ASDU2 events which occurred prior to a start event
Correct the format used to display frequency over the MODBUS interface
Resolved problem related to incorrect CB trip/close commands via MODBUS
Resolved problem related to CB trip/close commands via MODBUS being accepted when not selected
Resolved a problem which prevented protection setting being saved after control and support setting had been saved
Corrected the saving of fault locator settings in groups 2, 3, 7 & 4 when made via user interface
Added object 10 to DNP3.0 class 0 poll
Corrected the way DNP3.0 handled the season bit in the time & date
Recommended upgrading to 12D or later
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-144
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
C B Mar 2003
All builds released to production. Based on 12B software
Resolved several problems related to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Resolved problem which may cause short duration current differential trips
Improved self diagnostics relating to input module clock
Modified courier block transfer mechanism so it can handle more than 255 blocks
Intermittent loss of data from 2nd rear comms. port corrected
PSL logic for user defined intertrips corrected P545 & P546
Permissive intertrip in dual redundant schemes corrected
Recommended upgrading to 12D or later
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
D B Jun 2003
All builds released to production. Based on 12C software
Changes to clock recovery circuits to improve operation with multiplexers
Prevented unwanted comms. delay alarms
V2.05 or later P54x/EN T/E21
E B Sept 2003
All builds released to production. Based on 12D software
Prevents compressed disturbance recorder stalling
Correction to operation of reset relays/LEDs opto
Prevents CS103 reporting more non-compressed disturbance records than actually present
V2.05 or later P54x/EN T/E21
12 Cont.
F B Jun 2004
Not released to production. Supplied to one customer. Based on 12E software
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct FAN
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-145
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
G B Oct 2004
All builds released to production. Based on 12E software
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct FAN
SRAM self checking added to co-processor board
Reception of MODBUS frame improved
Rejection of spurious messages injected onto RS485 network improved
Improved self checking of SRAM
Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Prevented incorrect behavior of P545/P546 when one relay is energized when there is noise on the signaling channel
Status of local GPS reported incorrectly in dual redundant schemes
V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
H B May 2005 All builds released to production. Based on 12G software
Changed MODBUS driver V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
12 Cont.
I B May 2006 All builds released to production. Based on 12G software
Improvements to the distance protection V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-146
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
A B Apr 2004
All builds released to production. Based on 12E software
Control inputs enhancements including non-volatile, latched, pulsed and support for DNP3.0 pulsed.
Enhanced DNP3.0
Distance Residual compensation angle range extended
Display of number of good messages via MODBUS is corrected
Prevented DNP3.0 time sync causes relay to reboot when IRIG-B is active
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Improved self checking of SRAM
Added TRIP & ALARM to MODBUS status word
Addition of MODBUS only setting to allow transmission of IEC time format in reverse IEC byte order
Reception of MODBUS frame improved
Rejection of spurious messages injected onto RS485 network improved
Handling of FAN in IEC 60870-5-103 improved
Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct FAN
V2.10 or later P54x/EN T/E21
13
B B Aug 2004
All builds released to production. Based on 13A software
SRAM self checking added to co-processor board
Fault location & cumulative broken current measurements reported over DNP3.0
Accuracy of MODBUS time sync improved
Invalid MODBUS register 4×00966 removed
Reception of MODBUS frame improved
V2.10 or Later (DNP3.0 files) different to 13A
P54x/EN T/E21
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-147
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
C B Oct 2004
All builds released to production. Based on 13B software
Resolved a problem relating to co-processor SRAM checking
Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Prevented incorrect behavior of P545/P546 when one relay is energized when there is noise on the signaling channel
Status of local GPS reported incorrectly in dual redundant schemes
V2.10 or Later (DNP3.0 files) different to 13A
P54x/EN T/E21
D B Mar 2005
All builds released to production. Based on 13C software
Correction to single pole auto-reclose
Remapped fun/inf. 192/130 in P543 & P545
Display of no. valid messages on LCD corrected
DNP3.0 improved binary scanning
Operation of CB maintenance alarm corrected
Corrections to allow extended courier characters to be used in string setting cells for courier and MODBUS
Corrected default display of neutral current for 5A CTs
Prevented a reboot for DNP3.0 versions when control & support settings are changed rapidly
Changes to co-processor start-up to eliminate a timing problem
V2.10 or Later (DNP3.0 files) different to 13A
P54x/EN T/E21
13 Cont.
E B Apr 2005 All builds released to production. Based on 13D software
Changed MODBUS driver
V2.10 or Later (DNP3.0 files) different to 13A
P54x/EN T/E21
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-148
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
13 Cont. F B Jun 2006
All builds released to production. Based on 13E software
Improvements to the distance protection
Add interframe gap to DNP3.0
Corrections to IRIG-B
Vector group compensations for YY2 and YY10 corrected
Corrected reporting of distance & C diff stars over CS103
Reports the correct COT for reset LEDs command sent via S1
Corrected a problem which occurs when two relays power up when one is configured out
V2.10 or Later (DNP3.0 files) different to 13A
P54x/EN T/E21
16 A B Jul 2006 Release of P543 CS103 for Germany only. Based on 13F
CS103/Auto-reclose modifications Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN T/E21
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-149
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
20 A G Nov 2002
Internal release for validation only — runs on phase 2 processor board. Based on 12B
UCA2 option added
Russian text added (not complete)
Added fault location to for IEC 60870-5-103
Added TRIP & ALARM to MODBUS status word
Distance direction setting added
Distance residual compensation angle range extended
Indication of password status on DDB (code added but not run)
Improvements to auto-reclose
Alarms increased to 96
Corrected the response to courier SEND EVENT
Improved self diagnostics relating to input module clock
Removed the setting for IEC 60870-5-103 over fiber when hardware not present
Resolved problem related to CB trip/close commands via MODBUS being accepted when not selected
Corrected the saving of fault locator settings in groups 2, 3 & 4 when made via user interface
Added object 10 to DNP3.0 class 0 poll
Corrected the way DNP3.0 handled the season bit in the time & date
— —
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-150
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
B G Apr 2003
Internal release for validation only. Based on 20A
Enhanced check synchronization feature
Control inputs enhancements including non-volatile, latched, pulsed and support for DNP3.0 pulsed
BBRAM used in disturbance recorder optimized
Resolved several problems related to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Resolved problem which may cause short duration current differential trips
Improved self diagnostics relating to input module clock
Modified courier block transfer mechanism so it can handle more than 255 blocks
— —
B G Apr 2003
PSL logic for user defined intertrips corrected P545 & P546
Permissive intertrip in dual redundant schemes corrected
Operation of manual reset alarms corrected
A number of bug fixes relating to CPU2
— —
20 Cont.
C G Apr 2003
Internal release for validation only. Based on 20B
CB control via hot keys
A number of bug fixes relating to CPU2
— —
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-151
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
D G Jul 2003
Internal release for validation only. Based on 20C
Changes to clock recovery circuits to improve operation with multiplexers
Prevented unwanted comms. delay alarms
Enhanced auto-reclose feature added
Alarms handled better in CS103 GI
Time synchronization via opto added
Platform alarms copied to DDB
Correction to operation of reset relays/LEDs opto.
Backup protection run if co-processor fails to start up on power on
Correction to cell 0B25
A number of bug fixes relating to CPU2
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/F32
20 Cont.
E G Oct 2003
Limited release for NiCAP + selected others
Extraction of disturbance recorder over MODBUS added
Resolve nucleus missing HISR problems
Enhancements to IDMT curves
Display of number of good messages via MODBUS is corrected
A number of bug fixes relating to CPU2
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/F32
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-152
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
F G Feb 2004
Release to production
UCA2: Increase max. pending requests & max. connected clients
Enhanced DNP3.0
Prevented DNP3.0 time sync causes relay to reboot when IRIG-B is active
Corrected cause of transmission which may be returned for «Fault Location»
Prevents relay rebooting during EMC ANSI fast transient and IEC high frequency
A number of bug fixes relating to CPU2
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/F32
20 Cont.
G G Jun 2004
Release to production. Based on 20F software
Prevented repeated downloads of GSL files without Ethernet card restart rebooting Ethernet card
Correction to uploading of disturbance records over UCA2
Corrected operation of Ethernet card link LED for 10 Base-FL
Closed UCA2 association after «dirty» client disconnection
Made UCA2 disturbance record directory service compatible with PACiS
Corrected under and over voltage blocking of check sync
Improved self-checking of analogue data acquisition
Handling of FAN in IEC 60870-5-103 improved
Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct FAN
Prevented C diff fail alarm occurs before signaling fail alarm for loss of communications
Improved self checking of SRAM
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-153
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
H G Oct 2004
Release to production. Based on 20G software
SRAM self checking added to co-processor board
Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Prevented incorrect behavior of P545/P546 when one relay is energized when there is noise on the signaling channel
Status of local GPS reported incorrectly in dual redundant schemes
Accuracy of MODBUS time sync improved
Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Prevented Ethernet card restarting after approximately 20 hours when no connection made
Improvements to time sync for courier, CS103 and DNP3.0
Invalid MODBUS register 4×00966 removed
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
I G Nov 2004
Release to production. Based on 20G software
Display of no. valid messages on LCD corrected
Operation of CB maintenance alarm corrected
Corrections to allow extended courier characters to be used in string setting cells for courier and MODBUS
Corrected default display of neutral current for 5A CTs
Prevented a reboot for MODBUS versions during event extraction when messages where close together
Correction to prevent the 2nd rear comms. locking up
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
20 Cont.
J G Apr 2006
Release to production. Based on 20G software
Correction to IEEE/US inverse reset setting
Changes to co-processor start-up to eliminate a timing problem
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-154
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
K G Apr 2006
Release to production. Based on 20G software
Improvements to the distance protection
Add interframe gap to DNP3.0
Corrections to IRIG-B
Vector group compensations for YY2 and YY10 corrected
Corrected reporting of distance & C diff stars over CS103
Reports the correct COT for reset LEDs command sent via S1
Corrected a problem which occurs when two relays power up when one is configured out
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
L G
P545 Release to Production. Based on 20K software.
Resolved a problem which interrupted the UCA2 communications periodically
Resolved a problem relating to CT Ratio’s not being restored when restoring default settings
Resolved a problem with the Disturbance Recorder which saturates for High current levels into 5A CT.
Resolved problem with relay recognising non zero entry in 14th position of model number
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42 20 Cont.
M G Nov 2009
Release to Production. Based on 20L software.
Improvements to the GPS code
Improvements in the clock recover circuits used by the Differential Comms
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Correction to autoreclose operation for switch on to fault condition
Prevented CB Operating Time displaying 4.295Ms
Bug Fixes
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-155
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
20 Cont. N G
Release to Production. Based on 20M software.
Prevented the Differential protection inhibiting in three terminal schemes when GPS is enabled and loopback mode selected
Fault locator measurements in ohms corrected when 5A CT used or displayed in primary.
V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/G42
30 A J Sep 2004
Released to selected customers only. Based on 20G
Interface to optical multiplexer (IEEE standard C37.94)
SRAM checking in co-processor
Dual range optos
AREVA livery & software changes
Extended residual angle in fault locator to match distance
Rename GOOSE signals in line with P443
Add virtual signals, control inputs & user alarms to DR in line with P443
Relay settings shall be stored in FLASH EEPROM instead of EEPROM memory
Extend range of time dial to line up with P140
Accuracy of MODBUS time sync improved
Invalid MODBUS register 4×00966 removed
Improvements to time sync for courier, CS103 and DNP3.0
Addition of MODBUS only time and date format setting to common courier settings for access from the other interfaces
Vector group compensations for YY2 and YY10 corrected
Prevented Ethernet card restarting after approximately 20 hours when no connection made
Prevented incorrect behavior of P545/P546 when one relay is energized when there is noise on the signaling channel
V2.09 or Later (No language file support)
P54x/EN T/G42
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-156
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
B J Nov 2004 Released to production but held. Based on 30A
Courier, MODBUS & DNP3.0 communications over Fiber added
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
C J Nov 2004
Released to production. Based on 30B
Correction to prevent the 2nd rear comms. locking up
Correction to prevent the front panel UI and comms. lockup after continued operation
Changes to co-processor start-up to eliminate a timing problem
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
D J Dec 2004 Released to production. Based on 30C
Improvements to operation when subjected to multiple communication switches when operating in non-GPS mode
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
E J Jan 2005
Released to production. Based on 30D
VTS enhanced to restore 3 software version 20 performance for three pole tripping whist keeping the improvements for 1 pole tripping added at 30B
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
F J Mar 2005
Released to production. Based on 30E
Enhancements to the current differential performance under switched communication channels
Correction to the CS103 mapping for platform alarms
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
G J Apr 2006 Released to production. Based on 30E
Correction to IEEE/US Inverse reset setting V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
30 Cont.
H J Apr 2006 Limited release P542 DNP3.0 to a customer
Add interframe gap to DNP3.0 V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-157
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
30 Cont. I J May 2005
Released to production. Based on 30G
Improvements to the distance protection
Add interframe gap to DNP3.0
Corrections to IRIG-B
Vector group compensations for YY2 and YY10 corrected
Corrected reporting of distance & C diff stars over CS103
Reports the correct COT for reset LEDs command sent via S1
Corrected a problem which occurs when two relays power up when one is configured out
Modification to allow individual MODBUS register access
V2.11 or Later P54x/EN T/H53
40 A K May 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection
CTS
Definitive time directional negative sequence overcurrent I2>
GPS synchronization of current differential in all models
P543 and P545 now facilitate in zone transformer-feeder applications
All models support ABC and ACB phase rotation
Standard and Inverted CT polarity setting for each set of CTs in the relay
User interface with tri colored LED and function keys
InterMiCOM64
Voltage protection
Backwards compatibility mode
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/I64
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-158
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
41 C K Jul 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 40A
IEC 61850-8-1
High break options
Demodulated IRIG-B options
Reduction of distance minimum reach settings to 0.05 ohm
Permissive trip reinforcement
Poledead modifications for Hydro Quebec
CS103/auto-reclose modifications
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
41 D K Aug 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 41C
Prevents a possible reboot 15 minutes after browsing the front courier port but not making a setting change i.e. browsing using PAS&T.
Extended GOOSE Enrolment Capability
Correction to ICD files, Enumeration (value) and Fixed data Mapping
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
41 E K Nov 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 41D
Prevent a reboot in 61850 builds when NIC link is inactive and avalanche of DDB activity.
Correctly report a fatal error generated by the sampling call-back
Correct the operation of the GOOSE messaging and a problem with the download of an IED Configuration file.
Correct the operation of the check sync.
Correct the operation of the overcurrent reset curves.
Removed check on the14th position of model number
Fixed Telegrams for public inf 64-67
SOTF can operate even when it is disabled
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-159
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
41 F K May 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 41E
Prevent a fatal error from an incorrect DNP address in not using DNP evolutions platform.
Default setting for 450B ‘I< Current Set’ reduced to 50mA
French Translations for DDBs 1368-1371corrected
Fun & INF values related to CS103 Command Blocking corrected
Angle for negative sequence phase overcurrent setting corrected
Corrected operation when using MiCOM S1 is used to activate Settings group by right clicking on the group.
Corrected the latching of Function Key DDB signals on relay power up
Corrected Disturbance recorder scaling to prevent high current levels into 5A CT causing the Disturbance Recorder to saturate
Restring defaults appears not to change the 1/5A CT selection
Corrected the performance of the IM64 Direct mode
CB control via Direct access does not work with 2CB versions of P540D
Autoreclose dead time/close cycle continues even if AR switched out of service
Ch2 Statistics may not be displayed
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
41 G K
P543, P544, P545 & P546 non 61850 builds without distance protection based on 41F was approved for release but withdrawn before release.
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
41 H K May 2007 Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 41G
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-160
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
42 A K
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection
Chinese interface
Replacing the existing DNP3 with the DNP3 evolutions
Replacement of existing negative sequence overcurrent with multi stage (2 IDMT + 2 DT) negative sequence overcurrent.
Addition of IDG curve, commonly used in Sweden, to Earth Fault & Sensitive Earth Fault (involves moving settings)
Reduction of all TMS step sizes to 0.005
Addition of Channel propagation delay Statistics and Alarms
Changes to CTS so both techniques can be selected together
Regrouping of CTS settings
Addition of four stages of under frequency protection and two stages of Overfrequency protection
Addition of df/dt protection
Changes to Under and Overvoltage to enable each stage to be independently set
Extensions to the checksync VT position setting
Changes to Permissive Inter Trip (PIT) logic to enable the user to select either local or remote current to be used.
Includes local time zone settings for Date & Time
Reduced minimum setting for IN> I2pol Set
Addition of propagation delay times to Fault Record
Default setting for 450B ‘I< Current Set’ reduced to 50mA.
Enhancement to self checking of output relays
Change tunnelled courier address to follow the 1st Rear Port’s KBUS or CS103 address.
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-161
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
42 B K July 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42A.
Improvements to VTS
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose
Resolved a problem relating to CT Ratio’s not being restored when restoring default settings
Resolved a problem with the Disturbance Recorder which saturates for High current levels into 5A CT.
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
42 D K Dec 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42B.
Fixed a number of 61850/Goose problems
Minor correction to fault record
Corrections to over voltage stage 2 inhibit
Fixed the max prop alarm
Corrected some DDB German text
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
42 E K May 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42D.
Fixed a number of 61850 problems
Improved co-processor error reporting
Fixed Inhibit CB Fail Protection in P544/6
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
42 F K
Not released to production. Based on 42E.
Correction to autoreclose operation for switch on to fault condition
Prevented CB Operating Time displaying 4.295Ms
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
42 G K Oct 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42F.
Correction to the distance cross polarising when the memory expires
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-162
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
42 H K Sept 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42G.
Corrected some menu translations
Corrected Breaker Fail — WI Aided1 trips so they can be disabled via setting «WI Prot Reset»
Timestamp in fault record adjusted for the local time setting.
Corrected P543 default PSL
Corrections to the Current Differential Inhibit when the GPS synchronisation is disabled
Corrected Thermal State measurement via DNP3
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Improvements to the GPS code
Prevented CTS generating events when CTS is disabled
Prevent Z5 from setting slow swing when PSB is disabled
Fixed problem which prevented residual overvoltage from initiating CB Fail
Various improvements to DNP, CS103 & IEC61850 protocols
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.12
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-163
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
44 A K Mar 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 42D.
Positional information added to PSL.
DNP 3.0 Over Ethernet protocol added.
Extended I/O – status inputs increased from 24 to 32.
Compensated overvoltage protection added
IEC-103 Generic Services Measurements added
Set/Reset Latch Logic Gates added to PSL
Fault record to include current differential currents recorded at the time of the current differential trip in addition to the existing data from 1 cycle later.
Fault record increased max number of fault records to 15
GPS Alarm modifications
DNP enhancements for SSE
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J94
44 B K Jun 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 44A.
Fixed a number of 61850 problems
Improved co-processor error reporting
Fixed Inhibit CB Fail Protection in P544/6
Corrected some French and German text
Prevented CB Operating Time displaying 4.295Ms
Fixed a problem which prevented extraction of dnp3 setting files from dnp3 over Ethernet variants.
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J94
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-164
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
44 D K Jan 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 44B.
Corrections to the Current Differential Inhibit when the GPS synchronization is disabled
Corrected Thermal State measurement via DNP3
Timestamp in fault record adjusted for the local time setting.
Corrected Breaker Fail — WI Aided1 trips so they can be disabled via setting «WI Prot Reset»
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J94
44 E K Mar 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 44D.
Prevents the loss of IEC61850 messages and fixed the handling of the ACD flag during GI.
Improved the Ethernet card boot code
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J94
44 F K Sept 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 44E.
Corrected some menu translations
Corrected P543 default PSL
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Improvements to the GPS code
Prevented CTS generating events when CTS is disabled
Fixed problem which prevented residual overvoltage from initiating CB Fail
Various improvements to DNP, CS103 & IEC61850 protocols
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J94
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-165
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
45 B K Mar 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 44E.
Autoreclose, Check Sync and CB Monitoring added to P544 & P546
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
45 C K May 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 45B.
Improvements to the Ethernet card startup and configuration
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Corrections to menu text
Improvements to the GPS code
Bug Fixes
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
45 D K Oct 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 45C.
Improvements to the GPS code
Improvements to the GPS code
Improvements in the clock recover circuits used by the Differential Comms
Bug Fixes
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-166
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
47 A K
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 45D.
IEC-61850 phase 2 and 2.1 implemented
Application for Inzone Transformers (2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking/restraint)
Differential Highset can be disabled when Inrush protection is enabled
Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF)
Modification to Char Mod timer functionality
Separate measurements for each set of CT’s
Interrupt Driven InterMiCOM in all models
Read Only Mode
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server
P54x/EN M/KA4
+ addendum
P54x/EN AD/KB4
47 B K Jan 2010
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 without distance protection based on 47A.
Prevented the Differential protection inhibiting in three terminal schemes when GPS is enabled and loopback mode selected
Fault locator measurements in ohms corrected when 5A CT used or displayed in primary.
Frequency measurement in DNP3 fault record corrected
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server
P54x/EN M/KA4
+ addendum
P54x/EN AD/KB4
50 A K May 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection
Distance protection from P443
DEF from P443
Aided distance & DEF schemes from P443
CTS
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/I64
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-167
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
50 Cont. A K May 2006
Definitive time directional negative sequence overcurrent I2>
GPS synchronization of current differential in all models
P543 and P545 now facilitate in zone transformer-feeder applications
All models support ABC and ACB phase rotation
Standard and inverted CT polarity setting for each set of CTs in the relay
User interface with tri colored LED and function keys
InterMiCOM64
Voltage protection
Backwards compatibility mode
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/I64
C K Jul 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 50A
IEC 61850-8-1
High break options
Demodulated IRIG-B options
Reduction of distance minimum reach settings to 0.05 ohm
Permissive trip reinforcement
Poledead modifications for Hydro Quebec
CS103/auto-reclose modifications
Out of step tripping
Patch for V2.12 P54x/EN M/J74
51
D K Aug 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 51C
Prevents a possible reboot 15 minutes after browsing the front courier port but not making a setting change i.e. browsing using PAS&T.
Extended GOOSE Enrolment Capability
Correction to ICD files, Enumeration (value) and Fixed data Mapping
Patch for V2.12
V2.13 or Later P54x_EN_MJ74
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-168
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
51 Cont. E K Nov 2006
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 51D
Prevent a reboot in 61850 builds when NIC link is inactive and avalanche of DDB activity.
Correctly report a fatal error generated by the sampling call-back
Correct the operation of the GOOSE messaging and a problem with the download of an IED Configuration file.
Correct the operation of the check sync.
Correct the operation of the overcurrent reset curves.
Removed check on the14th position of model number
Fixed Telegrams for public inf 64-67
SOTF can operate even when it is disabled
Patch for V2.12
V2.13 or Later P54x_EN_MJ74
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-169
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
51 F K May 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 non 61850 builds with distance protection based on 51E
Prevent a fatal error from an incorrect DNP address in not using DNP evolutions platform.
Default setting for 450B ‘I< Current Set’ reduced to 50 mA
French Translations for DDBs 1368-1371corrected
Dependencies for cells 3242 & 3245 corrected
Fun & INF values related to CS103 Command Blocking corrected
Angle for negative sequence phase overcurrent setting corrected
Corrected operation when using MiCOM S1 is used to activate Settings group by right clicking on the group.
Corrected the latching of Function Key DDB signals on relay power up
Corrected Disturbance recorder scaling to prevent high current levels into 5A CT causing the Disturbance Recorder to saturate
Restring defaults appears not to change the 1/5A CT selection
Corrected the performance of the IM64 Direct mode
CB control via Direct access does not work with 2CB versions of P540D
Autoreclose dead time/close cycle continues even if AR switched out of service
Distance setting are not updated in simple setting mode in setting groups other than the active one
Ch2 Statistics may not be displayed
Patch for V2.12
V2.13 or Later P54x_EN_MJ74
51 G K
P543, P544, P545 & P546 non 61850 builds with distance protection based on 51F was approved for release but withdrawn before release.
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose
Patch for V2.12 P54x_EN_MJ74
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-170
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
51 H K July 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 non 61850 builds with distance protection based on 51G.
Corrected power swing detection when both distance and current differential enabled
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose
Patch for V2.12 P54x_EN_MJ74
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-171
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
52 A K
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection
Chinese interface
Replacing the existing DNP3 with the DNP3 evolutions
Addition of a current but no volts trip option to Switch on to Fault and Trip on Reclose feature (SOTF/TOR)
Replacement of existing negative sequence overcurrent with multi stage (2 IDMT + 2 DT) negative sequence overcurrent.
Addition of IDG curve, commonly used in Sweden, to Earth Fault & Sensitive Earth Fault (involves moving settings)
Reduction of all TMS step sizes to 0.005
Addition of Channel propagation delay Statistics and Alarms
Changes to CTS so both techniques can be selected together
Regrouping of CTS settings
Addition of four stages of under frequency protection and two stages of Overfrequency protection
Addition of df/dt protection
Changes to Under and Overvoltage to enable each stage to be independently set
Extensions to the checksync VT position setting
Replacing fixed Trip on Close (TOC) Delay with a setting
Improvements to slow power swing detection
Changes to distance count strategy to restore the same operating time when phase differential protection is enabled
Changes to Permissive Inter Trip (PIT) logic to enable the user to select either local or remote current to be used.
Includes local time zone settings for Date & Time
Patch for V2.14
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum
P54x_EN_AD_J84
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-172
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
52 A K
Addition of flexible settings for distance quadrilateral top line
Reduced minimum setting for IN> I2pol Set
Addition of propagation delay times to Fault Record
Default setting for 450B ‘I< Current Set’ reduced to 50mA.
Enhancement to self checking of output relays
Change tunnelled courier address to follow the 1st Rear Port’s KBUS or CS103 address.
52 B K July 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52A.
Phase comparison protection P547 added to range
Improvements to VTS
Improvements to slow power swing detection
Corrected power swing detecting when both distance and current differential enabled
Corrections to enable/disable of Autoreclose
Resolved a problem relating to CT Ratio’s not being restored when restoring default settings
Resolved a problem with the Disturbance Recorder which saturates for High current levels into 5A CT.
P54x_EN_AD_J84
52 C K July 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52B.
Tilt angle of ground quadrilateral Characteristic corrected
Minor correction to fault record
Corrections to over voltage stage 2 inhibit
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-173
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
52 D K Dec 2007
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52C.
Fixed a number of 61850/Goose problems
Fixed a problem in P547 related o the transient starters
Fixed the max prop alarm
Corrected some DDB German text
Fixed a problem with week infeed inhibit
Fixed a SOTF problem when there is a short duration pre-fault
Fixed a primary scaling issue relating to Zone 5 & 6
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
52 E K May 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52D.
Fixed a number of 61850 problems
Improved co-processor error reporting
Fix to Blocking scheme
Fixed Inhibit CB Fail Protection in P544/6
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
52 F K
Not released to production. Based on 52E.
Correction to autoreclose operation for switch on to fault condition
Prevented CB Operating Time displaying 4.295Ms
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
52 G K Oct 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52F.
Correction to the distance cross polarising when the memory expires
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-174
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
52 H K Sept 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52G.
Corrected some menu translations
Corrected Breaker Fail — WI Aided1 trips so they can be disabled via setting «WI Prot Reset»
Timestamp in fault record adjusted for the local time setting.
Corrections to the Current Differential Inhibit when the GPS synchronisation is disabled
Corrected Thermal State measurement via DNP3
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Improvements to the GPS code
Prevented CTS generating events when CTS is disabled
Prevent Z5 from setting slow swing when PSB is disabled
Resolved problem in P543/P545 which prevent correct reporting of fault record over 61850
Fixed problem which prevented residual overvoltage from initiating CB Fail
Various improvements to DNP, CS103 & IEC61850 protocols
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14 P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J84
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-175
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
54 A K Mar 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 52D.
Positional information added to PSL.
DNP 3.0 Over Ethernet protocol added.
Extended I/O – status inputs increased from 24 to 32.
Compensated overvoltage protection added
IEC-103 Generic Services Measurements added
Set/Reset Latch Logic Gates added to PSL
Improved Sensitivity Range for DEF
Fault record to include current differential currents recorded at the time of the current differential trip in addition to the existing data from 1 cycle later.
Fault record increased max number of fault records to 15
GPS Alarm modifications
Scheme Delta from P443 included
DNP enhancements for SSE
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
54 B K June 2008
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 54A.
Fixed a number of 61850 problems
Improved co-processor error reporting
Fix to Blocking scheme
Fix for DEF reverse operation
Fixed Inhibit CB Fail Protection in P544/6
Corrected some French and German text
Prevented CB Operating Time displaying 4.295Ms
Fixed a problem which prevented extraction of dnp3 setting files from dnp3 over Ethernet variants.
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-176
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
54 C K June 2008
Release of P543 & P545 with distance protection based on 54B.
Correction to autoreclose operation for switch on to fault condition
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
54 D K Jan 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 54C.
Correction to the distance cross polarizing when the memory expires
Corrections to the Current Differential Inhibit when the GPS synchronization is disabled
Corrected Thermal State measurement via DNP3
Timestamp in fault record adjusted for the local time setting.
Corrected Breaker Fail — WI Aided1 trips so they can be disabled via setting «WI Prot Reset»
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
54 E K March 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 54D.
Prevents the loss of IEC61850 messages and fixed the handling of the ACD flag during GI.
Improved the Ethernet card boot code
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-177
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
54 F K Sept 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 54E.
Corrected some menu translations
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Improvements to the GPS code
Prevented CTS generating events when CTS is disabled
Prevent Z5 from setting slow swing when PSB is disabled
Resolved problem in P543/P545 which prevent correct reporting of fault record over 61850
Fixed problem which prevented residual overvoltage from initiating CB Fail
Various improvements to DNP, CS103 & IEC61850 protocols
Bug fixes
Patch for V2.14
First release of Studio
P54x_EN_MJ74
+ addendum P54x_EN_AD_J94
55 B K March 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 54E
Autoreclose, Check Sync and CB Monitoring added to P544 & P546
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-178
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
55 C K May 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 55B
Improvements to the Ethernet card startup and configuration
Correction to Negative sequence overcurrent settings when 5A input used
Correction to P545/P541 compatibility when used in transformer compensation mode
Correction to the way latched LED/Relays are cleared
Corrections to menu text
Improvements to the GPS code
Bug Fixes
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
55 D K October 2009
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 55D
Improvements to the GPS code
Correction to slow power swing configuration
Improvements in the clock recover circuits used by the Differential Comms
Prevent Z5 from setting slow swing when PSB is disabled
Bug Fixes
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server P54x/EN M/KA4
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-179
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay type: P54x …
Software versionHardware
suffix Original
date of issue Description of changes
S1 compatibility
Technical documentation
Major Minor
57 A K
Limited Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 55D
IEC-61850 phase 2 and 2.1 implemented
Application for Inzone Transformers (2nd and 5th Harmonic Blocking/restraint)
Differential Highset can be disabled when Inrush protection is enabled
Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF)
Modification to Char Mod timer functionality
Separate measurements for each set of CT’s
Interrupt Driven InterMiCOM in all models
Read Only Mode
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server
P54x/EN M/KA4
+ addendum
P54x/EN AD/KB4
B K January 2010
Release of P543, P544, P545 & P546 with distance protection based on 57A
Prevented the Differential protection inhibiting in three terminal schemes when GPS is enabled and loopback mode selected
Fault locator measurements in ohms corrected when 5A CT used or displayed in primary.
Frequency measurement in DNP3 fault record corrected
Patch for V2.14
Studio ftp server
P54x/EN M/KA4
+ addendum
P54x/EN AD/KB4 57
January 2011 Rebranded from Areva to Alstom Grid P54x/EN AD/Lb4
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-180
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 07 11 12 13 14 15 20 30 40 41 50 51 52 54 55 57
01
02
03 1
04 2 2
05
07
11 2 2 2
12 2 2 2
13 2 2
14
15
20 3
30
40 4
41 4
50 5
51 5
52 3
54
55
Set
tin
g F
ile S
oft
war
e V
ersi
on
57
1. Compatible except for Disturbance recorder digital channel selection
2. Additional functionality added such that setting files from earlier software versions will need additional settings to be made
3. Compatible except for Disturbance recorder digital channel selection & settings for additional functionality will be missing
4. Compatible except for the Disturbance recorder digital channel selection and the distance settings
5. Compatible except for Disturbance recorder digital channel selection & the setting file contains a large number of Distance setting which will each produce an error on download
P
54x/EN
VH/Lb4
Firm
ware and S
ervice Manual
Version H
istory (VH
) 16-181
MiC
OM
P543, P
544, P545 & P
546
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 07 11 12 13 14 15 20 30 40 41 50 51 52 54 55 57
01
02
03
04
05 1
07
11 1 1
12 1 1
13 1 1
14
15
20 1
30
40 2
41 2
50
51
52
54
55
57
PS
L F
ile S
oft
war
e V
ersi
on
1. Additional DDBs were added such that PSL files from earlier software versions will not be able to access them
2. Additional DDB for the Distance protection will not be included
Firmw
are and Service M
anual
P54x/E
N VH
/Lb4 Version H
istory
M
iCO
M P
543, P544, P
545 & P546
(VH
) 16-182
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 07 11 12 13 14 15 20 30 40 41 50 51 52 54 55 57
01
02
03
04
05
07
11
12
13
14
15
20
30
40
41
50
51
52
54
55
57
Men
u T
ext
File
So
ftw
are
Ver
sio
n
Menu text remains compatible within each software version but is NOT compatible across different versions
Alstom Grid Substation Automation Solutions Business www.alstom.com/grid Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 250 070 www.alstom.com/grid/contactcentre/
PUBL
ICAT
ION:
P5
4x/E
N AD
/Lb4
1 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 Current Differential Protection Relay P54x/EN M/Ka4+Kb4 Software Version 45, 47, 55 & 57 Hardware Suffix K Technical Manual Contains: P54x/EN AD/Kb4 V47 & 57 K Addendum P54x/EN M/Ka4 V45 & 55 K Manual Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization.
2 Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe. The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners.
3 This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 Current Differential Protection Relay P54x/EN AD/Kb4 Software Version 47 & 57 Hardware Suffix K Update Documentation Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information.
4 Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe. The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners. This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
5 2010, Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Kb4-S MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 (AD) -1 UPDATE DOCUMENTATION P54x/EN AD/Kb4-S Update Documentation(AD) -2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Kb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 (AD) -3 P54x UPDATE DOCUMENTATION In the firmware version 45 and 55K of P54x, several changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: Release Version Documentation P54x/EN M/Ka4 Technical Manual Document Ref.
6 Section Page No. Description P54x/EN IT/Ga4 1-7 Functional overview 64 REF protection added Corrected 67/46 to show 4 stages 1-10 1-11 Ordering options Hardware options updated Redundant Etherner Options added Software number updated P54x/EN TD/Ja4 — 2-7 Protection functions Phase and ground (earth) Overcurrent modified to Three Phase Overcurrent Protection. Addition of Accuracy claims. Earth Fault added REF Added — 2-12 2-15 Settings, measurements and records list Configuration updated EIA(RS)232 Teleprotection added INTERMiCOM conf. added Prot comms/IM64 updated — 2-17 2-19 Protection functions Phase Current differential protection updated Sensitive earth fault updated — 2-24 2-26 Measurements list Measurements 1 updated Fault Record Proforma updated P54x/EN ST/Ba4 4-4 4-6 Relay settings configuration Sensitive E/F modified to SEF/REF PROT N IREF>Stage added Restricted Earth Fault Protection added Read Only mode feature added 4-6 Integral teleprotection settings New section 4-6 EIA(RS)
7 232 InterMiCOM New section 4-8 Protection communication configuration GPS Sync updated Char Mod Time updated Char Mod Ex feature added Char Mod Ex Time feature added 4-17 Distance setup (only for models with distance option) Cells under DELTA DIRECTION updated P54x/EN AD/Kb4-S Update Documentation(AD) -4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 Document Ref. Section Page No. Description P54x/EN ST/Ba4 Continued 4-23 Phase differential Compensation: Vector group text changed to Transformer Inrush Restraint updated to add blocking feature Ih (2) & (5) features added Id High Set updated 4-38 4-39 Sensitive earth fault Sensitive E/F modified to SEF/REF HI Z REF Protection added IREF> Is setting added 4-68 System data Software and 2 updated P54x/EN OP/Ba4 5-18 Time alignment of Current vectors with GPS input (all models) Section updated to reflect changes to GPS SYNC setting.
8 5-20 Protection of transformer feeders (P543 and P545) Previously Section updated 5-20 Enabling or disabling differential protection for in-zone power transformer New section 5-20 Transformer magnetizing inrush (P543/P545) Previously Heading and section updated 5-20 Second harmonic restraint (P543/P545) New section 5-20 Second harmonic blocking (P543/P545) New section 5-20 Fifth harmonic blocking (P543/P545) New section 5-20 High set differential (P543/P545) Section split: previously part of 5-27 Tripping mode — selection of single or three phase tripping Previously Figure 17 updated 5-84 Earth fault, Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) and Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection Previously Heading and section updated 5-84 Restricted Earth Fault protection (REF) New section 5-90 Undervoltage protection Figure 67 updated 5-91 Overvoltage protection Figure 68 updated 5-96 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers Figure 71 updated Figure 72 updated Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/Kb4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 (AD) -5 Document Ref.
9 Section Page No. Description P54x/EN OP/Ba4 Continued 5-105 Switched communication networks Char Mod Ex feature added 5-111 Pilot isolation Section deleted 5-111 Baseband modem and P590 specification Section deleted 5-112 Baseband modem propagation delay Section deleted 5-112 Baseband modem and relay configuration Section deleted 5-111 Unconditioned 2 wire pilot communications for distances greater than km New section 5-117 InterMiCOM New section 5-117 Protection signaling New section 5-117 InterMiCOM variants New section 5-117 InterMiCOM features New section 5-117 Definition of teleprotection commands New section 5-117
10 MODEM InterMiCOM, EIA(RS)232 InterMiCOM or Copper InterMiCOM New section 5-117 Communications media New section 5-117 General features and implementation New section 5-117 EIA(RS)232 physical connections New section 5-117 Direct connection New section 5-117 EIA(RS)232 modem connection New section 5-117 RS422 connection New section 5-117 Fiber optic connection New section 5-117 InterMiCOM functional assignment New section 5-117 InterMiCOM statistics and diagnostics New section 5-132 Read Only mode New section 5-132 Protocol/port implementation: New section P54x/EN AD/Kb4-S Update Documentation(AD) -6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & p546 Document Ref.
MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, 546 Technical Guide Current
Differential Protection Relays Platform Hardware Version: J
Platform Software Version: 20 & 30 Publication Reference:
P54x/EN T/I53 P54x/EN T/I53 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of
ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the
property of their respective companies. The technical and other
data contained in this document is provided for information only.
Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility
for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied), as to the accuracy or completeness of
such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria
where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or
change this data at any time without further notice. GRID Technical
Guide P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
CONTENT Errata Section Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety
Instructions Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53Application Notes P54x/EN
AP/I53Relay Description P54x/EN HW/I53Technical Data P54x/EN
TD/I53Menu Content Tables P54x/EN HI/I53SCADA Communications
P54x/EN CT/I53UCA2.0 Communications P54x/EN UC/I53Relay Menu
Database P54x/EN GC/I53External Connection Diagrams P54x/EN
CO/I53Hardware / Software Version History & Compatibility
P54x/EN VC/I53Scheme Logic Diagrams P54x/EN LG/I53 P54x/EN T/I53
Technical Guide MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Issue
Control P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page
1/6 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref. Section
Page Description Throughout Company name changed IT 2 4/5
Introduction to MiCOM Guides 2 lines deleted IT 3.3 9 Menu
structure Sentence changed IT 3.8 17 First rear communication Title
& paragraph amended IT 3.8.2 20/21 Modbus communication New
cell added to end of section IT 3.9 23 Ethernet Rear Port (option)
New section inserted AP Throughout All instances of Courier
Database chapter replaced with Relay Menu Database chapter. AP
1.2.1 12 Protection features New bullet point added to end of
section AP 1.2.2 13 Non-protection features New bullet point added
to end of section Two paragraphs replaced AP 2.1 15 Configuration
column Last 4 rows in table amended AP 2.2.1 15/16 Differential
protection configuration Data in table deleted Last 3 rows of table
added AP 2.2.2 18 Phase differential characteristics Data in table
amended and line added AP 2.2.11.3 33 Teed feeder example Figure
12: Diagram updated AP 2.2.11.4 35 Three winding transformer in
zone with different rated CTs example Figure 13: Diagram updated AP
2.3 37 Distance protection Table 6: Data amended AP 2.3.1 38 Phase
fault distance protection Figure 14 & 15: Note 2 replaced AP
2.3.7.6 47 Residual compensation setting Sentence replaced AP 2.4
48 Phase fault overcurrent protection Data in table amended and
line added AP 2.4 49 Phase fault overcurrent protection Table 9:
Data amended AP 2.6 54 Earth fault protection Table 14: Data in
table amended and line added AP 2.6 55 Earth fault protection Table
15: Data in table amended and line added AP 3.2.2 72/73 Relay
settings P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 2/6
P543, P544, P545, P546 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005
Doc Ref. Section Page Description Table 20: Data amended AP 3.2.8.6
80 System check on shot 1 (called Check Sinchronising for fast 3
phase reclose on software 13 or previous) Paragraph amended AP
3.2.8.7 80 Immediate Autoreclose with Check Synchronism (since
software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.2.9.5 81
Discrimination Timer Setting (since software 20 and onwards) Title
replaced AP 3.3.1 82 System Checks (for version 20 and onwards)
Title replaced AP 3.3.1.1 82 Overview Text moved to new section AP
3.3.2 87/90 Check synchronisation (applicable to P543 & P545)
For version 13 and previous Whole new section added AP 3.4 90
Autoreclose /Check Synchronisation Interface (Valid for sotfware 20
and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.7.1 94 Circuit breaker condition
monitoring features Table 25: Data amended AP 3.8 95 Circuit
breaker control Bullet point replaced AP 3.8.1 98 CB Control using
Hotkeys (Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.9.1.7
102 Fault locator settings Data in table amended AP 3.10 103 Event
& fault records Paragraph amended Data in table amended AP
3.10.1.3 105 Relay alarm conditions Table 29: Data amended AP 3.11
107 Disturbance recorder Paragraphs amended AP 3.12 109
Measurements Bullet point replaced AP 3.12.3 109 Slip Frequency
(Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.12.7 110
Settings Table 32: Data amended AP 3.12.7.4 110 Remote2 Values
(Since software 12 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.13 112 Changing
Setting Groups First and second paragraph replaced Issue Control
P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 3/6
Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref. Section Page
Description AP 3.14 112 Control inputs (Since software 20 and
onwards) Title replaced AP 3.15 113 Real time clock synchronization
via opto-inputs (Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP
5. 118 Current Transformer Requirements Data replaced AP 6. 119
Commissioning Test Menu Data in table amended Data added to end of
table AP 6.10 121 Test autoreclose Information replaced AP 6.11 121
Test Loopback Whole section replaced AP 6.12 122 DDB Status
Existing section 6.13 renumbered and new section 6.12 added AP 7.1
122 Communications link options Whole section replaced AP 7.1.5 123
IEEE C37.94 interface to multiplexer Existing sections renumbered
and new section 7.1.5 added AP 7.1.5 123 IEEE C37.94 interface to
multiplexer (since software 30) added to heading AP 7.1.6.1 123
Switched communication networks (P541, P542, P543 & P544)
Paragraph amended AP 7.7 132 Clock source Line added to end of
section AP 7.8 133 Data rate Line added to end of section AP 7.13
134 Communications fail mode Sentence replaced HW 1.1.4 3 Analogue
/ Digital Input module Whole section replaced HW 1.1.8 4 Ethernet
board Figure 1: Diagram updated HW 2.4.2 7 Input board Term
replaced Figure 2: Diagram updated HW 2.4.3 8 Universal opto
isolated logic inputs Whole section replaced HW 3.3 13 Platform
software Term added to last sentence HW 4.1.2 17 Initialisation
software New bullet point added HW 4.2 17 Continuous self-testing
P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 4/6 P543, P544,
P545, P546 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref.
Section Page Description Replaced term Sentence replaced Sentence
changed to bullet point TD 1. 7 Reference conditions Data in table
amended and line added TD 2.1.4 9 Inverse time (IDMT)
characteristic Data in table amended TD 2.1.4.2 9 Required Time
Dial Settings for IEEE / US curves Data in table amended and line
added TD 2.1.6 10 Vectorial compensation settings (P541 and P542)
Data in table amended TD 2.2.2.1 12 Inverse Time (IDMT)
Characteristic Data in table amended TD 2.2.2.3 12 Time Dial
Settings for IEEE/US curves Data in table amended and line added TD
2.2.5 15 ANSI/IEEE IDMT curves Figure 2.2.5: Diagram updated TD
2.3.4.4 18 Polarising Quantities Data in table amended TD 2.13.1 20
Setting ranges New line added to end of table TD 6.1.1 25 Features
Data added to table TD 6.3.1 26 Level settings Data in table
amended and line added TD 8.2 27 Rear Port 1 Table replaced TD
10.1.4 31 Universal Logic inputs (P540 range) Table replaced TD
11.1 33 CT Requirements (P540 range) Data replaced TD 18.5 44
Battery life (P540 range) Line added to table CT 1. 5 Introduction
New section 1.1 added to end of introduction CT 2.1 5 Courier
protocol Text inserted CT 2.7 10 Disturbance record extraction
Whole section replaced CT 3.1 11 Communication Link Text added to
beginning of section CT 3.6.6 21 Record data Sentence deleted CT
3.8 22/24 Date and Time Format (Data Type G12) Whole section
replaced Issue Control P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 5/6 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc
Ref. Section Page Description CT 4.1 25 Physical connection and
link layer Text deleted CT 5.1 28 DNP3 Protocol Text inserted UC
3.4.3 12 UCA2.0 Settings & Statistics Data added to table GC —
— Courier menu database Amended to reflect latest relay software VC
— — Hardware/software version history and compatibility Amended to
reflect latest relay software LG — 1 Distance P543/P544/P545/P546
Zone 1 Tripping Logic Figure 1: Diagram amended LG — 1 Distance
P543/P544/P545/P546 Zone 2 Tripping Logic Figure 2: Diagram amended
LG — 14 CB failure for P541/P542 with Three Pole Tripping Figure
25: Diagram amended LG — 8 Autoreclose P543/P545 Single/Three Pole
Tripping Figure 17: Diagram amended LG — 9 Autoreclose P543/P545
Inhibit Sequence Count Figure 18: Diagram amended LG — 10
Autoreclose P543/P545 Cycles Figure 19: Diagram amended LG — 13
Autoreclose P543/P545 Force 3 Pole Trip Figure 22: Diagram amended
LG — 14 P543/P545 DDB Pole Discrepancy Trip Figure24: Diagram
amended LG — 16 VTS Logic Figure 29: Diagram amended LG — 24
Autoreclose P543/P545 Repeat Closer Figure 37: Diagram amended
P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 6/6 P543, P544,
P545, P546 HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A person s normal
movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor
devices when handling circuits can cause serious damage, which
often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits of ALSTOM
Grid are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic discharge
when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of
damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module
incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw
a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the
high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been
designed and manufactured. 1. Before removing a module, ensure that
you are a same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching
the case. 2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges
of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic
components, printed circuit track or connectors. 3. Do not pass the
module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves
equipotential. 4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on
a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. 5.
Store or transport the module in a conductive bag. More information
on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F. If you are making measurements on
the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is
preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k
10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain
regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static.
Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be
earthed to the case whenever possible. ALSTOM Grid strongly
recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special
Handling Area such as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F. CONTENT
1. SAFETY SECTION 3 1.1 Health and safety 3 1.2 Explanation of
symbols and labels 3 2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3
3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 4 3.1 Current transformer
circuits 4 3.2 External resistors 4 3.3 Battery replacement 4 3.4
Insulation and dielectric strength testing 4 3.5 Insertion of
modules and pcb cards 4 3.6 Fibre optic communication 5 4. OLDER
PRODUCTS 5 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5 6. TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS 6 1. SAFETY SECTION This Safety Section should be
read before commencing any work on the equipment. 1.1 Health and
safety The information in the Safety Section of the product doc
umentation is intended to ensure that products are properly
installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe
condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with
the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety
Section. 1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of
symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below. Caution: refer to product
documentation Caution: risk of electric shock Protective/ safety
*earth terminal Functional *earth terminal Note: This symbol may
also be used for a protective/ safety earth terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power
supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUTTHE
PRODUCTDOCUMENTATION IS THE DIRECTEQUIVALENTOF THE NORTH AMERICAN
TERM GROUND. 2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment
connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or
servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct
working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation
should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing
the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning
and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the
equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to
the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to
avoid electrical shock or energy hazards. Voltage and c urrent
connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to
ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the
correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the
protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or
disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The
recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise
stated in the technical data section of the product doc umentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity; CTcircuit rating and integrity of
connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection
(where applicable) Remove front plate plastic film protection
Remove insulating strip from battery compartment 3. EQUIPMENT
OPERATING CONDITIONS The equipment should be operated within the
specified electrical and environmental limits. 3.1 Current
transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT
since the high level voltage produced may be lethal to personnel
and could damage insulation. 3.2 External resistors Where external
resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of
electric shock or burns, if touched. 3.3 Battery replacement Where
internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the
recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to
avoid possible damage to the equipment. 3.4 Insulation and
dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors
charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the
test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge
capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. 3.5 Insertion
of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or
withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised since this may
result in damage. 3.6 Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic
communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the
operation or signal level of the device. 4. OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments Equipments which require direct physical
adjustments to their operating mechanism to change current or
voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed before
making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments The electrical power to the relay contacts
should be removed before checking any mechanical settings, to avoid
any risk of electric shock. Draw out case relays Removal of the
cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards When using an extender
card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment
whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage
hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender
card. Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs When
using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place
before insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL Decommissioning: The auxiliary
supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards,
after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of
any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the
external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is
recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is
avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any
products containing batteries should have them removed before
disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular
regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the
disposal of lithium batteries. 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the
external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, Red Spot type
or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation. Insulation class: IEC
601010-1 : 1990/ A2 : 2001 Class I EN 61010-1: 2001 Class I This
equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure
user safety. Insulation Category (Overvoltage): IEC 601010-1 :
1990/ A2 : 1995 Category III EN 61010-1: 2001 Category III
Distribution level, fixed insulation. Equipment in this category is
qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/ 50s, 5000.5J, between all
supply circ uits and earth and also between independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/ A2 : 1995 Pollution degree 2 EN
61010-1: 2001 Pollution degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by
reference to generic safety standards. Product Safety: 72/ 23/ EEC
EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2002 Compliance with the European
Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by
reference to generic safety standards. Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 INTRODUCTION P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
Page 1/24 CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM 3 2. INTRODUCTION TO
MICOM GUIDES 4 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 6 3.1
Introduction to the relay 6 3.1.1 Front panel 6 3.1.2 Relay rear
panel 7 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings
options 8 3.3 Menu structure 9 3.3.1 Protection settings 10 3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings 10 3.3.3 Control and support settings
10 3.4 Password protection 10 3.5 Relay configuration 11 3.6 Front
panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 12 3.6.1 Default display and
menu time-out 13 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 13
3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation 13 3.6.3.1 Setting group selection 13
3.6.3.2 Control Inputs user assignable functions 14 3.6.3.3 CB
Control 14 3.6.4 Password entry 14 3.6.5 Reading and clearing of
alarm messages and fault records 15 3.6.6 Setting changes 15 3.7
Front communication port user interface 16 3.8 First rear
communication port 17 3.8.1 Courier communication 17 3.8.2 Modbus
communication 19 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 21 3.8.4
DNP 3.0 Communication 22 3.9 Second Rear Communication Port
(option) 23 3.10 Ethernet Rear Port (option) 23 Figure 1: Relay
front view 6 Figure 2: Relay rear view 8 P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 2/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
Figure 3: Menu structure 9 Figure 4: Front panel user interface 12
Figure 5: Hotkey menu navigation 14 Figure 6: Front port connection
16 Figure 7: PC relay signal connection 17 Figure 8: Remote
communication connection arrangements 18 Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 3/24 1.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of
meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range
of components, systems and services from ALSTOM Grid — SAS. Central
to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to
define an application solution and, through extensive communication
capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control
system. The components within MiCOM are: — P range protection
relays; — C range control products; — M range measurement products
for accurate metering and monitoring; — S range versatile PC
support and substation control packages. MiCOM products include
extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records.
They can also provide measurements of the system at regular
intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and
control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM
product, visit our website: www.alstom.com/grid/sas P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 4/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES The guides provide a functional and
technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a
comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and
application. Divided into two volumes, as follows: Volume 1
Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the
relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly
intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and
application of the relay for the protection of the power system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation
and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault
finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are
responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of
the relay. The chapter content within each volume is summarised
below: Volume 1 Technical Guide Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section P54x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different
user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay. P54x/EN AP Application Notes Comprehensive and
detailed description of the features of the relay including both
the protection elements and the relays other functions such as
event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable
scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power
system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings,
some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the
relay. P54x/EN HW Relay Description Overview of the operation of
the relays hardware and software. This chapter includes information
on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P54x/EN
TD Technical Data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy
limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance
data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where
appropriate. P54x/EN CT Communications and Interface Guide This
chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to
access the settings database stored within the relay. The chapter
also gives information on each of the communication protocols that
can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the user to
design a custom interface to a SCADA system. P54x/EN UC UCA2.0
Communications The chapter gives information on the UCA2.0
communication protocol that can be used with the relay. P54x/EN GC
Relay Menu Database: User Interface / Courier / Modbus / IEC
60870-5-103/ DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained
within the relay together with a brief description of each. P54x/EN
CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to
the relay. P54x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and
Compatibility Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543,
P544, P545, P546 Page 5/24 P54x/EN HI Menu Table Contents Volume 2
Operation Guide Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section
P54x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of
the protection relay describing how to start using the relay.
P54x/EN IN Installation Recommendations on unpacking, handling,
inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and
electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating
earthing recommendations. P594/EN IN P594 Installation Notes
P54x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to
commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and
functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the
relay is outlined. P54x/EN PR Problem Analysis Advice on how to
recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.
P54x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User Interface / Courier / Modbus /
IEC 60870-5-103/ DNP 3.0 / UCA2.0 Listing of all of the settings
contained within the relay together with a brief description of
each. P54x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring
connections to the relay. P54x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version
History and Compatibility P54x/EN HI Menu Table Contents Repair
Form P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 6/24 P543,
P544, P545, P546 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE The settings
and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both
from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear
communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given
in this section to describe how to get started using the relay. 3.1
Introduction to the relay 3.1.1 Front panel The front panel of the
relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and
bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the
front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover.
With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is
possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the
environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows
access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad
is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be
unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If
the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be
removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the
bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of
the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to
release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
User programablefunction LEDsTRIPALARMOUT OF SERVICEHEALTHY= CLEAR=
READ= ENTERSER NoDIAG NoInVxVnVV1/5 A 50/60 HzSerial No and I*, V
RatingsTop coverFixedfunctionLEDsBottomcoverBattery compartment
Front comms port Download/monitor portKeypadLCDP0103ENbHotkeys
Figure 1: Relay front view Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541,
P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 7/24 The front panel of the relay
includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1: — a 16-character
by 3-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). — a 9 key
keypad comprising 4 arrow keys , and ), an enter key (), a clear
key (), a read key () and 2 additional hotkeys (). — 12 LEDs; 4
fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. Hotkey
functionality: — SCROLL Starts scrolling through the various
default displays — STOP Stops scrolling the default display Under
the top hinged cover: — the relay serial number, and the relays
current and voltage rating information*. Under the bottom hinged
cover: — battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which
is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault
and disturbance records. — a 9-pin female D-type front port for
communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance)
via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection. — a 25-pin female D-type
port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local
downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection. The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the
front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip
(Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is
reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front
display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be
self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay
has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or
maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been
accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant
illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been
cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays
protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay
is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will
be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that
there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state
of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back
of the relay. To improve the visibility of the settings via the
front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the LCD
Contrast setting in the CONFIGURATION column. 3.1.2 Relay rear
panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current
and voltage signals*, digital logic input signals and output
contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at
the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the
optical fibre rear communication port which are both optional.
P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 8/24 P543, P544,
P545, P546 D E F C B AIRIG BTXPORT 1RXOptional IRIG-B board Digital
input connectionsCurrent* and voltageinput terminalsDigital
output(relays) connectionsRear comms port(RS485)Power
supplyconnectionP0104ENa Figure 2: Relay rear view Refer to the
wiring diagram in the External Connection Diagrams chapter (P54x/EN
CO) for complete connection details. 3.2 Introduction to the user
interfaces and settings options The relay has three user
interfaces: — the front panel user interface via the LCD and
keypad. — the front port which supports Courier communication. —
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier,
Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or UCA2.0. The protocol for the
rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered. The
measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed
from the five interfaces are summarised in Table 1. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 9/24
Keypad/LCD Courier Modbus IEC870-5-103 DNP3.0 UCA2.0 Display &
modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status
Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault
records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic
settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault
records Time synchronisation Control commands Table 1 3.3 Menu
structure The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each
setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the
menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The
settings are arranged so that each column contains related
settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are
contained within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row
of each column contains the heading which describes the settings
contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the
menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list
of all of the menu settings is given the Relay Menu Database
Chapter (P54x/EN GC) of the manual. Up to 4 protection setting
groupsColumndatasettingsColumn headerControl & support Group 1
Group 2System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault
Overcurrent Ground faultRepeated for groups 2, 3 and 4P0106ENa
Figure 3: Menu structure P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541,
P542, Page 10/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 All of the settings in the
menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S)
settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting
depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and
support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after
they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a
temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together,
but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to
be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of
protection settings will all take effect at the same time. 3.3.1
Protection settings The protection settings include the following
items: — protection element settings — scheme logic settings —
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where
appropriate)* — fault locator settings (where appropriate)* There
are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing
the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is
selected as the active group, and is used by the protection
elements. 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance
recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal
sources that trigger the recording. 3.3.3 Control and support
settings The control and support settings include: — relay
configuration settings — open/close circuit breaker* — CT & VT
ratio settings* — reset LEDs — active protection setting group —
password & language settings — circuit breaker control &
monitoring settings* — communications settings — measurement
settings — event & fault record settings — user interface
settings — commissioning settings 3.4 Password protection The menu
structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that
is enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed
and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels
of access are summarised in Table 2. Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 11/24 Access
level Operations enabled Level 0 No password required Read access
to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records Level 1
Password 1 or 2 As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit
breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset
LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Password 2 required All other settings Table 2 Each of the two
passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once
it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved
either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving
to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu. The
level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that
is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication
port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the
relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level
enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each
interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default
level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be
supplied — contact ALSTOM Grid with the relays serial number. The
current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined
by examining the ‘Access level’ cell in the ‘System data’ column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also
be found as one of the default display options. Additionally the
current level of access for each interface is available for use in
the PSL by mapping to the following DDB signals: — HMI Access Lvl 1
— HMI Access Lvl 2 — FPort AccessLvl1 — FPort AccessLvl2 — RPrt1
AccessLvl1 — RPrt1 AccessLvl2 — RPrt2 AccessLvl1 — RPrt2 AccessLvl2
Each pair of DDB signals indicate the access level as follows: —
Lvl 1 off, Lvl 2 off = 0 — Lvl 1 on, Lvl 2 off = 1 — Lvl 1 off, Lvl
2 on = 2 The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2,
such that no password is required to change any of the relay
settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level
to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access
level is set in the Password control cell which is found in the
System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only be
changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous
different protection, control and communication features. In order
to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration
settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the
functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function
that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the
menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the
Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 12/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
The configuration column controls which of the four protection
settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings
cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the
configuration column, provided it is not the present active group.
Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active
group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one
group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do
this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group
to be copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group
where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially
placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the
relay following confirmation. To restore the default values to the
settings in any protection settings group, set the Restore defaults
cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to
set the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the
default values to all of the relays settings, not just the
protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be
placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after
they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all
settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may
result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the
new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is
exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD. The , and keys which are
used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an
auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys
are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both
setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is
held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
SystemfrequencyDate and time3-phase voltageAlarm messagesOther
default displaysColumn 1Sytem dataColumn 2View recordsColumn nGroup
4OvercurrentData 1.1LanguageData 2.1Last recordData n.1|>1
functionData 1.2PasswordData 2.2Time and dateData n.2|>1
directionalData 1.nPasswordlevel 2Data 2.nC A voltageData n.n|>
char angleOther settingcells incolumn 1Other settingcells incolumn
2Other settingcells incolumn nOther column headingsNote: The C key
will return to column header from any menu cellCCCP0105ENa Figure
4: Front panel user interface Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 13/24 3.6.1 Default display
and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default
display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display
and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad
inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been
confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the
following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage,
power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a
user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with
the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from
the default display the different default display options can be
scrolled through using the and keys. However the menu selected
default display will be restored following the menu time-out
elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay
(e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the
default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to
the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display
and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults
present message. 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing The
menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the
structure shown in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display
the key will display the first column heading. To select the
required column heading use the and keys. The setting data
contained in the column can then be viewed by using the and keys.
It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key .
It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading
level. To return to the default display press the key or the clear
key from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go
straight to the default display from within one of the column cells
using the auto-repeat facility of the key, as the auto-repeat will
stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the key
must be released and pressed again. 3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation
The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below
the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access
keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on
the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display
the direct access key below the HOTKEY text must be pressed. Once
in the hotkey menu the and keys can be used to scroll between the
available options and the direct access keys can be used to control
the function currently displayed. If neither the or keys are
pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay
will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act
to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The
layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The
top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy
menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom
line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The
functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below. 3.6.3.1
Setting group selection The user can either scroll using through
the available setting groups or the setting group that is currently
displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming
the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the
user is prompted with the or options again. The user can exit the
sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 14/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
For more information on setting group selection refer to Changing
setting group section in the application guide. 3.6.3.2 Control
Inputs user assignable functions The number of control inputs (user
assignable functions USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is
user configurable in the CTRL I/P CONFIG column. The chosen inputs
can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer
to the Control Inputs section in the application guide. 3.6.3.3 CB
Control The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to
another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the
hotkey menu refer to the Circuit breaker control section of the
application guide. HOT KEY MENUEXITMiCOMP54xHOTKEY CB CTRL
SETTING GROUP 1SELECT
NXT GRPCONTROL INPUT 1ON
EXITCONTROL INPUT 2ON
EXITCONTROL INPUT 2ON
EXITSETTING GROUP 2SELECT
NXT GRPSETTING GROUP 2SELECTED
CONTROL INPUT 1ON
CONTROL INPUT 1EXIT
OFFConfirmationscreendisplayed for2
secondsConfirmationscreendispalyed for2 seconds(See CB Control in
Application Notes)Default DisplayNOTE: Key returnsthe user to the
HotkeyMenu ScreenP1246ENe Figure 5: Hotkey menu navigation 3.6.4
Password entry When entry of a password is required the following
prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 Note: The password
required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above A
flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password
may be changed. Press the and keys to vary each character between A
and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use
the and keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key
The display will revert to Enter Password if an incorrect password
is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of
access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the
selected setting then the display will return to the setting page
to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has
not been entered then the password Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 15/24 prompt page will be
returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key .
Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell
of the System data column. For the front panel user interface the
password protected access will revert to the default access level
after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by
moving to the Password menu cell in the System data column and
pressing the clear key instead of entering a password. 3.6.5
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The
presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the
default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm
messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case
they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the
read key. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the
alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and
the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To
scroll through the pages of this use the key. When all pages of the
fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear:
Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press ; to
return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms
uncleared, press . Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm
messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the
alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as
will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the
alarm viewer has been entered using the key, the key can be
pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record.
Pressing again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where
pressing once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.6 Setting changes To
change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display
the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key
which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that
the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate
password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the
or keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text
string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be
selected using theand keys. When the desired new value has been
reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing
Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear
button is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection
group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must
be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when
all required changes have been entered, return to the column
heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default
display the following prompt will be given: Update settings Enter
or clear Pressing will result in the new settings being adopted,
pressing will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values.
It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded
if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been
confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately
after they are entered, without Update settings prompt. P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 16/24 P543, P544, P545,
P546 3.7 Front communication port user interface The front
communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector
located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232
serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally
to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port
supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the
communication language developed by ALSTOM Grid SAS to allow
communication with its range of protection relays. The front port
is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program
MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software package. d Figure
6: Front port connection The relay is a Data Communication
Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays
9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data Pin no.
3 Rx Receive data Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common None of the other
pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are
normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial
port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25
Way 9 Way Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common For successful data communication,
the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC,
and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE
with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial
connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3
to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of
difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx
and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is
used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or
if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 17/24
Figure 7: PC relay signal connection Having made the physical
connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings
must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the
table below: Protocol Courier Baud rate 19,200 bits/s Courier
address 1 Message format 11 bit — 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1
parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit The inactivity timer for the
front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay
will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no
messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any
password access level that has been enabled will be revoked. 3.8
First rear communication port Rear port 1 (RP1) support one of four
communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103),
the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The
rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485
serial data communication and is intended for use with a
permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the
three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other
is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is
selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not
polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0
care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol
provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. The first cell
down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the
rear port. 3.8.1 Courier communication Courier is the communication
language developed by ALSTOM Grid — SAS to allow remote
interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a
master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the
form of a database, and respond with information from the database
when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit
which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as
MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a
Windows NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically
designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port
to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ
K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is
available from ALSTOM Grid SAS. A typical connection arrangement is
shown in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible
connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master
station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter.
Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in
length and have up to 32 relays connected to it. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 18/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
P0109ENe Figure 8: Remote communication connection arrangements
Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings
apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the
inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud
rate of 64kbits/s. Move down the Communications column from the
column heading to the first cell down which indicates the
communication protocol: RP1 Protocol Courier The next cell down the
column controls the address of the relay: Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 19/24 RP1
Address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur,
as indicated in Figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a
unique address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between
0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The
Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate
with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
RP1 Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how
long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear
port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set
between 1 and 30 minutes. As an alternative to running courier over
K-Bus, courier over EIA485 may be selected. The next cell down
indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP1 Card Status EIA232
OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration RP1
Port Config EIA232 (EIA(RS)232) The port can be configured for
EIA485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA485 the next cell selects the
communication mode. RP1 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is
either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or
10-bit no parity. In the case of EIA485 the next cell down controls
the baud rate. For K-Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second
between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay
spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous.
Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200
bits/s and 38400 bits/s, Note that protection and disturbance
recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as
PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell
of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do
not require this action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication
protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar
fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays),
responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by
taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a
twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a
distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 20/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 To
use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move
down the Communications column from the column heading to the first
cell down which indicates the communication protocol: RP1 Protocol
Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:
RP1 Address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur,
and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique
address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1
and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down controls the inactivity timer: RP1 InactivTimer 10.00 mins The
inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without
receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its
default state, including revoking any password access that was
enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30
minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be
used: RP1 Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is
asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600
bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set
on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the
parity format used in the data frames: RP1 Parity None The parity
can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that
set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the
format of the Date/Time (software 30 or later) Modbus IEC Time
Standard Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 21/24 The format can be selected to either Standard
(as per IEC60870-5-4 Binary Time 2a), the default, or to Reverse
for compatibility with MICOM product ranges. For further
information see P54x/EN CT section 3.8. 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103
communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol
Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103
defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to
perform communication with protection equipment. The standard
configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted
pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC
60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic
connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay
operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a
master station. The method of communication uses standardised
messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use
the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described
below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading
to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: RP1
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC
60870-5-103 address of the relay: RP1 Address 162 Up to 32 relays
can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is
necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages
from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC
60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay
address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC
60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down the column controls the baud rate to be used: RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud
rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It
is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is
the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The
next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103
measurements: RP1 Meas period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The
interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can
be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column
controls the physical media used for the communication: P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 22/24 P543, P544, P545,
P546 RP1 Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select
the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic
connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be
changed to Fibre optic. 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0
protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol
specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay
operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the
protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear
port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave
devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the
relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use
the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check
that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below.
Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the
first cell which indicates the communications protocol: RP1
Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the
relay: RP1 Address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP
3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a
unique address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down the column controls the baud rate to be used: RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates
are supported by the relay 1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s,
9600bits/s, 19200bits/s and 38400bits/s. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set
on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column
controls the parity format used in the data frames: RP1 Parity None
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is
important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is
the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 23/24
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request
from the master by the relay: RP1 Time Sync Enabled The time synch
can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the
DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.9 Second Rear
Communication Port (option) For relays with Courier, Modbus,
IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications
port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications
port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over
one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity
sensitive), twisted pair EIA485 (connection polarity sensitive) or
EIA232. The settings for this port are located immediately below
the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of
this chapter. Move down the settings until the following sub
heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates
the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol
Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware,
e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection
of the port configuration RP2 Port Config EIA232 (EIA(RS)232) The
port can be configured for EIA232, EIA485 or K-Bus. In the case of
EIA232 and EIA485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2
Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for
normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. 3.10
Ethernet Rear Port (option) If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is
ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See
P54x/EN UC section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware.
P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 24/24 P543,
P544, P545, P546 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542,
P543, P544, P545, P546 APPLICATION NOTES P54x/EN AP/I53 Application
Notes MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Application Notes
P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 1/138
CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 11 1.1 Protection of overhead lines and
cable circuits 11 1.2 P540 relay 11 1.2.1 Protection features 11
1.2.2 Non-protection features 12 2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 14 2.1 Configuration column 14 2.2 Phase
current differential protection 15 2.2.1 Differential protection
configuration 15 2.2.2 Phase differential characteristics 16 2.2.3
Time alignment of current vectors 18 2.2.3.1 Time alignment of
current vectors without GPS input (Traditional Technique) 18
2.2.3.2 Time Alignment of Current Vectors with GPS input P545 &
P546 20 2.2.4 Capacitive charging current 22 2.2.5 Protection of
transformer feeders 23 2.2.5.1 Transformer magnetising inrush and
High set differential setting 24 2.2.5.2 Ratio correction (all
models) 25 2.2.5.3 Phase correction and zero sequence current
filtering 25 2.2.6 3 to 2 terminal reconfiguration 26 2.2.7 Mesh
corner and 1 breaker switched substations 27 2.2.8 Stub bus
protection 28 2.2.9 Small Tapped Loads (Tee Feeds) 28 2.2.10
Additional protection considerations 28 2.2.10.1 The minimum
operating current 28 2.2.10.2 Relay sensitivity under heavy load
conditions 29 2.2.11 Example setting 30 2.2.11.1 Differential
element 30 2.2.11.2 Transformer feeder examples 31 2.2.11.3 Teed
feeder example 33 2.2.11.4 Three winding transformer in zone with
different rated CTs example 34 2.3 Distance protection 36 2.3.1
Phase fault distance protection 37 2.3.2 Earth fault distance
protection 38 2.3.3 Setting guidelines 38 2.3.3.1 Zone reaches 38
P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 2/138 P543,
P544, P545, P546 2.3.3.2 Zone time delay settings 39 2.3.3.3
Residual compensation for earth fault elements 39 2.3.3.4 Resistive
reach calculation — phase fault elements 39 2.3.3.5 Resistive reach
calculation — earth fault elements 41 2.3.3.6 Effects of mutual
coupling on distance settings 41 2.3.3.7 Effect of mutual coupling
on Zone 1 setting 41 2.3.3.8 Effect of mutual coupling on Zone 2
setting & Zone 3 when set in the forward direction 41 2.3.4
Power swing blocking (PSB) 42 2.3.4.1 The power swing blocking
element 42 2.3.4.2 Unblocking of the relay for faults during power
swings 43 2.3.5 Teed feeder protection 43 2.3.6 Distance Zone
Characteristic Generation 44 2.3.7 Setting example 44 2.3.7.1 Zone
1 reactive reach setting 45 2.3.7.2 Zone 2 reactive reach setting
45 2.3.7.3 Zone 3 reactive reach setting 46 2.3.7.4 Load avoidance
46 2.3.7.5 Phase element resistive reach settings 46 2.3.7.6
Residual compensation setting 47 2.3.7.7 Ground element resistive
reach settings 47 2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection 47 2.4.1
Overcurrent intertripping feature 49 2.4.2 Overcurrent back-up on
communication channel failure 49 2.4.3 Example setting 50 2.4.4
Directional overcurrent characteristic angle settings 51 2.5
Thermal overload protection 51 2.5.1 Single time constant
characteristic 52 2.5.2 Dual time constant characteristic 52 2.5.3
Setting guidelines 53 2.5.3.1 Single time constant characteristic
53 2.5.3.2 Dual time constant characteristic 53 2.6 Earth fault
protection 53 2.6.1 Directional earth fault protection (P543, P544,
P545 and P546 only) 56 2.6.1.1 Residual voltage polarisation 56
2.6.1.2 Negative sequence polarisation 56 2.6.2 General setting
guidelines for DEF 57 2.7 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) 57
Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545,
P546 Page 3/138 2.7.1 Breaker failure protection configurations 57
2.7.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers 58 2.7.3 Typical
settings 59 2.7.3.1 Breaker fail timer settings 59 2.7.3.2 Breaker
fail undercurrent settings 59 2.8 Broken conductor detection 59
2.8.1 Setting guidelines 60 2.8.2 Example setting 61 2.9
Intertripping facilities 61 2.9.1 Permissive Intertrip 61 2.9.2
User Defined Intertrip/Inter-Relay Commands 62 2.9.2.1 Direct
intertrip 62 3. APPLICATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 63 3.1
Three phase auto-reclosing (applicable to P542) 63 3.1.1 Logic
functions 65 3.1.1.1 Opto-isolated logic inputs 65 3.1.1.1.1 CB
healthy 65 3.1.1.1.2 BAR 65 3.1.1.1.3 Reset lockout 65 3.1.1.2
Autoreclose logic outputs 65 3.1.1.2.1 AR in progress 66 3.1.1.2.2
Successful close 66 3.1.1.2.3 AR status 66 3.1.1.2.4 Block main
prot 66 3.1.1.2.5 Dead T in prog 66 3.1.1.2.6 Auto-close 66 3.1.1.3
Auto reclose alarms 66 3.1.1.3.1 AR CB unhealthy (latched) 66
3.1.1.3.2 AR lockout (self reset) 66 3.1.2 Auto-reclose logic
operating sequence 66 3.1.3 Main operating features 67 3.1.3.1
Operation modes 67 3.1.3.2 Autoreclose initiation 67 3.1.3.3
Blocking instantaneous protection during autoreclose cycle 67
3.1.3.4 Reclaim timer initiation 68 3.1.3.5 Autoreclose inhibit
following manual close 68 3.1.3.6 AR lockout 68 P54x/EN AP/I53
Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 4/138 P543, P544, P545,
P546 3.1.3.6.1 Reset from lockout 68 3.1.4 Setting guidelines 68
3.1.4.1 Number of shots 68 3.1.4.2 Dead timer setting 69 3.1.4.2.1
Load 69 3.1.4.2.2 Circuit breaker 69 3.1.4.2.3 Fault de-ionising
time 70 3.1.4.2.4 Protection reset 70 3.1.4.3 Reclaim timer setting
70 3.2 Single and three phase auto-reclosing (applicable to P543
& P545) 71 3.2.1 Time Delayed and High speed auto-reclosing 71
3.2.2 Relay settings 71 3.2.3 Autoreclose logic inputs 73 3.2.3.1
CB Healthy 73 3.2.3.2 BAR 73 3.2.3.3 Reset lockout 74 3.2.3.4 Pole
discrepancy 74 3.2.3.5 Enable 1 pole AR 74 3.2.3.6 Enable 3 pole AR
74 3.2.3.7 External trip 74 3.2.4 Internal Signals 74 3.2.4.1 Trip
Initiate signals 74 3.2.4.2 Circuit Breaker Status 74 3.2.4.3 Check
Synch OK and System Check OK 74 3.2.5 Autoreclose logic outputs 74
3.2.5.1 AR 1 pole in progress 75 3.2.5.2 AR 3 pole in progress 75
3.2.5.3 Successful close 75 3.2.5.4 AR status 75 3.2.5.5 Auto close
75 3.2.6 Autoreclose alarms 75 3.2.6.1 AR No Checksync (latched) 75
3.2.6.2 AR CB Unhealthy (latched) 75 3.2.6.3 AR lockout (self
reset) 75 3.2.7 Autoreclose logic operating sequence 75 3.2.8 Main
operating features 78 3.2.8.1 Autoreclose modes 78 3.2.8.2
Autoreclose initiation 78 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 5/138 3.2.8.3 Autoreclose
inhibit following manual close 79 3.2.8.4 AR lockout 79 3.2.8.5
Reset from lockout 79 3.2.8.6 System check on shot 1 (called Check
Sinchronising for fast 3 phase reclose on software 13 or previous)
79 3.2.8.7 Immediate Autoreclose with Check Synchronism (since
software 20 and onwards) 79 3.2.9 Setting guidelines 80 3.2.9.1
Number of Shots 80 3.2.9.2 Dead Timer Setting 80 3.2.9.3
De-Ionising Time 80 3.2.9.4 Example Minimum Dead Time Calculation
81 3.2.9.5 Discrimination Timer Setting (since software 20 and
onwards) 81 3.2.9.6 Reclaim Timer Setting 81 3.3 System Checks
(applicable to P543 & P545) 82 3.3.1 System Checks (for version
20 and onwards) 82 3.3.1.1 Overview 82 3.3.1.2 VT selection 82
3.3.1.3 Basic functionality 82 3.3.1.4 System Check Logic Inputs 84
3.3.1.5 System Check Logic Outputs 84 3.3.1.6 Check sync 2 and
system split 84 3.3.1.7 Synchronism check 85 3.3.1.8 Slip control
by timer 86 3.3.1.9 System split 86 3.3.2 Check synchronisation
(applicable to P543 & P545) For version 13 and previous 87 3.4
Autoreclose /Check Synchronisation Interface (Valid for software 20
and onwards) 89 3.5 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) (P543,
P544, P545 & P546 only) 90 3.5.1 Loss of one or two phase
voltages 90 3.5.2 Loss of all three phase voltages under load
conditions 90 3.5.3 Absence of three phase voltages upon line
energisation 90 3.5.4 Menu settings 91 3.6 Circuit breaker state
monitoring 91 3.6.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring features 92
3.7 Circuit breaker condition monitoring (P541, P542, P543 and
P545) 93 3.7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features 93
3.7.2 Setting guidelines 94 3.7.2.1 Setting the E I^ thresholds 94
3.7.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds 94 P54x/EN
AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 6/138 P543, P544,
P545, P546 3.7.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds 95 3.7.2.4
Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds 95 3.8 Circuit
breaker control 95 3.8.1 CB Control using Hotkeys (Since software
20 and onwards) 97 3.9 Fault locator (P543, P544, P545 and P546) 98
3.9.1 Fault locator 98 3.9.1.1 Introduction 98 3.9.1.2 Basic theory
for ground faults 99 3.9.1.3 Data acquisition and buffer processing
99 3.9.1.4 Faulted phase selection 99 3.9.1.5 The fault location
calculation 99 3.9.1.5.1 Obtaining the vectors 100 3.9.1.5.2
Solving the equation for the fault location 100 3.9.1.6 Mutual
compensation 101 3.9.1.7 Fault locator settings 101 3.9.1.8 Fault
locator trigger 102 3.9.1.9 Setting example 102 3.10 Event &
fault records 103 3.10.1 Types of Event 104 3.10.1.1 Change of
state of opto-isolated inputs 104 3.10.1.2 Change of state of one
or more output relay contacts 104 3.10.1.3 Relay alarm conditions
104 3.10.1.4 Protection element starts and trips 105 3.10.1.5
General events 105 3.10.1.6 Fault records 105 3.10.1.7 Maintenance
reports 105 3.10.1.8 Setting Changes 106 3.10.2 Resetting of
event/fault records 106 3.10.3 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1
Support Software 106 3.10.4 Event Filtering 107 3.11 Disturbance
recorder 107 3.12 Measurements 108 Application Notes P54x/EN
AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 7/138 3.12.1
Measured voltages and currents 109 3.12.2 Sequence voltages and
currents 109 3.12.3 Slip Frequency (Since software 20 and onwards)
109 3.12.4 Power and energy quantities 109 3.12.5 Rms. Voltages and
Currents 110 3.12.6 Demand Values 110 3.12.6.1 Fixed Demand Values
110 3.12.6.2 Rolling Demand Values 110 3.12.6.3 Peak Demand Values
110 3.12.7 Settings 110 3.12.7.1 Default Display 111 3.12.7.2 Local
Values 111 3.12.7.3 Remote Values 111 3.12.7.4 Remote2 Values
(Since software 12 and onwards) 111 3.12.7.5 Measurement Ref 111
3.12.7.6 Measurement Mode 111 3.12.7.7 Fixed Demand Period 111
3.12.7.8 Rolling Sub-Period and Number of Sub-Periods 111 3.12.7.9
Distance Unit 111 3.12.7.10 Fault Location 111 3.13 Changing
Setting Groups 111 3.14 Control inputs (Since software 20 and
onwards) 112 3.15 Real time clock synchronization via opto-inputs
(Since software 20 and onwards) 113 4. FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS 114
4.1 Logic input mapping 114 4.2 Relay output mapping 115 4.3 Relay
output conditioning 116 4.4 LED mapping 116 4.5 LED output
conditioning 117 4.6 Fault recorder start mapping 117 5. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 118 5.1 Current differential protection
118 6. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU 119 6.1 Opto I/P status 119 6.2
Relay O/P status 120 6.3 Test Port status 120 6.4 LED status 120
P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 8/138 P543,
P544, P545, P546 6.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8 120 6.6 Test mode 120 6.7
Test pattern 121 6.8 Contact test 121 6.9 Test LEDs 121 6.10 Test
autoreclose 121 6.11 Test Loopback 121 6.12 DDB Status 122 6.13
Using a monitor/download port test box 122 7. COMMUNICATIONS
BETWEEN RELAYS 122 7.1 Communications link options 122 7.1.1 Direct
optical fibre link, 850nm multi-mode fibre 122 7.1.2 Direct optical
fibre link, 1300nm multi-mode fibre 122 7.1.3 Direct optical fibre
link, 1300nm single-mode fibre 123 7.1.4 Direct optical fibre link,
1550nm single-mode fibre 123 7.1.5 IEEE C37.94 interface to
multiplexer (since software 30) 123 7.1.6 Switched communication
networks 123 7.1.6.1 Switched communication networks (P541, P542,
P543 & P544) 123 7.1.6.2 Switched communication networks with
Permanent or Semi-Permanent Split Routings 125 7.2 Optical budgets
125 7.3 P590 Series optical fibre to electrical interface units 126
7.3.1 Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using
auxiliary optical fibres and type P591 interface 126 7.3.2
Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary
optical fibres and type P592 interface 127 7.3.3 Multiplexer link
with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibres and
type P593 interface 127 7.4 Protection communications scheme set-up
128 7.4.1 Dual redundant (Hot Standby) 129 7.5 Protection
communications address 129 7.6 Reconfiguration of three-ended
system 130 7.6.1 User reconfiguration 131 7.6.2 Energisation
reconfiguration 132 7.7 Clock source 132 7.7.1 Internal clock
source 132 7.7.2 External clock source 133 7.8 Data rate 133 7.9
Communication alarm 133 7.10 Communication error statistics 133
Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545,
P546 Page 9/138 7.11 Communications delay timer 133 7.12
Communications fail timer 134 7.13 Communications fail mode 134
7.14 MiCOM P594 Global Positioning System (GPS) Synchronising
Module 134 7.14.1 Synchronising Module Output 135 7.14.2 P594
Operation 136 7.14.3 P594 Options 137 7.14.4 P594 Synchronising
Module Block Diagram 138 Figure 1: Relay bias characteristic 17
Figure 2: Propagation delay measurement 19 Figure 3: Example of
switched Synchronous Digital Hierarchy 20 Figure 4: Data
Transmission 21 Figure 5: Capacitive charging current 22 Figure 6:
Transformer magnetising characteristic 24 Figure 7: Magnetising
inrush waveforms 25 Figure 8: Need for zero-sequence current
filtering 26 Figure 9: Breaker and a half switched substation 28
Figure 10: Typical plain feeder circuit 30 Figure 11: Typical
transformer feeder circuit 31 Figure 12: Typical Teed Feeder
Application 33 Figure 13: Three Winding Transformer in Zone
Application 35 Figure 14: Phase fault distance characteristics 38
Figure 15: Earth fault distance characteristics 38 Figure 16:
Setting of resistive reach to avoid load 40 Figure 17: Zone 1 reach
settings for parallel lines 41 Figure 18: Mutual coupling example
Zone 2 reach considerations 42 Figure 19: Power swing blocking
characteristic 43 Figure 20: Teed feeder application apparent
impedance seen by distance relay 44 Figure 21: Example system 45
Figure 22: Ring main application overcurrent back-up 50 Figure 23:
Permissive intertrip 61 Figure 24: Direct intertrip 62 Figure 25:
P542 Auto Reclose Timing Diagram 65 Figure 26: Autoreclose timing
diagram 77 P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page
10/138 P543, P544, P545, P546 Figure 27: Autoreclose timing diagram
77 Figure 28: Autoreclose timing diagram 78 Figure 29: Autoreclose
timing diagram 78 Figure 30: Synchro check and synchro split
functionality 87 Figure 31: Remote control of circuit breaker 96
Figure 32: CB Control hotkey menu 98 Figure 33: Two-machine
equivalent circuit 99 Figure 34: Fault locator selection of fault
current zero 100 Figure 35: Switched communication network 124
Figure 36: Transient bias characteristic 125 Figure 37: 3-terminal
system connection 130 Figure 38: Network incorporating GPS
synchronising module 134 Figure 39: GPS synchronising module output
local end 135 Figure 40: GPS Synchronising module output local and
remote ends 136 Figure 41: P594 Synchronising Module Block Diagram
138 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 11/138 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Protection of overhead
lines and cable circuits Overhead lines, typically ranging from
10kV distribution lines to 800kV transmission lines, are probably
the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system.
It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them
provides secure and reliable operation. For distribution systems,
continuity of supply is of paramount importance. The majority of
faults on overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent in nature.
Multi-shot autoreclose cycles are therefore commonly used in
conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements to increase system
availability. For permanent faults it is essential that only the
faulted section of plant is isolated. As such, high speed,
discriminative fault clearance is often a fundamental requirement
of any protection scheme on a distribution network. The
requirements for a transmission network must also take into account
system stability. Where systems are not highly interconnected the
use of single phase tripping and high speed autoreclosure is often
required. This in turn dictates the need for very high speed
protection to reduce overall fault clearance times. Many line
configurations exist which need to be addressed. Transmission
applications may typically consist of 2 or 3 terminal applications,
possibly fed from breaker and a half or mesh arrangements. Lower
voltage applications may again be 2 or 3 terminal configurations
with the added complications of in zone transformers or small teed
load transformers. Charging current may also adversely affect
protection. This is a problem particularly with cables and long
transmission lines. Both the initial inrush and steady state
charging current must not cause relay maloperation and pre
MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, 546 Technical Guide Current
Differential Protection Relays Platform Hardware Version: J
Platform Software Version: 20 & 30 Publication Reference:
P54x/EN T/I53 P54x/EN T/I53 2011. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any
alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of
ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the
property of their respective companies. The technical and other
data contained in this document is provided for information only.
Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility
for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty
(whether express or implied), as to the accuracy or completeness of
such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria
where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or
change this data at any time without further notice. GRID Technical
Guide P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 CURRENT
DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
CONTENT Errata Section Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety
Instructions Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53Application Notes P54x/EN
AP/I53Relay Description P54x/EN HW/I53Technical Data P54x/EN
TD/I53Menu Content Tables P54x/EN HI/I53SCADA Communications
P54x/EN CT/I53UCA2.0 Communications P54x/EN UC/I53Relay Menu
Database P54x/EN GC/I53External Connection Diagrams P54x/EN
CO/I53Hardware / Software Version History & Compatibility
P54x/EN VC/I53Scheme Logic Diagrams P54x/EN LG/I53 P54x/EN T/I53
Technical Guide MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Issue
Control P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page
1/6 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref. Section
Page Description Throughout Company name changed IT 2 4/5
Introduction to MiCOM Guides 2 lines deleted IT 3.3 9 Menu
structure Sentence changed IT 3.8 17 First rear communication Title
& paragraph amended IT 3.8.2 20/21 Modbus communication New
cell added to end of section IT 3.9 23 Ethernet Rear Port (option)
New section inserted AP Throughout All instances of Courier
Database chapter replaced with Relay Menu Database chapter. AP
1.2.1 12 Protection features New bullet point added to end of
section AP 1.2.2 13 Non-protection features New bullet point added
to end of section Two paragraphs replaced AP 2.1 15 Configuration
column Last 4 rows in table amended AP 2.2.1 15/16 Differential
protection configuration Data in table deleted Last 3 rows of table
added AP 2.2.2 18 Phase differential characteristics Data in table
amended and line added AP 2.2.11.3 33 Teed feeder example Figure
12: Diagram updated AP 2.2.11.4 35 Three winding transformer in
zone with different rated CTs example Figure 13: Diagram updated AP
2.3 37 Distance protection Table 6: Data amended AP 2.3.1 38 Phase
fault distance protection Figure 14 & 15: Note 2 replaced AP
2.3.7.6 47 Residual compensation setting Sentence replaced AP 2.4
48 Phase fault overcurrent protection Data in table amended and
line added AP 2.4 49 Phase fault overcurrent protection Table 9:
Data amended AP 2.6 54 Earth fault protection Table 14: Data in
table amended and line added AP 2.6 55 Earth fault protection Table
15: Data in table amended and line added AP 3.2.2 72/73 Relay
settings P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 2/6
P543, P544, P545, P546 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005
Doc Ref. Section Page Description Table 20: Data amended AP 3.2.8.6
80 System check on shot 1 (called Check Sinchronising for fast 3
phase reclose on software 13 or previous) Paragraph amended AP
3.2.8.7 80 Immediate Autoreclose with Check Synchronism (since
software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.2.9.5 81
Discrimination Timer Setting (since software 20 and onwards) Title
replaced AP 3.3.1 82 System Checks (for version 20 and onwards)
Title replaced AP 3.3.1.1 82 Overview Text moved to new section AP
3.3.2 87/90 Check synchronisation (applicable to P543 & P545)
For version 13 and previous Whole new section added AP 3.4 90
Autoreclose /Check Synchronisation Interface (Valid for sotfware 20
and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.7.1 94 Circuit breaker condition
monitoring features Table 25: Data amended AP 3.8 95 Circuit
breaker control Bullet point replaced AP 3.8.1 98 CB Control using
Hotkeys (Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.9.1.7
102 Fault locator settings Data in table amended AP 3.10 103 Event
& fault records Paragraph amended Data in table amended AP
3.10.1.3 105 Relay alarm conditions Table 29: Data amended AP 3.11
107 Disturbance recorder Paragraphs amended AP 3.12 109
Measurements Bullet point replaced AP 3.12.3 109 Slip Frequency
(Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.12.7 110
Settings Table 32: Data amended AP 3.12.7.4 110 Remote2 Values
(Since software 12 and onwards) Title replaced AP 3.13 112 Changing
Setting Groups First and second paragraph replaced Issue Control
P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 3/6
Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref. Section Page
Description AP 3.14 112 Control inputs (Since software 20 and
onwards) Title replaced AP 3.15 113 Real time clock synchronization
via opto-inputs (Since software 20 and onwards) Title replaced AP
5. 118 Current Transformer Requirements Data replaced AP 6. 119
Commissioning Test Menu Data in table amended Data added to end of
table AP 6.10 121 Test autoreclose Information replaced AP 6.11 121
Test Loopback Whole section replaced AP 6.12 122 DDB Status
Existing section 6.13 renumbered and new section 6.12 added AP 7.1
122 Communications link options Whole section replaced AP 7.1.5 123
IEEE C37.94 interface to multiplexer Existing sections renumbered
and new section 7.1.5 added AP 7.1.5 123 IEEE C37.94 interface to
multiplexer (since software 30) added to heading AP 7.1.6.1 123
Switched communication networks (P541, P542, P543 & P544)
Paragraph amended AP 7.7 132 Clock source Line added to end of
section AP 7.8 133 Data rate Line added to end of section AP 7.13
134 Communications fail mode Sentence replaced HW 1.1.4 3 Analogue
/ Digital Input module Whole section replaced HW 1.1.8 4 Ethernet
board Figure 1: Diagram updated HW 2.4.2 7 Input board Term
replaced Figure 2: Diagram updated HW 2.4.3 8 Universal opto
isolated logic inputs Whole section replaced HW 3.3 13 Platform
software Term added to last sentence HW 4.1.2 17 Initialisation
software New bullet point added HW 4.2 17 Continuous self-testing
P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 4/6 P543, P544,
P545, P546 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc Ref.
Section Page Description Replaced term Sentence replaced Sentence
changed to bullet point TD 1. 7 Reference conditions Data in table
amended and line added TD 2.1.4 9 Inverse time (IDMT)
characteristic Data in table amended TD 2.1.4.2 9 Required Time
Dial Settings for IEEE / US curves Data in table amended and line
added TD 2.1.6 10 Vectorial compensation settings (P541 and P542)
Data in table amended TD 2.2.2.1 12 Inverse Time (IDMT)
Characteristic Data in table amended TD 2.2.2.3 12 Time Dial
Settings for IEEE/US curves Data in table amended and line added TD
2.2.5 15 ANSI/IEEE IDMT curves Figure 2.2.5: Diagram updated TD
2.3.4.4 18 Polarising Quantities Data in table amended TD 2.13.1 20
Setting ranges New line added to end of table TD 6.1.1 25 Features
Data added to table TD 6.3.1 26 Level settings Data in table
amended and line added TD 8.2 27 Rear Port 1 Table replaced TD
10.1.4 31 Universal Logic inputs (P540 range) Table replaced TD
11.1 33 CT Requirements (P540 range) Data replaced TD 18.5 44
Battery life (P540 range) Line added to table CT 1. 5 Introduction
New section 1.1 added to end of introduction CT 2.1 5 Courier
protocol Text inserted CT 2.7 10 Disturbance record extraction
Whole section replaced CT 3.1 11 Communication Link Text added to
beginning of section CT 3.6.6 21 Record data Sentence deleted CT
3.8 22/24 Date and Time Format (Data Type G12) Whole section
replaced Issue Control P54x/EN T/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 5/6 Manual Issue H Amendments completed 02.2005 Doc
Ref. Section Page Description CT 4.1 25 Physical connection and
link layer Text deleted CT 5.1 28 DNP3 Protocol Text inserted UC
3.4.3 12 UCA2.0 Settings & Statistics Data added to table GC —
— Courier menu database Amended to reflect latest relay software VC
— — Hardware/software version history and compatibility Amended to
reflect latest relay software LG — 1 Distance P543/P544/P545/P546
Zone 1 Tripping Logic Figure 1: Diagram amended LG — 1 Distance
P543/P544/P545/P546 Zone 2 Tripping Logic Figure 2: Diagram amended
LG — 14 CB failure for P541/P542 with Three Pole Tripping Figure
25: Diagram amended LG — 8 Autoreclose P543/P545 Single/Three Pole
Tripping Figure 17: Diagram amended LG — 9 Autoreclose P543/P545
Inhibit Sequence Count Figure 18: Diagram amended LG — 10
Autoreclose P543/P545 Cycles Figure 19: Diagram amended LG — 13
Autoreclose P543/P545 Force 3 Pole Trip Figure 22: Diagram amended
LG — 14 P543/P545 DDB Pole Discrepancy Trip Figure24: Diagram
amended LG — 16 VTS Logic Figure 29: Diagram amended LG — 24
Autoreclose P543/P545 Repeat Closer Figure 37: Diagram amended
P54x/EN T/I53 Issue Control MiCOM P541, P542, Page 6/6 P543, P544,
P545, P546 HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A person s normal
movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor
devices when handling circuits can cause serious damage, which
often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits of ALSTOM
Grid are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic discharge
when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of
damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module
incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw
a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the
high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been
designed and manufactured. 1. Before removing a module, ensure that
you are a same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching
the case. 2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges
of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic
components, printed circuit track or connectors. 3. Do not pass the
module to any person without first ensuring that you are both at
the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves
equipotential. 4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on
a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. 5.
Store or transport the module in a conductive bag. More information
on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F. If you are making measurements on
the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is
preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k
10M ohms. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain
regular contact with the case to prevent the build up of static.
Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be
earthed to the case whenever possible. ALSTOM Grid strongly
recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special
Handling Area such as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F. CONTENT
1. SAFETY SECTION 3 1.1 Health and safety 3 1.2 Explanation of
symbols and labels 3 2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3
3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 4 3.1 Current transformer
circuits 4 3.2 External resistors 4 3.3 Battery replacement 4 3.4
Insulation and dielectric strength testing 4 3.5 Insertion of
modules and pcb cards 4 3.6 Fibre optic communication 5 4. OLDER
PRODUCTS 5 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5 6. TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS 6 1. SAFETY SECTION This Safety Section should be
read before commencing any work on the equipment. 1.1 Health and
safety The information in the Safety Section of the product doc
umentation is intended to ensure that products are properly
installed and handled in order to maintain them in a safe
condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with
the equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety
Section. 1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels The meaning of
symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below. Caution: refer to product
documentation Caution: risk of electric shock Protective/ safety
*earth terminal Functional *earth terminal Note: This symbol may
also be used for a protective/ safety earth terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power
supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUTTHE
PRODUCTDOCUMENTATION IS THE DIRECTEQUIVALENTOF THE NORTH AMERICAN
TERM GROUND. 2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment
connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or
servicing work on this equipment should be aware of the correct
working procedures to ensure safety. The product documentation
should be consulted before installing, commissioning or servicing
the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning
and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the
equipment is electrically isolated. If there is unlocked access to
the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to
avoid electrical shock or energy hazards. Voltage and c urrent
connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to
ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained
for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the
correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the
protective earth terminal, or the appropriate termination of the
supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. Omitting or
disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a safety hazard. The
recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise
stated in the technical data section of the product doc umentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
Voltage rating and polarity; CTcircuit rating and integrity of
connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of earth connection
(where applicable) Remove front plate plastic film protection
Remove insulating strip from battery compartment 3. EQUIPMENT
OPERATING CONDITIONS The equipment should be operated within the
specified electrical and environmental limits. 3.1 Current
transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT
since the high level voltage produced may be lethal to personnel
and could damage insulation. 3.2 External resistors Where external
resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of
electric shock or burns, if touched. 3.3 Battery replacement Where
internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the
recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity, to
avoid possible damage to the equipment. 3.4 Insulation and
dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors
charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the
test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge
capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. 3.5 Insertion
of modules and pcb cards These must not be inserted into or
withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised since this may
result in damage. 3.6 Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic
communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the
operation or signal level of the device. 4. OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments Equipments which require direct physical
adjustments to their operating mechanism to change current or
voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed before
making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments The electrical power to the relay contacts
should be removed before checking any mechanical settings, to avoid
any risk of electric shock. Draw out case relays Removal of the
cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards When using an extender
card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment
whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage
hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender
card. Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs When
using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place
before insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL Decommissioning: The auxiliary
supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors across the
supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards,
after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both poles of
any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the
external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is
recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is
avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any
products containing batteries should have them removed before
disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular
regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the
disposal of lithium batteries. 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the
external protective fuse for this equipment is 16A, Red Spot type
or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation. Insulation class: IEC
601010-1 : 1990/ A2 : 2001 Class I EN 61010-1: 2001 Class I This
equipment requires a protective (safety) earth connection to ensure
user safety. Insulation Category (Overvoltage): IEC 601010-1 :
1990/ A2 : 1995 Category III EN 61010-1: 2001 Category III
Distribution level, fixed insulation. Equipment in this category is
qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/ 50s, 5000.5J, between all
supply circ uits and earth and also between independent circuits.
Environment: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/ A2 : 1995 Pollution degree 2 EN
61010-1: 2001 Pollution degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by
reference to generic safety standards. Product Safety: 72/ 23/ EEC
EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2002 Compliance with the European
Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by
reference to generic safety standards. Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 INTRODUCTION P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546
Page 1/24 CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM 3 2. INTRODUCTION TO
MICOM GUIDES 4 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 6 3.1
Introduction to the relay 6 3.1.1 Front panel 6 3.1.2 Relay rear
panel 7 3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings
options 8 3.3 Menu structure 9 3.3.1 Protection settings 10 3.3.2
Disturbance recorder settings 10 3.3.3 Control and support settings
10 3.4 Password protection 10 3.5 Relay configuration 11 3.6 Front
panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 12 3.6.1 Default display and
menu time-out 13 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 13
3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation 13 3.6.3.1 Setting group selection 13
3.6.3.2 Control Inputs user assignable functions 14 3.6.3.3 CB
Control 14 3.6.4 Password entry 14 3.6.5 Reading and clearing of
alarm messages and fault records 15 3.6.6 Setting changes 15 3.7
Front communication port user interface 16 3.8 First rear
communication port 17 3.8.1 Courier communication 17 3.8.2 Modbus
communication 19 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 21 3.8.4
DNP 3.0 Communication 22 3.9 Second Rear Communication Port
(option) 23 3.10 Ethernet Rear Port (option) 23 Figure 1: Relay
front view 6 Figure 2: Relay rear view 8 P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 2/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
Figure 3: Menu structure 9 Figure 4: Front panel user interface 12
Figure 5: Hotkey menu navigation 14 Figure 6: Front port connection
16 Figure 7: PC relay signal connection 17 Figure 8: Remote
communication connection arrangements 18 Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 3/24 1.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of
meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range
of components, systems and services from ALSTOM Grid — SAS. Central
to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to
define an application solution and, through extensive communication
capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control
system. The components within MiCOM are: — P range protection
relays; — C range control products; — M range measurement products
for accurate metering and monitoring; — S range versatile PC
support and substation control packages. MiCOM products include
extensive facilities for recording information on the state and
behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records.
They can also provide measurements of the system at regular
intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and
control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM
product, visit our website: www.alstom.com/grid/sas P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 4/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES The guides provide a functional and
technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a
comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and
application. Divided into two volumes, as follows: Volume 1
Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the
relay and a technical description of its features. It is mainly
intended for protection engineers concerned with the selection and
application of the relay for the protection of the power system.
Volume 2 Operation Guide, contains information on the installation
and commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault
finding. This volume is intended for site engineers who are
responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of
the relay. The chapter content within each volume is summarised
below: Volume 1 Technical Guide Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section P54x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different
user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay. P54x/EN AP Application Notes Comprehensive and
detailed description of the features of the relay including both
the protection elements and the relays other functions such as
event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable
scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power
system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings,
some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the
relay. P54x/EN HW Relay Description Overview of the operation of
the relays hardware and software. This chapter includes information
on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P54x/EN
TD Technical Data Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy
limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance
data. Compliance with technical standards is quoted where
appropriate. P54x/EN CT Communications and Interface Guide This
chapter provides detailed information regarding the communication
interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to
access the settings database stored within the relay. The chapter
also gives information on each of the communication protocols that
can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the user to
design a custom interface to a SCADA system. P54x/EN UC UCA2.0
Communications The chapter gives information on the UCA2.0
communication protocol that can be used with the relay. P54x/EN GC
Relay Menu Database: User Interface / Courier / Modbus / IEC
60870-5-103/ DNP 3.0 Listing of all of the settings contained
within the relay together with a brief description of each. P54x/EN
CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring connections to
the relay. P54x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and
Compatibility Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543,
P544, P545, P546 Page 5/24 P54x/EN HI Menu Table Contents Volume 2
Operation Guide Handling of Electronic Equipment Safety Section
P54x/EN IT Introduction A guide to the different user interfaces of
the protection relay describing how to start using the relay.
P54x/EN IN Installation Recommendations on unpacking, handling,
inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and
electrical installation of the relay is provided incorporating
earthing recommendations. P594/EN IN P594 Installation Notes
P54x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Instructions on how to
commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and
functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the
relay is outlined. P54x/EN PR Problem Analysis Advice on how to
recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.
P54x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User Interface / Courier / Modbus /
IEC 60870-5-103/ DNP 3.0 / UCA2.0 Listing of all of the settings
contained within the relay together with a brief description of
each. P54x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams All external wiring
connections to the relay. P54x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version
History and Compatibility P54x/EN HI Menu Table Contents Repair
Form P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 6/24 P543,
P544, P545, P546 3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE The settings
and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both
from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear
communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given
in this section to describe how to get started using the relay. 3.1
Introduction to the relay 3.1.1 Front panel The front panel of the
relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and
bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the
front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover.
With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is
possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the
environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows
access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad
is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be
unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If
the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be
removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the
bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of
the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to
release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
User programablefunction LEDsTRIPALARMOUT OF SERVICEHEALTHY= CLEAR=
READ= ENTERSER NoDIAG NoInVxVnVV1/5 A 50/60 HzSerial No and I*, V
RatingsTop coverFixedfunctionLEDsBottomcoverBattery compartment
Front comms port Download/monitor portKeypadLCDP0103ENbHotkeys
Figure 1: Relay front view Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541,
P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 7/24 The front panel of the relay
includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1: — a 16-character
by 3-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). — a 9 key
keypad comprising 4 arrow keys , and ), an enter key (), a clear
key (), a read key () and 2 additional hotkeys (). — 12 LEDs; 4
fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. Hotkey
functionality: — SCROLL Starts scrolling through the various
default displays — STOP Stops scrolling the default display Under
the top hinged cover: — the relay serial number, and the relays
current and voltage rating information*. Under the bottom hinged
cover: — battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which
is used for memory back-up for the real time clock, event, fault
and disturbance records. — a 9-pin female D-type front port for
communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance)
via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection. — a 25-pin female D-type
port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed local
downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection. The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the
front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: Trip
(Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is
reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front
display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be
self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay
has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or
maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been
accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant
illumination, and will extinguish when the alarms have been
cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays
protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay
is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will
be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that
there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state
of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back
of the relay. To improve the visibility of the settings via the
front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the LCD
Contrast setting in the CONFIGURATION column. 3.1.2 Relay rear
panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current
and voltage signals*, digital logic input signals and output
contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at
the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the
optical fibre rear communication port which are both optional.
P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 8/24 P543, P544,
P545, P546 D E F C B AIRIG BTXPORT 1RXOptional IRIG-B board Digital
input connectionsCurrent* and voltageinput terminalsDigital
output(relays) connectionsRear comms port(RS485)Power
supplyconnectionP0104ENa Figure 2: Relay rear view Refer to the
wiring diagram in the External Connection Diagrams chapter (P54x/EN
CO) for complete connection details. 3.2 Introduction to the user
interfaces and settings options The relay has three user
interfaces: — the front panel user interface via the LCD and
keypad. — the front port which supports Courier communication. —
the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier,
Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or UCA2.0. The protocol for the
rear port must be specified when the relay is ordered. The
measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed
from the five interfaces are summarised in Table 1. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 9/24
Keypad/LCD Courier Modbus IEC870-5-103 DNP3.0 UCA2.0 Display &
modification of all settings Digital I/O signal status
Display/extraction of measurements Display/extraction of fault
records Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic
settings Reset of fault & alarm records Clear event & fault
records Time synchronisation Control commands Table 1 3.3 Menu
structure The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each
setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the
menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The
settings are arranged so that each column contains related
settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are
contained within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row
of each column contains the heading which describes the settings
contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the
menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list
of all of the menu settings is given the Relay Menu Database
Chapter (P54x/EN GC) of the manual. Up to 4 protection setting
groupsColumndatasettingsColumn headerControl & support Group 1
Group 2System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault
Overcurrent Ground faultRepeated for groups 2, 3 and 4P0106ENa
Figure 3: Menu structure P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541,
P542, Page 10/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 All of the settings in the
menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S)
settings. One of two different methods is used to change a setting
depending on which category the setting falls into. Control and
support settings are stored and used by the relay immediately after
they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a
temporary scratchpad. It activates all the new settings together,
but only after it has been confirmed that the new settings are to
be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of
protection settings will all take effect at the same time. 3.3.1
Protection settings The protection settings include the following
items: — protection element settings — scheme logic settings —
auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where
appropriate)* — fault locator settings (where appropriate)* There
are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing
the same setting cells. One group of protection settings is
selected as the active group, and is used by the protection
elements. 3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings The disturbance
recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal
sources that trigger the recording. 3.3.3 Control and support
settings The control and support settings include: — relay
configuration settings — open/close circuit breaker* — CT & VT
ratio settings* — reset LEDs — active protection setting group —
password & language settings — circuit breaker control &
monitoring settings* — communications settings — measurement
settings — event & fault record settings — user interface
settings — commissioning settings 3.4 Password protection The menu
structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that
is enabled determines which of the relays settings can be changed
and is controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels
of access are summarised in Table 2. Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 11/24 Access
level Operations enabled Level 0 No password required Read access
to all settings, alarms, event records and fault records Level 1
Password 1 or 2 As level 0 plus: Control commands, e.g. circuit
breaker open/close. Reset of fault and alarm conditions. Reset
LEDs. Clearing of event and fault records. Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Password 2 required All other settings Table 2 Each of the two
passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once
it has been correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved
either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted, or by moving
to the Password cell in the System data column of the menu. The
level of access is independently enabled for each interface, that
is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication
port, the front panel access will remain at level 0 unless the
relevant password is entered at the front panel. The access level
enabled by the password entry will time-out independently for each
interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default
level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be
supplied — contact ALSTOM Grid with the relays serial number. The
current level of access enabled for an interface can be determined
by examining the ‘Access level’ cell in the ‘System data’ column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also
be found as one of the default display options. Additionally the
current level of access for each interface is available for use in
the PSL by mapping to the following DDB signals: — HMI Access Lvl 1
— HMI Access Lvl 2 — FPort AccessLvl1 — FPort AccessLvl2 — RPrt1
AccessLvl1 — RPrt1 AccessLvl2 — RPrt2 AccessLvl1 — RPrt2 AccessLvl2
Each pair of DDB signals indicate the access level as follows: —
Lvl 1 off, Lvl 2 off = 0 — Lvl 1 on, Lvl 2 off = 1 — Lvl 1 off, Lvl
2 on = 2 The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2,
such that no password is required to change any of the relay
settings. It is also possible to set the default menu access level
to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access
level is set in the Password control cell which is found in the
System data column of the menu (note that this setting can only be
changed when level 2 access is enabled). 3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous
different protection, control and communication features. In order
to simplify the setting of the relay, there is a configuration
settings column which can be used to enable or disable many of the
functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function
that is disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the
menu. To disable a function change the relevant cell in the
Configuration column from Enabled to Disabled. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 12/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
The configuration column controls which of the four protection
settings groups is selected as active through the Active settings
cell. A protection setting group can also be disabled in the
configuration column, provided it is not the present active group.
Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active
group. The column also allows all of the setting values in one
group of protection settings to be copied to another group. To do
this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group
to be copied, then set the Copy to cell to the protection group
where the copy is to be placed. The copied settings are initially
placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used by the
relay following confirmation. To restore the default values to the
settings in any protection settings group, set the Restore defaults
cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to
set the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the
default values to all of the relays settings, not just the
protection groups settings. The default settings will initially be
placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after
they have been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all
settings includes the rear communication port settings, which may
result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the
new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is
exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD. The , and keys which are
used for menu navigation and setting value changes include an
auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these keys
are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both
setting value changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is
held depressed, the faster the rate of change or movement becomes.
SystemfrequencyDate and time3-phase voltageAlarm messagesOther
default displaysColumn 1Sytem dataColumn 2View recordsColumn nGroup
4OvercurrentData 1.1LanguageData 2.1Last recordData n.1|>1
functionData 1.2PasswordData 2.2Time and dateData n.2|>1
directionalData 1.nPasswordlevel 2Data 2.nC A voltageData n.n|>
char angleOther settingcells incolumn 1Other settingcells incolumn
2Other settingcells incolumn nOther column headingsNote: The C key
will return to column header from any menu cellCCCP0105ENa Figure
4: Front panel user interface Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 13/24 3.6.1 Default display
and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default
display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display
and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad
inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been
confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the
following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage,
power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a
user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with
the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from
the default display the different default display options can be
scrolled through using the and keys. However the menu selected
default display will be restored following the menu time-out
elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay
(e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the
default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to
the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display
and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults
present message. 3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing The
menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the
structure shown in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display
the key will display the first column heading. To select the
required column heading use the and keys. The setting data
contained in the column can then be viewed by using the and keys.
It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key .
It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading
level. To return to the default display press the key or the clear
key from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go
straight to the default display from within one of the column cells
using the auto-repeat facility of the key, as the auto-repeat will
stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the key
must be released and pressed again. 3.6.3 Hotkey menu navigation
The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below
the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access
keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on
the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display
the direct access key below the HOTKEY text must be pressed. Once
in the hotkey menu the and keys can be used to scroll between the
available options and the direct access keys can be used to control
the function currently displayed. If neither the or keys are
pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay
will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act
to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The
layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The
top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy
menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom
line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The
functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below. 3.6.3.1
Setting group selection The user can either scroll using through
the available setting groups or the setting group that is currently
displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming
the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the
user is prompted with the or options again. The user can exit the
sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 14/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
For more information on setting group selection refer to Changing
setting group section in the application guide. 3.6.3.2 Control
Inputs user assignable functions The number of control inputs (user
assignable functions USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is
user configurable in the CTRL I/P CONFIG column. The chosen inputs
can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer
to the Control Inputs section in the application guide. 3.6.3.3 CB
Control The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to
another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the
hotkey menu refer to the Circuit breaker control section of the
application guide. HOT KEY MENUEXITMiCOMP54xHOTKEY CB CTRL
SETTING GROUP 1SELECT
NXT GRPCONTROL INPUT 1ON
EXITCONTROL INPUT 2ON
EXITCONTROL INPUT 2ON
EXITSETTING GROUP 2SELECT
NXT GRPSETTING GROUP 2SELECTED
CONTROL INPUT 1ON
CONTROL INPUT 1EXIT
OFFConfirmationscreendisplayed for2
secondsConfirmationscreendispalyed for2 seconds(See CB Control in
Application Notes)Default DisplayNOTE: Key returnsthe user to the
HotkeyMenu ScreenP1246ENe Figure 5: Hotkey menu navigation 3.6.4
Password entry When entry of a password is required the following
prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 Note: The password
required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above A
flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password
may be changed. Press the and keys to vary each character between A
and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use
the and keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key
The display will revert to Enter Password if an incorrect password
is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of
access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the
selected setting then the display will return to the setting page
to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has
not been entered then the password Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 15/24 prompt page will be
returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key .
Alternatively, the password can be entered using the Password cell
of the System data column. For the front panel user interface the
password protected access will revert to the default access level
after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by
moving to the Password menu cell in the System data column and
pressing the clear key instead of entering a password. 3.6.5
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The
presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the
default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm
messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case
they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the
read key. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the
alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and
the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To
scroll through the pages of this use the key. When all pages of the
fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear:
Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press ; to
return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms
uncleared, press . Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm
messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the
alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as
will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the
alarm viewer has been entered using the key, the key can be
pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record.
Pressing again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where
pressing once more will clear all alarms. 3.6.6 Setting changes To
change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display
the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key
which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that
the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate
password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the
or keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text
string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be
selected using theand keys. When the desired new value has been
reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing
Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear
button is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection
group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must
be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when
all required changes have been entered, return to the column
heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default
display the following prompt will be given: Update settings Enter
or clear Pressing will result in the new settings being adopted,
pressing will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values.
It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded
if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been
confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately
after they are entered, without Update settings prompt. P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 16/24 P543, P544, P545,
P546 3.7 Front communication port user interface The front
communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector
located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232
serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally
to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 5. This port
supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the
communication language developed by ALSTOM Grid SAS to allow
communication with its range of protection relays. The front port
is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program
MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software package. d Figure
6: Front port connection The relay is a Data Communication
Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays
9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data Pin no.
3 Rx Receive data Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common None of the other
pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are
normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial
port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25
Way 9 Way Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common For successful data communication,
the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC,
and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE
with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial
connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3
to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of
difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx
and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is
used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or
if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 17/24
Figure 7: PC relay signal connection Having made the physical
connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings
must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the
table below: Protocol Courier Baud rate 19,200 bits/s Courier
address 1 Message format 11 bit — 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1
parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit The inactivity timer for the
front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay
will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no
messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any
password access level that has been enabled will be revoked. 3.8
First rear communication port Rear port 1 (RP1) support one of four
communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103),
the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The
rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485
serial data communication and is intended for use with a
permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the
three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other
is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is
selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not
polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0
care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol
provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
Communications column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. The first cell
down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the
rear port. 3.8.1 Courier communication Courier is the communication
language developed by ALSTOM Grid — SAS to allow remote
interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a
master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the
form of a database, and respond with information from the database
when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit
which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as
MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a
Windows NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically
designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port
to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ
K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is
available from ALSTOM Grid SAS. A typical connection arrangement is
shown in Figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible
connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master
station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter.
Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in
length and have up to 32 relays connected to it. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 18/24 P543, P544, P545, P546
P0109ENe Figure 8: Remote communication connection arrangements
Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Only two settings
apply to the rear port using Courier, the relays address and the
inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud
rate of 64kbits/s. Move down the Communications column from the
column heading to the first cell down which indicates the
communication protocol: RP1 Protocol Courier The next cell down the
column controls the address of the relay: Introduction P54x/EN
IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 19/24 RP1
Address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur,
as indicated in Figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a
unique address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between
0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The
Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate
with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:
RP1 Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how
long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear
port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set
between 1 and 30 minutes. As an alternative to running courier over
K-Bus, courier over EIA485 may be selected. The next cell down
indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP1 Card Status EIA232
OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration RP1
Port Config EIA232 (EIA(RS)232) The port can be configured for
EIA485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA485 the next cell selects the
communication mode. RP1 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is
either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or
10-bit no parity. In the case of EIA485 the next cell down controls
the baud rate. For K-Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second
between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay
spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous.
Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s, 19200
bits/s and 38400 bits/s, Note that protection and disturbance
recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as
PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the Save changes cell
of the Configuration column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do
not require this action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication
protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar
fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays),
responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by
taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a
twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a
distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. P54x/EN IT/I53
Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 20/24 P543, P544, P545, P546 To
use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move
down the Communications column from the column heading to the first
cell down which indicates the communication protocol: RP1 Protocol
Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay:
RP1 Address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur,
and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique
address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1
and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down controls the inactivity timer: RP1 InactivTimer 10.00 mins The
inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without
receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its
default state, including revoking any password access that was
enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30
minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be
used: RP1 Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is
asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, 9600
bits/s, 19200 bits/s and 38400 bits/s. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set
on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the
parity format used in the data frames: RP1 Parity None The parity
can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that
set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the
format of the Date/Time (software 30 or later) Modbus IEC Time
Standard Introduction P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 21/24 The format can be selected to either Standard
(as per IEC60870-5-4 Binary Time 2a), the default, or to Reverse
for compatibility with MICOM product ranges. For further
information see P54x/EN CT section 3.8. 3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103
communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol
Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103
defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to
perform communication with protection equipment. The standard
configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted
pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC
60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic
connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay
operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a
master station. The method of communication uses standardised
messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use
the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relays
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the
keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that
the Comms settings cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described
below. Move down the Communications column from the column heading
to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: RP1
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC
60870-5-103 address of the relay: RP1 Address 162 Up to 32 relays
can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is
necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages
from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC
60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay
address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC
60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down the column controls the baud rate to be used: RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud
rates are supported by the relay, 9600 bits/s and 19200 bits/s. It
is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is
the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The
next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103
measurements: RP1 Meas period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The
interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can
be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column
controls the physical media used for the communication: P54x/EN
IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 22/24 P543, P544, P545,
P546 RP1 Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select
the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic
connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be
changed to Fibre optic. 3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0
protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol
specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay
operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the
protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear
port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave
devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the
relays communication settings must be configured. To do this use
the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check
that the Comms setting cell in the Configuration column is set to
Visible, then move to the Communications column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below.
Move down the Communications column from the column heading to the
first cell which indicates the communications protocol: RP1
Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the
relay: RP1 Address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP
3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a
unique address so that messages from the master control station are
accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by
the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell
down the column controls the baud rate to be used: RP1 Baud rate
9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates
are supported by the relay 1200bits/s, 2400bits/s, 4800bits/s,
9600bits/s, 19200bits/s and 38400bits/s. It is important that
whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set
on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column
controls the parity format used in the data frames: RP1 Parity None
The parity can be set to be one of None, Odd or Even. It is
important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is
the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. Introduction
P54x/EN IT/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 23/24
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request
from the master by the relay: RP1 Time Sync Enabled The time synch
can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the
DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.9 Second Rear
Communication Port (option) For relays with Courier, Modbus,
IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications
port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications
port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over
one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity
sensitive), twisted pair EIA485 (connection polarity sensitive) or
EIA232. The settings for this port are located immediately below
the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of
this chapter. Move down the settings until the following sub
heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates
the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol
Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware,
e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection
of the port configuration RP2 Port Config EIA232 (EIA(RS)232) The
port can be configured for EIA232, EIA485 or K-Bus. In the case of
EIA232 and EIA485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2
Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2 The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for
normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. 3.10
Ethernet Rear Port (option) If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is
ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See
P54x/EN UC section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware.
P54x/EN IT/I53 Introduction MiCOM P541, P542, Page 24/24 P543,
P544, P545, P546 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542,
P543, P544, P545, P546 APPLICATION NOTES P54x/EN AP/I53 Application
Notes MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Application Notes
P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 1/138
CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 11 1.1 Protection of overhead lines and
cable circuits 11 1.2 P540 relay 11 1.2.1 Protection features 11
1.2.2 Non-protection features 12 2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 14 2.1 Configuration column 14 2.2 Phase
current differential protection 15 2.2.1 Differential protection
configuration 15 2.2.2 Phase differential characteristics 16 2.2.3
Time alignment of current vectors 18 2.2.3.1 Time alignment of
current vectors without GPS input (Traditional Technique) 18
2.2.3.2 Time Alignment of Current Vectors with GPS input P545 &
P546 20 2.2.4 Capacitive charging current 22 2.2.5 Protection of
transformer feeders 23 2.2.5.1 Transformer magnetising inrush and
High set differential setting 24 2.2.5.2 Ratio correction (all
models) 25 2.2.5.3 Phase correction and zero sequence current
filtering 25 2.2.6 3 to 2 terminal reconfiguration 26 2.2.7 Mesh
corner and 1 breaker switched substations 27 2.2.8 Stub bus
protection 28 2.2.9 Small Tapped Loads (Tee Feeds) 28 2.2.10
Additional protection considerations 28 2.2.10.1 The minimum
operating current 28 2.2.10.2 Relay sensitivity under heavy load
conditions 29 2.2.11 Example setting 30 2.2.11.1 Differential
element 30 2.2.11.2 Transformer feeder examples 31 2.2.11.3 Teed
feeder example 33 2.2.11.4 Three winding transformer in zone with
different rated CTs example 34 2.3 Distance protection 36 2.3.1
Phase fault distance protection 37 2.3.2 Earth fault distance
protection 38 2.3.3 Setting guidelines 38 2.3.3.1 Zone reaches 38
P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 2/138 P543,
P544, P545, P546 2.3.3.2 Zone time delay settings 39 2.3.3.3
Residual compensation for earth fault elements 39 2.3.3.4 Resistive
reach calculation — phase fault elements 39 2.3.3.5 Resistive reach
calculation — earth fault elements 41 2.3.3.6 Effects of mutual
coupling on distance settings 41 2.3.3.7 Effect of mutual coupling
on Zone 1 setting 41 2.3.3.8 Effect of mutual coupling on Zone 2
setting & Zone 3 when set in the forward direction 41 2.3.4
Power swing blocking (PSB) 42 2.3.4.1 The power swing blocking
element 42 2.3.4.2 Unblocking of the relay for faults during power
swings 43 2.3.5 Teed feeder protection 43 2.3.6 Distance Zone
Characteristic Generation 44 2.3.7 Setting example 44 2.3.7.1 Zone
1 reactive reach setting 45 2.3.7.2 Zone 2 reactive reach setting
45 2.3.7.3 Zone 3 reactive reach setting 46 2.3.7.4 Load avoidance
46 2.3.7.5 Phase element resistive reach settings 46 2.3.7.6
Residual compensation setting 47 2.3.7.7 Ground element resistive
reach settings 47 2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection 47 2.4.1
Overcurrent intertripping feature 49 2.4.2 Overcurrent back-up on
communication channel failure 49 2.4.3 Example setting 50 2.4.4
Directional overcurrent characteristic angle settings 51 2.5
Thermal overload protection 51 2.5.1 Single time constant
characteristic 52 2.5.2 Dual time constant characteristic 52 2.5.3
Setting guidelines 53 2.5.3.1 Single time constant characteristic
53 2.5.3.2 Dual time constant characteristic 53 2.6 Earth fault
protection 53 2.6.1 Directional earth fault protection (P543, P544,
P545 and P546 only) 56 2.6.1.1 Residual voltage polarisation 56
2.6.1.2 Negative sequence polarisation 56 2.6.2 General setting
guidelines for DEF 57 2.7 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) 57
Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545,
P546 Page 3/138 2.7.1 Breaker failure protection configurations 57
2.7.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers 58 2.7.3 Typical
settings 59 2.7.3.1 Breaker fail timer settings 59 2.7.3.2 Breaker
fail undercurrent settings 59 2.8 Broken conductor detection 59
2.8.1 Setting guidelines 60 2.8.2 Example setting 61 2.9
Intertripping facilities 61 2.9.1 Permissive Intertrip 61 2.9.2
User Defined Intertrip/Inter-Relay Commands 62 2.9.2.1 Direct
intertrip 62 3. APPLICATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 63 3.1
Three phase auto-reclosing (applicable to P542) 63 3.1.1 Logic
functions 65 3.1.1.1 Opto-isolated logic inputs 65 3.1.1.1.1 CB
healthy 65 3.1.1.1.2 BAR 65 3.1.1.1.3 Reset lockout 65 3.1.1.2
Autoreclose logic outputs 65 3.1.1.2.1 AR in progress 66 3.1.1.2.2
Successful close 66 3.1.1.2.3 AR status 66 3.1.1.2.4 Block main
prot 66 3.1.1.2.5 Dead T in prog 66 3.1.1.2.6 Auto-close 66 3.1.1.3
Auto reclose alarms 66 3.1.1.3.1 AR CB unhealthy (latched) 66
3.1.1.3.2 AR lockout (self reset) 66 3.1.2 Auto-reclose logic
operating sequence 66 3.1.3 Main operating features 67 3.1.3.1
Operation modes 67 3.1.3.2 Autoreclose initiation 67 3.1.3.3
Blocking instantaneous protection during autoreclose cycle 67
3.1.3.4 Reclaim timer initiation 68 3.1.3.5 Autoreclose inhibit
following manual close 68 3.1.3.6 AR lockout 68 P54x/EN AP/I53
Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 4/138 P543, P544, P545,
P546 3.1.3.6.1 Reset from lockout 68 3.1.4 Setting guidelines 68
3.1.4.1 Number of shots 68 3.1.4.2 Dead timer setting 69 3.1.4.2.1
Load 69 3.1.4.2.2 Circuit breaker 69 3.1.4.2.3 Fault de-ionising
time 70 3.1.4.2.4 Protection reset 70 3.1.4.3 Reclaim timer setting
70 3.2 Single and three phase auto-reclosing (applicable to P543
& P545) 71 3.2.1 Time Delayed and High speed auto-reclosing 71
3.2.2 Relay settings 71 3.2.3 Autoreclose logic inputs 73 3.2.3.1
CB Healthy 73 3.2.3.2 BAR 73 3.2.3.3 Reset lockout 74 3.2.3.4 Pole
discrepancy 74 3.2.3.5 Enable 1 pole AR 74 3.2.3.6 Enable 3 pole AR
74 3.2.3.7 External trip 74 3.2.4 Internal Signals 74 3.2.4.1 Trip
Initiate signals 74 3.2.4.2 Circuit Breaker Status 74 3.2.4.3 Check
Synch OK and System Check OK 74 3.2.5 Autoreclose logic outputs 74
3.2.5.1 AR 1 pole in progress 75 3.2.5.2 AR 3 pole in progress 75
3.2.5.3 Successful close 75 3.2.5.4 AR status 75 3.2.5.5 Auto close
75 3.2.6 Autoreclose alarms 75 3.2.6.1 AR No Checksync (latched) 75
3.2.6.2 AR CB Unhealthy (latched) 75 3.2.6.3 AR lockout (self
reset) 75 3.2.7 Autoreclose logic operating sequence 75 3.2.8 Main
operating features 78 3.2.8.1 Autoreclose modes 78 3.2.8.2
Autoreclose initiation 78 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM
P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 5/138 3.2.8.3 Autoreclose
inhibit following manual close 79 3.2.8.4 AR lockout 79 3.2.8.5
Reset from lockout 79 3.2.8.6 System check on shot 1 (called Check
Sinchronising for fast 3 phase reclose on software 13 or previous)
79 3.2.8.7 Immediate Autoreclose with Check Synchronism (since
software 20 and onwards) 79 3.2.9 Setting guidelines 80 3.2.9.1
Number of Shots 80 3.2.9.2 Dead Timer Setting 80 3.2.9.3
De-Ionising Time 80 3.2.9.4 Example Minimum Dead Time Calculation
81 3.2.9.5 Discrimination Timer Setting (since software 20 and
onwards) 81 3.2.9.6 Reclaim Timer Setting 81 3.3 System Checks
(applicable to P543 & P545) 82 3.3.1 System Checks (for version
20 and onwards) 82 3.3.1.1 Overview 82 3.3.1.2 VT selection 82
3.3.1.3 Basic functionality 82 3.3.1.4 System Check Logic Inputs 84
3.3.1.5 System Check Logic Outputs 84 3.3.1.6 Check sync 2 and
system split 84 3.3.1.7 Synchronism check 85 3.3.1.8 Slip control
by timer 86 3.3.1.9 System split 86 3.3.2 Check synchronisation
(applicable to P543 & P545) For version 13 and previous 87 3.4
Autoreclose /Check Synchronisation Interface (Valid for software 20
and onwards) 89 3.5 Voltage transformer supervision (VTS) (P543,
P544, P545 & P546 only) 90 3.5.1 Loss of one or two phase
voltages 90 3.5.2 Loss of all three phase voltages under load
conditions 90 3.5.3 Absence of three phase voltages upon line
energisation 90 3.5.4 Menu settings 91 3.6 Circuit breaker state
monitoring 91 3.6.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring features 92
3.7 Circuit breaker condition monitoring (P541, P542, P543 and
P545) 93 3.7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features 93
3.7.2 Setting guidelines 94 3.7.2.1 Setting the E I^ thresholds 94
3.7.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds 94 P54x/EN
AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 6/138 P543, P544,
P545, P546 3.7.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds 95 3.7.2.4
Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds 95 3.8 Circuit
breaker control 95 3.8.1 CB Control using Hotkeys (Since software
20 and onwards) 97 3.9 Fault locator (P543, P544, P545 and P546) 98
3.9.1 Fault locator 98 3.9.1.1 Introduction 98 3.9.1.2 Basic theory
for ground faults 99 3.9.1.3 Data acquisition and buffer processing
99 3.9.1.4 Faulted phase selection 99 3.9.1.5 The fault location
calculation 99 3.9.1.5.1 Obtaining the vectors 100 3.9.1.5.2
Solving the equation for the fault location 100 3.9.1.6 Mutual
compensation 101 3.9.1.7 Fault locator settings 101 3.9.1.8 Fault
locator trigger 102 3.9.1.9 Setting example 102 3.10 Event &
fault records 103 3.10.1 Types of Event 104 3.10.1.1 Change of
state of opto-isolated inputs 104 3.10.1.2 Change of state of one
or more output relay contacts 104 3.10.1.3 Relay alarm conditions
104 3.10.1.4 Protection element starts and trips 105 3.10.1.5
General events 105 3.10.1.6 Fault records 105 3.10.1.7 Maintenance
reports 105 3.10.1.8 Setting Changes 106 3.10.2 Resetting of
event/fault records 106 3.10.3 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1
Support Software 106 3.10.4 Event Filtering 107 3.11 Disturbance
recorder 107 3.12 Measurements 108 Application Notes P54x/EN
AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545, P546 Page 7/138 3.12.1
Measured voltages and currents 109 3.12.2 Sequence voltages and
currents 109 3.12.3 Slip Frequency (Since software 20 and onwards)
109 3.12.4 Power and energy quantities 109 3.12.5 Rms. Voltages and
Currents 110 3.12.6 Demand Values 110 3.12.6.1 Fixed Demand Values
110 3.12.6.2 Rolling Demand Values 110 3.12.6.3 Peak Demand Values
110 3.12.7 Settings 110 3.12.7.1 Default Display 111 3.12.7.2 Local
Values 111 3.12.7.3 Remote Values 111 3.12.7.4 Remote2 Values
(Since software 12 and onwards) 111 3.12.7.5 Measurement Ref 111
3.12.7.6 Measurement Mode 111 3.12.7.7 Fixed Demand Period 111
3.12.7.8 Rolling Sub-Period and Number of Sub-Periods 111 3.12.7.9
Distance Unit 111 3.12.7.10 Fault Location 111 3.13 Changing
Setting Groups 111 3.14 Control inputs (Since software 20 and
onwards) 112 3.15 Real time clock synchronization via opto-inputs
(Since software 20 and onwards) 113 4. FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS 114
4.1 Logic input mapping 114 4.2 Relay output mapping 115 4.3 Relay
output conditioning 116 4.4 LED mapping 116 4.5 LED output
conditioning 117 4.6 Fault recorder start mapping 117 5. CURRENT
TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 118 5.1 Current differential protection
118 6. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU 119 6.1 Opto I/P status 119 6.2
Relay O/P status 120 6.3 Test Port status 120 6.4 LED status 120
P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page 8/138 P543,
P544, P545, P546 6.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8 120 6.6 Test mode 120 6.7
Test pattern 121 6.8 Contact test 121 6.9 Test LEDs 121 6.10 Test
autoreclose 121 6.11 Test Loopback 121 6.12 DDB Status 122 6.13
Using a monitor/download port test box 122 7. COMMUNICATIONS
BETWEEN RELAYS 122 7.1 Communications link options 122 7.1.1 Direct
optical fibre link, 850nm multi-mode fibre 122 7.1.2 Direct optical
fibre link, 1300nm multi-mode fibre 122 7.1.3 Direct optical fibre
link, 1300nm single-mode fibre 123 7.1.4 Direct optical fibre link,
1550nm single-mode fibre 123 7.1.5 IEEE C37.94 interface to
multiplexer (since software 30) 123 7.1.6 Switched communication
networks 123 7.1.6.1 Switched communication networks (P541, P542,
P543 & P544) 123 7.1.6.2 Switched communication networks with
Permanent or Semi-Permanent Split Routings 125 7.2 Optical budgets
125 7.3 P590 Series optical fibre to electrical interface units 126
7.3.1 Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using
auxiliary optical fibres and type P591 interface 126 7.3.2
Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary
optical fibres and type P592 interface 127 7.3.3 Multiplexer link
with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibres and
type P593 interface 127 7.4 Protection communications scheme set-up
128 7.4.1 Dual redundant (Hot Standby) 129 7.5 Protection
communications address 129 7.6 Reconfiguration of three-ended
system 130 7.6.1 User reconfiguration 131 7.6.2 Energisation
reconfiguration 132 7.7 Clock source 132 7.7.1 Internal clock
source 132 7.7.2 External clock source 133 7.8 Data rate 133 7.9
Communication alarm 133 7.10 Communication error statistics 133
Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544, P545,
P546 Page 9/138 7.11 Communications delay timer 133 7.12
Communications fail timer 134 7.13 Communications fail mode 134
7.14 MiCOM P594 Global Positioning System (GPS) Synchronising
Module 134 7.14.1 Synchronising Module Output 135 7.14.2 P594
Operation 136 7.14.3 P594 Options 137 7.14.4 P594 Synchronising
Module Block Diagram 138 Figure 1: Relay bias characteristic 17
Figure 2: Propagation delay measurement 19 Figure 3: Example of
switched Synchronous Digital Hierarchy 20 Figure 4: Data
Transmission 21 Figure 5: Capacitive charging current 22 Figure 6:
Transformer magnetising characteristic 24 Figure 7: Magnetising
inrush waveforms 25 Figure 8: Need for zero-sequence current
filtering 26 Figure 9: Breaker and a half switched substation 28
Figure 10: Typical plain feeder circuit 30 Figure 11: Typical
transformer feeder circuit 31 Figure 12: Typical Teed Feeder
Application 33 Figure 13: Three Winding Transformer in Zone
Application 35 Figure 14: Phase fault distance characteristics 38
Figure 15: Earth fault distance characteristics 38 Figure 16:
Setting of resistive reach to avoid load 40 Figure 17: Zone 1 reach
settings for parallel lines 41 Figure 18: Mutual coupling example
Zone 2 reach considerations 42 Figure 19: Power swing blocking
characteristic 43 Figure 20: Teed feeder application apparent
impedance seen by distance relay 44 Figure 21: Example system 45
Figure 22: Ring main application overcurrent back-up 50 Figure 23:
Permissive intertrip 61 Figure 24: Direct intertrip 62 Figure 25:
P542 Auto Reclose Timing Diagram 65 Figure 26: Autoreclose timing
diagram 77 P54x/EN AP/I53 Application Notes MiCOM P541, P542,Page
10/138 P543, P544, P545, P546 Figure 27: Autoreclose timing diagram
77 Figure 28: Autoreclose timing diagram 78 Figure 29: Autoreclose
timing diagram 78 Figure 30: Synchro check and synchro split
functionality 87 Figure 31: Remote control of circuit breaker 96
Figure 32: CB Control hotkey menu 98 Figure 33: Two-machine
equivalent circuit 99 Figure 34: Fault locator selection of fault
current zero 100 Figure 35: Switched communication network 124
Figure 36: Transient bias characteristic 125 Figure 37: 3-terminal
system connection 130 Figure 38: Network incorporating GPS
synchronising module 134 Figure 39: GPS synchronising module output
local end 135 Figure 40: GPS Synchronising module output local and
remote ends 136 Figure 41: P594 Synchronising Module Block Diagram
138 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/I53MiCOM P541, P542, P543, P544,
P545, P546 Page 11/138 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Protection of overhead
lines and cable circuits Overhead lines, typically ranging from
10kV distribution lines to 800kV transmission lines, are probably
the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system.
It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them
provides secure and reliable operation. For distribution systems,
continuity of supply is of paramount importance. The majority of
faults on overhead lines are transient or semi-permanent in nature.
Multi-shot autoreclose cycles are therefore commonly used in
conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements to increase system
availability. For permanent faults it is essential that only the
faulted section of plant is isolated. As such, high speed,
discriminative fault clearance is often a fundamental requirement
of any protection scheme on a distribution network. The
requirements for a transmission network must also take into account
system stability. Where systems are not highly interconnected the
use of single phase tripping and high speed autoreclosure is often
required. This in turn dictates the need for very high speed
protection to reduce overall fault clearance times. Many line
configurations exist which need to be addressed. Transmission
applications may typically consist of 2 or 3 terminal applications,
possibly fed from breaker and a half or mesh arrangements. Lower
voltage applications may again be 2 or 3 terminal configurations
with the added complications of in zone transformers or small teed
load transformers. Charging current may also adversely affect
protection. This is a problem particularly with cables and long
transmission lines. Both the initial inrush and steady state
charging current must not cause relay maloperation and pre